Evolving new molecular function

ABSTRACT

Nature evolves biological molecules such as proteins through iterated rounds of diversification, selection, and amplification. The power of Nature and the flexibility of organic synthesis are combined in nucleic acid-templated synthesis. The present invention provides a variety of template architectures for performing nucleic acid-templated synthesis, methods for increasing the selectivity of nucleic acid-templated reactions, methods for performing stereoselective nucleic acid-templated reactions, methods of selecting for reaction products resulting from nucleic acid-templated synthesis, and methods of identifying new chemical reactions based on nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

PRIORITY INFORMATION

This application claims the benefit of (i) U.S. Provisional PatentApplication No. 60/404,395, filed Aug. 19, 2002, (ii) U.S. ProvisionalPatent Application No. 60/419,667, filed Oct. 18, 2002, (iii) U.S.Provisional Patent Application No. 60/432,812, filed Dec. 11, 2002, (iv)U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/444,770, filed Feb. 4, 2003,(v) U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/457,789, filed Mar. 26,2003, (vi) U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/469,866, filed May12, 2003, and (vii) U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/479,494,filed Jun. 18, 2003, the disclosures of each of which are incorporatedby reference herein. The application is also related to U.S. ProvisionalPatent Application Nos. 60/277,081 (filed Mar. 19, 2001), 60/277,094(filed Mar. 19, 2001), 60/306,691 (filed Jul. 20, 2001), and 60/353,565(filed Feb. 1, 2002), as well as to U.S. patent application Ser. Nos.10/101,030 (filed Mar. 19, 2002) and Ser. No. 10/102,056 (filed Mar. 19,2002), and to International Patent Application serial number US02/08546(filed Mar. 19, 2002).

GOVERNMENT FUNDING

The research described in this application was sponsored, in part, bythe Office for Naval Research under Contract No. N00014-00-1-0596 andGrant No. 00014-03-1-0749. The United States Government may have certainrights in the invention.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The classic “chemical approach” to generating molecules with newfunctions has been used extensively over the last century inapplications ranging from drug discovery to synthetic methodology tomaterials science. In this approach, researchers synthesize or isolatecandidate molecules, assay these candidates for desired properties,determine the structures of active compounds if unknown, formulatestructure-activity relationships based on available assay and structuraldata, and then synthesize a new generation of molecules designed topossess improved properties. While combinatorial chemistry methods (see,for example, Eliseev et al. (1999) COMBINATORIAL CHEMISTRY IN BIOLOGY243: 159-172; Kuntz et al. (1999) CURRENT OPINION IN CHEMICAL BIOLOGY 3:313-319; Liu et al. (1999) ANGEW. CHEM. INTL. ED. ENG. 38: 36) haveincreased the throughput of this approach, its fundamental limitationsremain unchanged. Several factors limit the effectiveness of thechemical approach to generating molecular function. First, the abilityto accurately predict the structural changes that will lead to newfunction is often inadequate due to subtle conformational rearrangementsof molecules, unforeseen solvent interactions, or unknown stereochemicalrequirements of binding or reaction events. The resulting complexity ofstructure-activity relationships frequently limits the success ofrational ligand or catalyst design, including those efforts conducted ina high-throughput manner. Second, the need to assay or screen, ratherthan select, each member of a collection of candidates limits the numberof molecules that can be searched in each experiment. Finally, the lackof a way to amplify synthetic molecules places requirements on theminimum amount of material that must be produced for characterization,screening, and structure elucidation. As a result, it can be difficultto generate libraries of more than roughly 10⁶ different syntheticcompounds.

In contrast, Nature generates proteins with new functions using afundamentally different method that overcomes many of these limitations.In this approach, a protein with desired properties induces the survivaland amplification of the information encoding that protein. Thisinformation is diversified through spontaneous mutation and DNArecombination, and then translated into a new generation of candidateproteins using the ribosome. Unlike the linear chemical approachdescribed above, the steps used by Nature form a cycle of molecularevolution. Proteins emerging from this process have been directlyselected, rather than simply screened, for desired activities. Becausethe biomolecules that encode evolving proteins (e.g., DNA) can beamplified, a single protein molecule with desired activity can in theorylead to the survival and propagation of the DNA encoding its structure.

Acknowledging the power and efficiency of Nature's approach, researchershave used molecular evolution to generate many proteins and nucleicacids with novel binding or catalytic properties (see, for example,Minshull et al. (1999) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 3: 284-90;Schmidt-Dannert et al. (1999) TRENDS BIOTECHNOL. 17: 135-6; Wilson etal. (1999) ANNU. REV. BIOCHEM. 68: 611-47). Proteins and nucleic acidsevolved by researchers have demonstrated value as research tools,diagnostics, industrial reagents, and therapeutics, and have greatlyexpanded the understanding of the molecular interactions that endowproteins and nucleic acids with binding or catalytic properties (see,Famulok et al. (1998) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 2: 320-7).

Despite Nature's efficient approach to generating function, Nature'smolecular evolution is limited to two types of “natural” molecules(proteins and nucleic acids) because thus far the information in nucleicacids can only be translated into proteins or into other nucleic acids.Unfortunately, many synthetic molecules of interest do not in generalhave nucleic acid or protein backbones. An ideal approach to generatingfunctional molecules merges the most powerful aspects of molecularevolution with the flexibility of synthetic chemistry. Clearly, enablingthe evolution of non-natural synthetic small molecules and polymers,much as Nature evolves biomolecules, would lead to much more effectivemethods of discovering new synthetic ligands, receptors, and catalystsdifficult or impossible to generate using rational design.

Although these concepts have been brought together to permit nucleicacid-templated synthesis of small molecules (see, for example, Gartner &Liu (2001) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 123: 6961-6963) there is still an ongoingneed for improvements in these core technologies to permit the moreefficient synthesis, selection, amplification, and evolution ofmolecules of interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The invention provides a variety of methods and compositions that expandthe scope of template-directed synthesis, selection, amplification andevolution of molecules of interest. During nucleic acid-templatedsynthesis, the information encoded within a nucleic acid template isused to bring two or more reactants together into reactive proximity.These methods permit the creation of, for example, small molecule andpolymer libraries that have not been possible to create to date usingconventional combinational chemistries.

In one aspect, the invention provides a method of performing nucleicacid-templated synthesis using a template having an “omega” or “Ω” typearchitecture. This type of template permits distance-dependent nucleicacid-templated reactions to be encoded by bases far removed from theassociated reactive unit. The method involves providing (i) a templatecomprising a first reactive unit associated with a first oligonucleotidecomprising a codon and (ii) a transfer unit comprising a second reactiveunit associated with a second oligonucleotide comprising an anti-codonthat is capable of annealing to the codon. The codon and/or theanti-codon include first and second regions spaced apart from oneanother. The oligonucleotides then are annealed together to bring thereactive units into reactive proximity. When the oligonucleotides annealto one another, the codon (or anti-codon) with the spaced-apart regionsproduce a loop of oligonucleotides not annealed to the correspondinganti-codon (or codon). A covalent bond-forming reaction then is inducedbetween the reactive units to produce the reaction product.

In one embodiment, at least one of the reactive units are attachedadjacent a terminal region of its corresponding oligonucleotide. Inanother embodiment, the codon or anti-codon is disposed more than onebase away (for example, 10, 20, 30 bases or more) from its correspondingreactive unit. The first spaced apart region typically is disposeddirectly adjacent a terminus of its corresponding oligonucleotide. Thefirst spaced apart region preferably includes, for example, three, four,or five nucleotides, although other embodiments (e.g., more than fivenucleotides) are also envisioned. The second region may be disposed, forexample, at least twenty or at least thirty bases away from itscorresponding reactive unit. More particularly, the end of the secondregion closest to the reactive unit may be disposed, for example, atleast ten, twenty, thirty or more bases from the end of theoligonucleotide attached to its reactive unit. The template may includeadditional (e.g., 2, 3, 4, or more than 4) codons, in which case acorresponding number of transfer units can be annealed to the template,optionally permitting multi-step or alternative syntheses.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method of performing anucleic acid-templated synthesis using a template having a “T” typearchitecture. The T architecture permits two nucleic acid-templatedreactions to take place on a single template in a single step. Themethod involves providing (i) a template comprising a first reactiveunit (e.g., a scaffold molecule) associated with a first oligonucleotidehaving a codon, and (ii) a transfer unit comprising a second reactiveunit associated with a second oligonucleotide having an anti-codoncapable of annealing to the codon. The first reactive unit is attached,preferably covalently, to an attachment site intermediate the proximaland distal ends of the first oligonucleotide of the template. Duringsynthesis, the oligonucleotides of the template and transfer unit areannealed to one another to bring the reactive units into reactiveproximity, and a covalent bond-forming reaction between the reactiveunits is induced.

In one embodiment of the T type architecture, the template also includesa second, different codon capable of annealing to a second, differentanti-codon sequence of a second, different transfer unit. In thisembodiment, the first codon is located proximal to the attachment siteand the second codon, if present, is located distal to the attachmentsite. If a second transfer unit comprising a third reactive unitassociated with a third oligonucleotide having a second, differentanti-codon sequence capable of annealing to the second codon isprovided, the second transfer unit may bind to the template at thesecond codon position. Accordingly, when the first and second transferunits are combined with the template, the first anti-codon of the firsttransfer unit anneals to the first codon of the template and the secondanti-codon of the second transfer unit anneals to the second codon ofthe template. This system permits two reactions to occur simultaneouslyor sequentially on a single template in a single step.

In another aspect, the invention provides a series of methods forincreasing reaction selectivity between reactants in a templatedsynthesis. In one approach, the method comprises providing a templateand at least two transfer units. The template comprises a first reactiveunit associated with a first oligonucleotide comprising a predeterminedcodon sequence. The first transfer unit comprises a second reactive unitassociated with a second oligonucleotide comprising an anti-codonsequence capable of annealing to the codon sequence. The second transferunit comprises a third reactive unit, different from the second reactiveunit. The third reactive unit, however, is associated with a thirdoligonucleotide that lacks an anti-codon sequence capable of annealingto the codon sequence. The template and transfer units are mixed underconditions to permit annealing of the second oligonucleotide to thefirst oligonucleotide, thereby to enhance covalent bond formationbetween the second and first reactive units relative to covalent bondformation between the third and first reactive units.

This method may be particularly helpful when the second and thirdreactive units are each capable of reacting independently with the firstreactive unit. Furthermore, the method may also be helpful when thesecond and third reactive units are capable of reacting with oneanother, for example, to modify or inactivate one another. Accordingly,this type of method permits a series of otherwise incompatible reactionsto occur in the same solution, for example, where a reaction between thesecond and third reactive units is incompatible with a reaction betweenthe second reactive unit and the first reactive unit. The method mayenhance covalent bond formation between the first and second reactiveunits by at least 2-fold, at least 5-fold, at least 10-fold, or at least50-fold relative to covalent bond formation between the first and thirdreactive units. Collectively, these advantages permit a one-pot orderedmulti-step synthesis, in which a sequence of reactions is programmed bythe sequence of a template oligonucleotide. Thus, a sequence of at least2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or more reactions can take place in an ordered manner ina single solution, even when the reactants would interfere with eachother using conventional, non-templated chemistries.

In one embodiment, the template, the first transfer unit, and/or thesecond transfer unit are associated with a capturable moiety, forexample, biotin, avidin, or streptavidin. If a capturable moiety ispresent, the method may include capturing the capturable moiety as a wayto enrich a reaction product from a reaction mixture.

In another approach, the method comprises providing (i) a templatecomprising a first oligonucleotide having first and second codonsequences (ii) a first transfer unit, (iii) a second transfer unit, and(iv) a third transfer unit. The first transfer unit comprises a firstreactive unit associated with a second oligonucleotide comprising afirst anti-codon sequence capable of annealing to the first codonsequence. The second transfer unit comprises a second reactive unitassociated with a third oligonucleotide comprising a second anti-codonsequence capable of annealing to the second codon sequence. The thirdtransfer unit comprises a third reactive unit associated with a fourtholigonucleotide sequence that lacks an anti-codon sequence capable ofannealing to the first or second codon sequences. The template, firsttransfer unit, second transfer unit, and third transfer unit then aremixed under conditions to permit (i) annealing of the first anti-codonsequence to the first codon sequence and (ii) annealing of the secondanti-codon sequence to the second codon sequence thereby to enhancecovalent bond formation between the first and second reactive unitsrelative to covalent bond formation between the third reactive unit andthe first reactive unit and/or between the third reactive unit thesecond reactive unit. This type of method may be particularly useful forproducing non-natural polymers by nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

In one embodiment, the template is associated with a capturable moiety,for example, biotin, avidin, or streptavidin. The capturable moiety mayalso be a reaction product resulting from a reaction between the firstand second reactive units when the first and second reactive units areannealed to a template. If a capturable moiety is present, the methodmay include capturing the capturable moiety as a way to enrich areaction production from the reaction mixture.

This type of method is also helpful when the third reactive unit iscapable of reacting with the first and/or second reactive units. Inother words, the reaction between the first and third reactive unitsand/or between the second and third reactive units may be incompatiblewith the reaction between the first and second reactive units. Themethod may enhance covalent bond formation between the first and secondreactive units by at least 2-fold, at least 5-fold, at least 10-fold, orat least 50-fold relative to covalent bond formation between the firstand third reactive units.

In another aspect, the invention provides a series of methods forperforming stereoselective nucleic acid-templated synthesis. Thestereoselectivity of the synthesis may result from the choice of aparticular template, transfer unit, reactive unit, hybridized templateand transfer unit, stereoselective catalyst, or any combination of theabove. The resulting product may be at least 60%, at least 70%, at least80%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 98%, or at least 99%stereochemically pure.

Generally, the method involves providing (i) a template comprising afirst oligonucleotide that optionally is associated with a reactive unitand (ii) one or more transfer units, each comprising a secondoligonucleotide associated with a reactive unit. Annealing of the firstand second oligonucleotides brings at least two reactive units intoreactive proximity and to react to produce a reaction product where thereaction product contains a chiral center and is of at least 60%, morepreferably at least 80%, and more preferably at least 95%stereochemically pure at the chiral center. It is contemplated that thismethod can be accomplished when one reactive unit is associated with thetemplate and the other reactive unit is associated with the transferunit. Also, it is contemplated that this method can be accomplished whenthe template does not provide a reactive unit and two transfer unitswhen they anneal to the template provide the two reactive units thatcome into reactive proximity to produce the reaction product.

In one approach, the method involves providing at least two templatesand at least one transfer unit. One template includes a firstoligonucleotide associated with a first reactive unit comprising a firststereochemical configuration, and the other template includes anotherfirst oligonucleotide associated with another first reactive unit havinga second, different stereochemical configuration. The transfer unitcomprises a second reactive unit associated with a secondoligonucleotide including a sequence complementary to a sequence of thefirst oligonucleotide of the template. The first and secondoligonucleotides then are annealed under conditions to permit the secondreactive unit of the transfer unit to react preferentially with eitherthe first reactive unit of the first stereochemical configuration or thefirst reactive unit of the second stereochemical configuration toproduce a reaction product.

The resulting reaction product may have a particular stereochemicalconfiguration. In one embodiment, a stereochemical configuration ormacromolecular conformation of the first oligonucleotide of the templatedetermines which one of the first reactive units reacts with the secondreactive unit.

In a second approach, the method involves providing at least onetemplate and at least two transfer units. The template includes a firstoligonucleotide associated with a first reactive unit. One transfer unitcomprises a second oligonucleotide associated with a second reactiveunit having a first stereochemical configuration, and the other transferunit comprises another second oligonucleotide associated with a secondreactive unit having a second, different stereochemical configuration. Asequence of the second oligonucleotides is complementary to a sequenceof the first oligonucleotide. The first and second oligonucleotides thenare annealed under conditions to permit the first reactive unit of thetemplate to react preferentially with either the second reactive unithaving the first stereochemical configuration or with the secondreactive unit having the second stereochemical configuration to producea reaction product.

The resulting reaction product may have a particular stereochemicalconfiguration. In one embodiment, a stereochemical configuration ormacromolecular conformation of the second oligonucleotide determineswhich of the second reactive units reacts with the first reactive unit.

In a third approach, the method involves providing at least one templateand at least two transfer units, wherein one or optionally both of thetransfer units comprise a pair of reactive units with one reactive unitof the pair having a first stereochemical configuration and the otherreactive unit of the pair having a second, different stereochemicalconfiguration. The template comprises a first oligonucleotide comprisinga first codon sequence and a second codon sequence. One transfer unit ofa first pair of transfer units includes a second oligonucleotide with afirst anti-codon sequence associated with a first reactive unit having afirst stereochemical configuration. The other transfer unit of the firstpair of transfer units includes another second oligonucleotideassociated with a second stereochemical configuration of the firstreactive unit. The second transfer unit includes a third oligonucleotidewith a second anti-codon sequence associated with a second reactiveunit. The template, the first pair of transfer units, and the secondtransfer unit are annealed to permit a member of the first pair oftransfer units to react preferentially with the second transfer unit toproduce a reaction product. The resulting reaction product may have aparticular stereochemical configuration.

In one embodiment, a stereochemical configuration or macromolecularconformation of the second oligonucleotide determines which member ofthe first pair of transfer units reacts preferentially to produce thereaction product.

In one embodiment, the method involves providing a template and at leasttwo pairs of transfer units. The template comprises a firstoligonucleotide comprising first and second codon sequences. Onetransfer unit of the first pair comprises a second oligonucleotide witha first anti-codon sequence associated with a first reactive unit havinga first stereochemical configuration. The other transfer unit of thefirst pair comprises the second oligonucleotide with the firstanti-codon sequence associated with a first reactive unit having asecond, different stereochemical configuration. One transfer unit of thesecond pair of transfer units comprises a third oligonucleotide having asecond, different anti-codon sequence associated with a second reactiveunit having a first stereochemical configuration. The other transferunit of the second pair comprises the third oligonucleotide with thesecond anti-codon sequence associated with the second reactive unithaving a second, different stereochemical configuration. The template,the first pair of transfer units and the second pair of transfer unitsare annealed to permit a member of the first pair of transfer units toreact preferentially with a member of the second pair of transfer unitsto produce a reaction product.

In one embodiment, a stereochemical configuration or macromolecularconformation of the second oligonucleotide determines which member ofthe first pair of transfer units reacts preferentially to produce thereaction product. In addition, a stereochemical configuration ormacromolecular conformation of the third oligonucleotide determineswhich member of the second pair of transfer units reacts preferentiallyto produce the reaction product.

In another aspect, the invention provides a method for enriching aproduct of a templated synthesis reaction. The method comprisesproviding a first library of molecules comprising a plurality ofreaction products associated with a corresponding plurality ofoligonucleotides, wherein each oligonucleotide comprises a nucleotidesequence indicative of the associated reaction product. A portion of thereaction products in the first library are capable of binding to apreselected moiety. The first library then is exposed to the bindingmoiety under conditions to permit reaction product capable of bindingthe binding moiety to do so. Unbound reaction products are removed, andbound reaction product then is eluted from the binding moiety to producea second library of molecules enriched at least 10-fold, more preferablyat least 50-fold, relative to the first library, for reaction productsthat bind the binding moiety.

In one embodiment, the binding moiety, for example, a targetbiomolecule, for example, a protein, is immobilized on a solid support.In another embodiment, the second library is enriched at least 100-foldor at least 1,000-fold for reaction products that bind to the bindingmoiety. Furthermore, it is contemplated that the steps of exposing thelibrary to the binding moiety, removing unbound reaction products, andeluting bound reaction products can be repeated (e.g., repeated one,two, three or more times). Repetition of these steps preferably yields asecond library enriched at least 1,000-fold, more preferably, at least10,000-fold, or, more preferably, at least 100,000-fold, for reactionproducts that bind to the binding moiety.

In one embodiment, the oligonucleotide attached to the selected librarymember includes a first sequence that identifies a first reactive unitthat produced the reaction product bindable by the preselected bindingmoiety. Preferably, the oligonucleotide also includes a second sequencethat identifies a second reactive unit that produced the reactionproduct bindable by the preselected binding moiety. By sequencing theoligonucleotide attached to the selected library member it is possibleto determine what reactants reacted with one another to produce thereaction product. Accordingly, using this approach it is possible todeduce the structure of the selected library member from the reactionhistory.

The method may further comprise the step of amplifying theoligonucleotide associated with the enriched reaction product and,preferably, determining the sequence of the amplified oligonucleotide.Furthermore, the reaction product can be further characterized by usinginformation encoded within the sequence of the oligonucleotide. Forexample, the sequence of the oligonucleotide may be determined and thenfrom the sequence it is possible to determine what reactive unitsreacted to produce the reaction product. Using a similar approach, it ispossible to identify the existence of new chemical reactions thatproduced the reaction product.

In another aspect, the invention provides a variety of methods foridentifying the existence of new chemical reactions. One approachinvolves, providing a library of molecules comprising a plurality ofreaction products associated with a corresponding plurality ofoligonucleotides, wherein each oligonucleotide includes a nucleotidesequence indicative of an associated reaction product. A particularreaction product associated with its corresponding oligonucleotide thenis selected, and characterized. Following characterization of thereaction product and identification of the reactive units that reactedto create the reaction product, it is possible to identify one or morenew chemical reactions necessary to produce the reaction product.

In one embodiment, the method further includes, after selecting thereaction product, amplifying its corresponding oligonucleotide. Theamplified oligonucleotide can then be sequenced to identify whatreactive units reacted to produce the reaction product. Theoligonucleotide may also be amplified for use in preparing more of theselected reaction product. In other embodiments, the oligonucleotide maybe mutated, and the resulting mutated oligonucleotide may be used in thecreation of a second generation library.

A second approach involves providing (i) a template and (ii) a firsttransfer unit. The template comprises a first reactive unit associatedwith a first oligonucleotide comprising a codon. The transfer unitcomprises a second reactive unit associated with a secondoligonucleotide comprising an anti-codon capable of annealing to thecodon. The oligonucleotides are annealed to bring the first and secondreactive units into reactive proximity. A covalent bond-forming reactionis induced between the reactive units to produce a reaction product. Thereaction product then is characterized, and a new chemical reactionnecessary to make the reaction product is identified using informationencoded by the template to identify the first and second reactive unitsthat reacted to produce the reaction product. The method may alsoinclude the step of selecting the reaction product prior to itscharacterization.

In a third approach, the invention involves providing at least (i) atemplate, (ii) a first transfer unit and (iii) a second transfer unit.The first transfer unit comprises a first reactive unit associated witha first oligonucleotide. The second transfer unit comprises a secondreactive unit associated with a second oligonucleotide. The templateincludes sequences capable of annealing to the first and secondoligonucleotides. During the method, the oligonucleotides are annealedto the template to bring the reactive units into reactive proximity anda covalent bond-forming reaction is induced between the reactive unitsto produce a reaction product. The reaction product then ischaracterized, for example, by using information encoded by the templateto identify the first and second reactive units that reacted with oneanother to produce the reaction product. Based on the characterization,it is then possible to identify one or more new chemical reactions thatwere necessary to make the reaction product. The method may also includethe step of selecting the reaction product prior to itscharacterization.

Although the methods of the invention are useful with small numbers oftemplates and transfer units, use of larger numbers of templates (e.g.,10, 50, 100, 1000, or more) and of transfer units for each codon (e.g.,10, 20, 30, 50, or more) permits the synthesis of large libraries ofmolecules that can be screened simultaneously using the sensitivityafforded by amplification.

DEFINITIONS

The term, “associated with” as used herein describes the interactionbetween or among two or more groups, moieties, compounds, monomers, etc.When two or more entities are “associated with” one another as describedherein, they are linked by a direct or indirect covalent or non-covalentinteraction. Preferably, the association is covalent. The covalentassociation may be, for example, but without limitation, through anamide, ester, carbon-carbon, disulfide, carbamate, ether, thioether,urea, amine, or carbonate linkage. The covalent association may alsoinclude a linker moiety, for example, a photocleavable linker. Desirablenon-covalent interactions include hydrogen bonding, van der Waalsinteractions, dipole-dipole interactions, pi stacking interactions,hydrophobic interactions, magnetic interactions, electrostaticinteractions, etc. Also, two or more entities or agents may be“associated with” one another by being present together in the samecomposition.

The term, “biological macromolecule” as used herein refers to apolynucleotide (e.g., RNA, DNA, RNA/DNA hybrid), protein, peptide,lipid, or polysaccharide. The biological macromolecule may be naturallyoccurring or non-naturally occurring. In a preferred embodiment, abiological macromolecule has a molecular weight greater than about 5,000Daltons.

The terms, “polynucleotide,” “nucleic acid”, or “oligonucleotide” asused herein refer to a polymer of nucleotides. The polymer may include,without limitation, natural nucleosides (i.e., adenosine, thymidine,guanosine, cytidine, uridine, deoxyadenosine, deoxythymidine,deoxyguanosine, and deoxycytidine), nucleoside analogs (e.g.,2-aminoadenosine, 2-thiothymidine, inosine, pyrrolo-pyrimidine, 3-methyladenosine, 5-methylcytidine, C5-bromouridine, C5-fluorouridine,C5-iodouridine, C5-propynyl-uridine, C5-propynyl-cytidine,C5-methylcytidine, 7-deazaadenosine, 7-deazaguanosine, 8-oxoadenosine,8-oxoguanosine, O(6)-methylguanine, and 2-thiocytidine), chemicallymodified bases, biologically modified bases (e.g., methylated bases),intercalated bases, modified sugars (e.g., 2′-fluororibose, ribose,2′-deoxyribose, arabinose, and hexose), or modified phosphate groups(e.g., phosphorothioates and 5′-N-phosphoramidite linkages). Nucleicacids and oligonucleotides may also include other polymers of baseshaving a modified backbone, such as a locked nucleic acid (LNA), apeptide nucleic acid (PNA), a threose nucleic acid (TNA) and any otherpolymers capable of serving as a template for an amplification reactionusing an amplification technique, for example, a polymerase chainreaction, a ligase chain reaction, or non-enzymatic template-directedreplication.

The term, “small molecule” as used herein, refers to an organic compoundeither synthesized in the laboratory or found in nature having amolecular weight less than 10,000 grams per mole, optionally less than5,000 grams per mole, and optionally less than 2,000 grams per mole.

The terms, “small molecule scaffold” or “molecular scaffold” as usedherein, refer to a chemical compound having at least one site orchemical moiety suitable for functionalization. The small moleculescaffold or molecular scaffold may have two, three, four, five or moresites or chemical moieties suitable for functionalization. Thesefunctionalization sites may be protected or masked as would beappreciated by one of skill in this art. The sites may also be found onan underlying ring structure or backbone.

The term, “transfer unit” as used herein, refers to a moleculecomprising an oligonucleotide having an anti-codon sequence associatedwith a reactive unit including, for example, but not limited to, abuilding block, monomer, monomer unit, molecular scaffold, or otherreactant useful in template mediated chemical synthesis.

The term, “template” as used herein, refers to a molecule comprising anoligonucleotide having at least one codon sequence suitable for atemplate mediated chemical synthesis. The template optionally maycomprise (i) a plurality of codon sequences, (ii) an amplificationmeans, for example, a PCR primer binding site or a sequencecomplementary thereto, (iii) a reactive unit associated therewith, (iv)a combination of (i) and (ii), (v) a combination of (i) and (iii), (vi)a combination of (ii) and (iii), or a combination of (i), (ii) and(iii).

The terms, “codon” and “anti-codon” as used herein, refer tocomplementary oligonucleotide sequences in the template and in thetransfer unit, respectively, that permit the transfer unit to anneal tothe template during template mediated chemical synthesis.

Throughout the description, where compositions are described as having,including, or comprising specific components, or where processes aredescribed as having, including, or comprising specific process steps, itis contemplated that compositions of the present invention also consistessentially of, or consist of, the recited components, and that theprocesses of the present invention also consist essentially of, orconsist of, the recited processing steps. Further, it should beunderstood that the order of steps or order for performing certainactions are immaterial so long as the invention remains operable.Moreover, two or more steps or actions may be conducted simultaneously.

DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 depicts known sequence-specific oligomerizations of complimentaryoligonucleotides catalyzed by single-stranded nucleic acid templates.

FIG. 2 is a schemtic representation of one embodiment of nucleicacid-templated synthesis where a reactive unit is attached to a templateat the start of synthesis.

FIG. 3 is a schematic representation of a second embodiment of nucleicacid-templated synthesis where a reactive unit is not attached to thetemplate at the start of synthesis.

FIG. 4 is a schematic representation of a third embodiment of nucleicacid-templated synthesis suitable for polymer synthesis.

FIGS. 5A-F are schematic representations of various exemplary templatesuseful in nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

FIGS. 6A-E are schematic representations of desirable and undesirablepossible interactions between a codon of a template and an anti-codon ofa transfer unit.

FIGS. 7A-G are schematic representations of various templatearchitectures useful in nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

FIG. 8 is a schematic representation of a method for producing atemplate, containing, from the 5′-end to the 3′-end, a small moleculefunctional group, a DNA hairpin, an annealing region, a coding region,and a PCR primer binding site.

FIG. 9 is a schematic representation of a general method for making alibrary of reaction products.

FIG. 10 is a graph showing the relationship between the effectiveconcentration of target protein and the fraction of ligand that bindsthe target.

FIGS. 11A-B are schematic representations of methods for screening alibrary for bond-cleavage (FIG. 11A) and bond-formation (FIG. 11B)catalysts.

FIG. 12 is a schematic representation of an in vitro selection schemefor identifying non-natural polymer catalysts of bond-forming reactions.

FIG. 13 is a schematic representation of an in vitro selection schemefor identifying non-natural polymer catalysts of bond-cleavingreactions.

FIG. 14 is a schematic representation of exemplary reagents and theiruse in a recombination method for diversifying a template library.

FIG. 15 depicts synthetic reactions directed by hairpin (H) andend-of-helix (E) DNA templates. Reactions were analyzed by denaturingpolyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE) after the indicated reactiontimes. Lanes 3 and 4 contained templates quenched with excessβ-mercaptoethanol prior to reaction.

FIG. 16 depicts the results of reactions between matched (M) ormismatched (X) reagents linked to thiols (S) or primary amines (N) andtemplates functionalized with the variety of electrophiles.

FIGS. 17A-17B depict various mismatch reactions analyzed by denaturingPAGE. FIG. 17A depicts results of reactions in which H templates linkedto an iodoacetamide group were reacted with thiol reagents containing 0,1, or 3 mismatches at 25° C. FIG. 17B depicts results of reactions inwhich the reactions in FIG. 17A were repeated at the indicatedtemperatures for 16 hours.

FIG. 18 depicts a reaction performed using a 41-base E template and a10-base reagent designed to anneal 1-30 bases from the 5′ end of thetemplate.

FIG. 19 depicts a repeat of the n=10 reaction in FIG. 18 in which thenine bases following the 5′-NH2-dT were replaced with various backboneanalogues.

FIG. 20 depicts the n=1, n=10, and n=1 mismatched (mis) reactionsdescribed in FIG. 18 which were repeated with template and reagentconcentrations of 12.5, 25, 62.5 or 125 nM.

FIGS. 21A-21B are a schematic representation of a method fortranslating, selecting, and amplifying a synthetic molecule that bindsstreptavidin from a DNA-encoded library.

FIG. 22A depicts DNA sequencing results of a PCR amplified pool ofnucleic acid templates of FIGS. 21A-21B before and after selection.

FIG. 22B is a schematic representation of a method for creating andevolving libraries of non-natural molecules using nucleic acid-templatedsynthesis, where —R₁ represents the library of product functionalitytransferred from reagent library 1 and —R_(1B) represents a selectedproduct.

FIGS. 23A-23D are schematic representations of exemplary DNA-templatedreactions.

FIG. 24 depicts analysis by denaturing PAGE of representativeDNA-templated reactions listed in FIGS. 23 and 25.

FIGS. 25A-25B are schematic representations of DNA-templated amide bondformation reactions mediated by EDC and sulfo-NHS or by DMT-MM for avariety of substituted carboxylic acids and amines.

FIG. 26A-26B depict an analysis of the distance independent nature ofcertain nucleic acid-templated reactions. FIG. 26A is a schematicrepresentation showing a model for distance-independent nucleicacid-templated synthesis. FIG. 26B depicts the results of denaturingPAGE of a DNA-templated Wittig olefination-between complementaryaldehyde-linked template 11 and phosphorous ylide reagent 13 from FIG.23B with either zero bases (lanes 1-3) or ten bases (lanes 4-6)separating annealed reactants.

FIG. 27 is a schematic representation of exemplary nucleicacid-templated complexity building reactions.

FIGS. 28A-28B depict strategies for DNA-templated synthesis usingautocleaving linkers (FIGS. 28A and 28B), scarless linkers (FIG. 28C),and useful scar linkers (FIG. 28D).

FIG. 29 depicts results from nucleic acid-templated reactions withvarious linkers.

FIGS. 30A-30B are schematic representations depicting strategies forpurifying products of DNA-templated synthesis using an autocleavingreagent linker (FIG. 30A) or scar and non scar linkers (FIG. 30B).

FIGS. 31A-B depict an exemplary DNA-templated multi-step tripeptidesynthesis.

FIGS. 32A-B depict an exemplary DNA-templated multi-step synthesis.

FIG. 33 depicts DNA-templated amide bond formation reactions in whichreagents and templates are complexed with dimethyldidodecylammoniumcations.

FIG. 34 shows denaturing PAGE gels with representative DNA-templatedamine acylation, Wittig olefination, 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition, andreductive amination reactions using the end-of-helix (E) and omega (Ω)architectures.

FIGS. 35A-35D are bar charts showing a comparison of end-of-helix (E),hairpin (H), and omega (Ω) architectures for mediating DNA-templatedamine acylation (FIG. 35A), Wittig olefination (FIG. 35B), 1,3-dipolarcycloaddition (FIG. 35C), or reductive amination reactions (FIG. 35D).

FIG. 36 is a table showing the melting temperatures of selectedtemplate-reagent combinations using the omega (Ω) and end-of-helix (E)architectres.

FIG. 37 is a bar chart showing the efficiencies of DNA-templatedreactions mediated by a template having the T architecture.

FIGS. 38A-38C depict two DNA-templated reactions on a single template inone solution mediated by templates having a T architecture.

FIG. 39A-39C are schematic illustrations showing the relative rates ofproduct formation from (S)-and (R)-bromides in H template (FIG. 39A) orE template (FIGS. 39B and 39C) mediated stereoselective DNA-templatedsubstitution reactions.

FIGS. 40A-40D depict results on reaction stereoselectivity when aromaticbases between the reactive groups are deleted and restored. The Figuresshow changes in stereoselectivity as a result of restoring aromatic DNAbases from the 5′ end (FIGS. 40A-40C) or from the 3′ end (FIG. 40D) ofthe 12-base intervening region.

FIGS. 41A-41B show the stereoselectivities of DNA-templated reactionsmediated by right-handed helix (B-form) (FIG. 41A) or left-handed helix(Z-form) (FIGS. 41A and 41B) hairpin architectures.

FIGS. 42A-42D shows graphical representations of product yield versustime for exemplary stereoselective DNA-templated reactions used tocalculate k_(S)/k_(R). FIG. 42A corresponds to the reaction shown inFIG. 39A; FIG. 42B corresponds to the reaction shown in FIG. 39B; FIG.42C corresponds to the reaction shown in FIG. 44A and FIG. 42Dcorresponds to the reaction shown in FIG. 44B.

FIGS. 43A-43F are a schematic representations showing template andreagent structures that incorporate achiral, flexible linkers.

FIG. 44A-44B are graphical representations of circular dichroism spectraobtained for B-form (FIG. 44A) and Z-form (FIG. 44B) template-reagentcomplexes.

FIG. 45 shows a representative denaturing PAGE analysis of reactionsusing the CG-rich sequences at low and high salt concentrations.

FIG. 46 is a schematic representation of a DNA-templated synthesis inwhich maleimides, aldehydes, or amines are subjected to multipleDNA-templated reaction types in a single solution.

FIG. 47 depicts templates and reagents used pairwise in 12-reactantone-pot DNA-templated reactions.

FIG. 48 depicts a “one-pot” DNA-templated reaction containing 12reactants and at least seven possible reaction types which generatesonly 6 sequence-programmed products out of at least 28 possibleproducts.

FIG. 49 is a schematic representation of a method for diversifying aDNA-templated library by sequentially exposing or creating reactivegroups.

FIGS. 50A-50E are schematic representations of exemplary nucleicacid-templated deprotections useful in the practice of the invention.

FIGS. 51A-51B are schematic representations of exemplary nucleicacid-templated functional group interconversions useful in the practiceof the invention.

FIG. 52 is a schematic representation showing the assembly of transferunits along a nucleic acid template.

FIG. 53 is a schematic representation showing the polymerization ofdicarbamate units along a nucleic acid template to form a polycarbamate.

FIG. 54 is a schematic representation showing cleavage of apolycarbamate polymer from a nucleotide backbone.

FIG. 55 is a schematic representation showing the synthesis of aDNA-templated macrocyclic fumaramide library.

FIG. 56 is a schematic representation of the amine acylation andcyclization steps of various fumaramide library members of FIG. 55.

FIG. 57 shows exemplary amino acid building blocks for the synthesis ofa DNA-templated macrocyclic fumaramide library.

FIG. 58 is a schematic representation of a method of creating a templateused in the synthesis of a DNA-templated macrocyclic fumaramide library.

FIG. 59 is a schematic representation of an amine acylation andcyclization reaction useful in the synthesis of macrocyclic fumaramidelibrary.

FIG. 60 depicts representative monomer structures that can beincorporated into a PNA polymer.

FIG. 61 is a schematic representation of a method for making functionalpolymers. As shown the polymer is still associated with the template.

FIG. 62 depicts a DNA-templated aldehyde polymerization reaction.

FIG. 63 depicts PNA polymerization reactions using a 40 base templatewith mismatched codons located at certain positions of the template.

FIG. 64 shows the specificity of DNA-templated polymerization reactions.

FIG. 65A is a schematic representation showing a method of using anucleic acid to direct the synthesis of new polymers and plastics. FIG.65B is a schematic representation showing the use of Grubbs'ring-opening metathesis polymerization catalysis to evolve plastics.

FIG. 66 is a schematic representation showing the evolution of plasticsthrough iterative cycles of ligand diversification, selection, andamplification to create polymers with desired properties.

FIG. 67 depicts exemplary functionalized nucleotides that can beincorporated by DNA polymerase.

FIG. 68 depicts exemplary metal binding uridine and 7-deazaadenosineanalogs.

FIG. 69 depicts an exemplary synthesis of analog 7 from FIG. 67.

FIG. 70 depicts an exemplary synthesis of compound 30, a precursor tocompound 13 from FIG. 67.

FIG. 71 depicts an exemplary synthesis of compound 40, a precursor tocompound 13 from FIG. 67.

FIG. 72 depicts an exemplary synthesis of compound 38, a precursor tocompound 40 from FIG. 71.

FIG. 73 depicts exemplary deoxyadenosine derivatives.

FIG. 74 depicts an exemplary synthesis of modified deoxyadenosinetriphosphates.

FIG. 75 depicts a summary of modified nucleotide triphosphatescontaining metal-binding functionalities which are or are notincorporated by DNA-polymerase.

FIG. 76 depicts a non-natural polymer library containing a syntheticmetal-binding nucleotide that is compatible with DNA polymerases.

FIG. 77 is a schematic representation showing the generation oflibraries of nucleic acids containing polymerase-accepted metal bindingnucleotides.

FIGS. 78A-78C show reaction schemes for identifying certain reactioncatalysts. FIG. 78A is a schematic representation of an exemplary schemefor the in vitro selection of synthetic polymers containingpolymerase-accepted metal-binding nucleotides that catalyze Heckreactions. FIG. 78B is a schematic representation of an exemplary schemefor the in vitro selection of synthetic polymers containingpolymerase-accepted metal-binding nucleotides that catalyze heteroDiels-Alder reactions. FIG. 78C is a schematic representation of anexemplary scheme for the in vitro selection of synthetic polymerscontaining polymerase-accepted metal-binding nucleotides that catalyzealdol reactions.

FIG. 79 depicts exemplary DNA-linked synthetic molecules subjected toprotein binding selections, and enrichment factors for a single round ofselection.

FIG. 80 depicts the results of an exemplary selection scheme.

FIG. 81 depicts the net enrichment realized by three rounds ofenrichment.

FIG. 82 depicts the separation of target-specific and non-specificDNA-linked synthetic molecules from a single solution.

FIG. 83 depicts exemplary specific DNA-linked synthetic moleculesselected in FIG. 79.

FIG. 84 depicts an exemplary iterated carbonic anhydrase selectionscheme.

FIG. 85 is a schematic representation of a method for performing one-potselections for bond-forming reactions.

FIG. 86 is a schematic representation of a method for validating thediscovery of new bond-forming reactions using DNA-templated synthesis.

FIG. 87 depicts an example of reaction discovery using nucleicacid-templated synthesis.

FIG. 88 depicts the discovery of Cu-mediated coupling reactionsidentified using nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

FIG. 89 depicts the discovery of Pd-mediated coupling reactionsidentified using nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

FIG. 90 is a schematic representation of a microarray based sequenceanalysis protocol.

FIG. 91 depicts the analysis of the Pd-mediated reactions identified viamicroarray based sequence analysis.

DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION

Nucleic-acid templated synthesis as described herein permits theproduction, selection, amplification and evolution of a broad variety ofchemical compounds such as synthetic small molecules and non-naturalpolymers. In nucleic acid-templated synthesis, the information encodedby a DNA or other nucleic acid sequence is translated into the synthesisof a reaction product. The nucleic acid template typically comprises aplurality of coding regions which anneal to complementary anti-codonsequences associated with reactive units, thereby bringing the reactiveunits together in a sequence-specific manner to create a reactionproduct. Since nucleic acid hybridization is sequence-specific, theresult of a nucleic acid-templated reaction is the translation of aspecific nucleic acid sequence into a corresponding reaction product.

As shown in FIG. 1, the ability of single stranded nucleic acidtemplates to catalyze the sequence-specific oligomerization ofcomplementary oligonucleotides has been demonstrated (Inoue et al.(1981) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 103: 7666; Inoue et al. (1984) J. MOL. BIOL.178: 669-76). This discovery was soon followed by findings that DNA orRNA templates can catalyze the oligomerization of complementary DNA orRNA mono-, di-, tri-, or oligonucleotides (Inoue et al. (1981) J. AM.CHEM. SOC. 103: 7666; Orgel et al. (1995) ACC. CHEM. RES. 28: 109-118;Rembold et al. (1994) J. MOL. EVOL. 38: 205; Rodriguez et al. (1991) J.MOL. EVOL. 33: 477; Chen et al. (1985) J. MOL. BIOL. 181: 271). DNA orRNA templates have since been shown to accelerate the formation of avariety of non-natural nucleic acid analogs, including peptide nucleicacids (Bohler et al. (1995) NATURE 376: 578), phosphorothioate—(Herrleinet al. (1995) J. AM. CHIM. SOC. 117: 10151-10152), phosphoroselenate—(Xuet al. (2000) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 122: 9040-9041; Xu et al. (2001) NAT.BIOTECHNOL. 19: 148-152) and phosphoramidate—(Luther et al. (1998)NATURE 396: 245-8) containing nucleic acids, non-ribose nucleic acids(Bolli et al. (1997) CHEM. BIOL. 4: 309-20), and DNA analogs in which aphosphate linkage has been replaced with an aminoethyl group (Gat et al.(1998) BIOPOLYMERS 48: 19-28). Nucleic acid templates can also catalyzeamine acylation between nucleotide analogs (Bruick et al. (1996) CHEM.BIOL. 3: 49-56).

Although nucleic acid templates have been demonstrated to accelerate theformation of a variety of non-natural nucleic acid analogues, nearly allof these reactions were designed to proceed through transition statesclosely resembling the natural nucleic acid backbone (FIG. 1), typicallyaffording products that preserve the same six-bond backbone spacingbetween nucleotide units. The motivation behind this design presumablywas the assumption that the rate enhancement provided by nucleic acidtemplates depends on a precise alignment of reactive groups, and theprecision of this alignment is maximized when the reactants and productsmimic the structure of the DNA and RNA backbones. Evidence in support ofthe hypothesis that nucleic acid-templated synthesis can only generateproducts that resemble the nucleic acid backbone comes from thewell-known difficulty of macrocyclization in organic synthesis(Illuminati et al.(1981) ACC. CHEM. RES. 14: 95-102; Woodward et al.(1981) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 103: 3210-3213). The rate enhancement ofintramolecular ring closing reactions compared with their intermolecularcounterparts is known to diminish quickly as rotatable bonds are addedbetween reactive groups, such that linking reactants with a flexible14-carbon linker hardly affords any rate acceleration (Illuminati etal.(1981) supra).

Because synthetic molecules of interest do not in general resemblenucleic acid backbones, the use of nucleic acid-templated synthesis totranslate nucleic acid sequences into synthetic molecules is usefulbroadly only if synthetic molecules other than nucleic acids and nucleicacid analogs can be synthesized in a nucleic acid-templated fashion.Significantly, as shown herein, nucleic acid-templated synthesis isindeed a general phenomenon and can be used for a variety of reactionsand conditions to generate a diverse range of compounds, specificallyincluding compounds that are not, and do not resemble, nucleic acids ornucleic acid analogs. More specifically, the present invention extendsthe ability to amplify and evolve libraries of chemical compounds beyondnatural biopolymers. The ability to synthesize chemical compounds ofarbitrary structure allows researchers to write their own genetic codesincorporating a wide range of chemical functionality into novel backboneand side-chain structures, which permits the development of novelcatalysts, drugs, and polymers, to name a few examples. For example, thedirect amplification and evolution of molecules by genetic selectionpermits the discovery of entirely new families of artificial catalystswhich possess activity, bioavailability, solvent, or thermal stability,or other physical properties (such as fluorescence, spin-labeling, orphotolability) that may be difficult or impossible to achieve using thelimited set of natural protein and nucleic acid building blocks.Similarly, developing methods to amplify and directly evolve syntheticsmall molecules by iterated cycles of mutation and selection permits theisolation of novel ligands or drugs with properties superior to thoseisolated by traditional rational design or combinatorial screening drugdiscovery methods. Additionally, applying this approach to theidentification and development of polymers of significance in materialscience can permit the evolution of new plastics or other polymers.

In general, nucleic acid-templated synthesis as performed hereininvolves 1) providing one or more nucleic acid templates optionallyassociated with a reactive unit, and 2) contacting the one or morenucleic acid templates with one or more transfer units including ananti-codon associated with a reactive unit. The anti-codons of thetransfer units are designed to hybridize to the nucleic acid template.In certain embodiments of the invention the transfer unit comprises asingle moiety simultaneously incorporating the hybridization capabilityof the anti-codon unit and the chemical functionality of the reactionunit. After the transfer units have hybridized to the nucleic acidtemplate in a sequence-specific manner, the reactive units present onthe transfer units and/or the nucleic acid template come into reactiveproximity to react and generate a reaction product. Preferably, theoligonucleotide portion of the transfer unit is removed once thereactive units have reacted to generate the reaction product or anintermediate of the reaction product. Significantly, the sequence of thenucleic acid template can later be determined, to permit decoding of thesynthetic history of the attached reaction product and, thereby, itsstructure. This method may be used to synthesize one molecule at a timeor may be used to synthesize thousands to millions of compounds usingcombinatorial methods.

In one embodiment, the template molecule optionally is associated with areactive unit prior to interaction with any transfer units. Thus, asshown in FIG. 2, the template can be connected by a covalent bond to areactive unit, either directly or via a linker. Alternatively, thetemplate can be connected by a noncovalent linkage. For example, thetemplate can be biotinylated, generally at a fixed location on themolecule, and can stably interact with a reactive unit associated withan avidin or streptavidin moiety. For ease of synthesis, the reactiveunit is preferably placed at or near the 5′ end of the template in someembodiments as shown in FIG. 2. In other embodiments, placement of thereactive unit at an internal position of the template or at the 3′ endis preferred. The template molecule also includes at least one codoncapable of annealing to an anti-codon of a transfer unit. Duringsynthesis, the transfer unit anneals to the codon, bringing its reactiveunit into reactive proximity with the reactive unit of the template toproduce a reaction product.

In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the template is not initiallyassociated with a reactive unit, but permits the nucleic acid-templatedsynthesis of at least two reactive units disposed with two transferunits. The template molecule includes at least two codons, each capableof annealing to a different anti-codon disposed within each transferunit. The anti-codon in each transfer unit anneals to the correspondingcodon in the template to bring the reactive units of each transfer unitinto reactive proximity with one another to produce a reaction product.

In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the template can bringtogether, either simultaneously or sequentially, a plurality of transferunits in a sequence-specific manner. The reactive units on each annealedtransfer unit can then be reacted with one another in a polymerizationprocess to produce a polymer. Using this approach it is possible togenerate a variety of non-natural polymers. The polymerization may be astep-by step process or may be a simultaneous process whereby all theannealed monomers are reacted in one reaction sequence.

I. Template Considerations

The nucleic acid template can direct a wide variety of chemicalreactions without obvious structural requirements bysequence-specifically recruiting reactants linked to complementaryoligonucleotides. As discussed, the nucleic acid mediated format permitsreactions that may not be possible using conventional syntheticapproaches. During synthesis, the template hybridizes or anneals to oneor more transfer units to direct the synthesis of a reaction product,which during certain steps of templated synthesis remain associated withthe template. A reaction product then is selected or screened based oncertain criteria, such as the ability to bind to a preselected targetmolecule. Once the reaction product has been identified, the associatedtemplate can then be sequenced to decode the synthetic history of thereaction product. Furthermore, as will be discussed in more detailbelow, the template may be evolved to guide the synthesis of anotherchemical compound or library of chemical compounds.

(i) Template Format

The template may be based on a nucleic acid sequence, for example, aDNA, an RNA, a hybrid of DNA and RNA, or a derivative of DNA and RNA,and may be single- or double-stranded. The design of a particulartemplate may vary depending upon the type of nucleic acid templatedsynthesis contemplated.

FIG. 5 shows a variety of templates that may be useful in the practiceof the invention. FIGS. 5A-C are schematic representations of templatesincluding two codons for interaction with complementary anti-codons oftwo transfer units. These templates can be used in the type of nucleicacid-templated synthesis where no reactive units are linked to thetemplate at the initiation of synthesis; for example, when two transferunits anneal to the template to bring their reactive units into reactiveproximity to create a reaction product. One such example ispolymerization. Nevertheless, the templates can be associated with areactive unit prior to annealing of the transfer units. FIGS. 5D-F areschematic representations of templates that can be used in the type ofnucleic acid-templated synthesis where one reactive unit is linked tothe template at the initiation of synthesis, for example, when onetransfer unit anneals to the template to bring its reactive unit intoreactive proximity with the other reactive unit linked to the templateto create a reaction product.

FIG. 5A shows a template comprising in a 5′ to 3′ direction, anucleotide sequence encoding a first primer binding site (PBS 1) or asequence complementary thereto, a nucleotide sequence encoding a firstcodon (C1) that anneals to an anti-codon sequence of a first transferunit, a nucleotide sequence encoding a second codon (C2) that anneals toan anti-codon sequence of a second, different transfer unit, and anucleotide sequence encoding a second primer binding site (PBS2) or asequence complementary thereto. The primer binding sites, althoughoptional, are preferred in some embodiments to facilitate PCR-basedamplification of templates. As will be discussed in more detail below,the C1 sequence is selected so as to minimize cross-reactivity with theanti-codon sequence of the second transfer unit, and the C2 sequence isselected so as to minimize cross-reactivity with the anti-codon sequenceof the first transfer unit. As shown in FIG. 5A, the C1 and C2 sequencesare separated by one or more intervening bases. In other words the C1and C2 sequences do not directly abut one another. During nucleic acidtemplated synthesis, both the first and second transfer units arecapable of binding to the template at the same time.

FIG. 5B shows a template similar to that shown in FIG. 5A, except thereare no intervening bases disposed between C1 and C2. In other words, theC1 and C2 sequences directly abut one another. As with the template ofFIG. 5A, during nucleic acid templated synthesis, both the first andsecond transfer units are capable to binding to the template at the sametime.

FIG. 5C shows a template similar to those shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B,except that the sequence of C1 overlaps the sequence of C2. Unlike thetemplates of FIGS. 5A and 5B, during nucleic acid templated synthesis,the first and second transfer units cannot both bind to the template atthe same time. Thus, unless the template is associated with a reactiveunit prior to the initation of synthesis, a third codon should normallybe present, so that two reactive units can anneal simultaneously to thetemplate to permit the reaction to proceed. This type of template canrequire a step-by-step approach to the synthesis of the reactionproduct. For example, the transfer units with anti-codons to C1 areadded first, allowed to hybridize and react, and then removed before thetransfer units with anti-codons to C2 are added.

FIGS. 5D-5F show templates similar to the template shown in FIG. 5A,except that the template also includes a reactive unit (R) associatedwith, for example, covalently linked to, the template. It is understood,however, that the templates shown in both FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C may alsocomprise a reactive unit (R) associated with the corresponding template,as shown in FIGS. 5D-5F. To the extent that a template is associatedwith a reactive unit, the nucleotide sequence of the template furthercomprises a sequence of nucleotides or sequence tag that uniquelyidentifies the reactive unit associated with the template. Followingtemplate mediated synthesis, the reactive unit actually attached to thetemplate that participated in the reaction to generate the reactionproduct may be identified by reading the sequence of the sequence tag.

In FIG. 5D, R is linked to the template at a location in the vicinity ofthe 5′ terminal end, for example, at the 5′ end of the template ordownstream of the 5′ end of the template. In FIG. 5E, R is linked to thetemplate at a location between the 5′ terminal end and the 3′ terminalend. In this particular case, R is located at a position between C1 andC2, and represents an example of the T type template architecturediscussed in more detail below. In FIG. 5F, R is linked to the templateat a location in the vicinity of the 3′ terminal end, for example, atthe 3′ end of the template or upstream of the 3′ end of the template.

It is contemplated that each of the templates shown in FIGS. 5A-F, maycomprise one or more restriction endonuclease sites. For example, withreference to FIG. 5A, the template may comprise a restrictionendonuclease site disposed between (i) PBS1 and C1, (ii) C1 and C2, and(iii) C2 and PBS2. The restriction endonuclease sites facilitate the useof nucleic acid cassettes to easily introduce various sequences toreplace the PBS1 sequence, the C1 sequence, the C2 sequence, the PBS2sequence, or any combination thereof.

In addition, the template may also incorporate a hairpin loop on one endterminating in a reactive unit that can interact with one or morereactive units associated with transfer units. For example, a DNAtemplate can comprise a hairpin loop terminating in a 5′-amino group,which may or may not be protected. The amino group may act as aninitiation point for formation of an unnatural polymer, or may bemodified to bind a small molecule scaffold for subsequent modificationby reactive units of other transfer units.

The length of the template may vary greatly depending upon the type ofthe nucleic acid-templated synthesis contemplated. For example, incertain embodiments, the template may be from 10 to 10,000 nucleotidesin length, from 20 to 1,000 nucleotides in length, from 20 to 400nucleotides in length, from 40 to 1,000 nucleotides in length, or from40 to 400 nucleotides in length. The length of the template will ofcourse depend on, for example, the length of the codons, the complexityof the library, the complexity and/or size of a reaction product, theuse of spacer sequences, etc.

(ii) Codon Usage

It is contemplated that the sequence of the template may be designed ina number of ways without going beyond the scope of the presentinvention. For example, the length of the codon must be determined andthe codon sequences must be set. If a codon length of two is used, thenusing the four naturally occurring bases only 16 possible combinationsare available to be used in encoding the library. If the length of thecodon is increased to three (the number Nature uses in encodingproteins), the number of possible combinations increases to 64. If thelength of the codon is increased to four, the number of possiblecombinations increases to 256. Other factors to be considered indetermining the length of the codon are mismatching, frame-shifting,complexity of library, etc. As the length of the codon is increased upto a certain point the number of mismatches is decreased; howeverexcessively long codons likely will hybridize despite mismatched basepairs.

Although the length of the codons may vary, the codons may range from 2to 50 nucleotides, from 2 to 40 nucleotides, from 2 to 30 nucleotides,from 2 to 20 nucleotides, from 2 to 15 nucleotides, from 2 to 10nucleotides, from 3 to 50 nucleotides, from 3 to 40 nucleotides, from 3to 30 nucleotides, from 3 to 20 nucleotides, from 3 to 15 nucleotides,from 3 to 10 nucleotides, from 4 to 50 nucleotides, from 4 to 40nucleotides, from 4 to 30 nucleotides, from 4 to 20 nucleotides, from 4to l5 nucleotides, from 4 to 10 nucleotides, from 5 to 50 nucleotides,from 5 to 40 nucleotides, from 5 to 30 nucleotides, from 5 to 20nucleotides, from 5 to 15 nucleotides, from 5 to 10 nucleotides, from 6to 50 nucleotides, from 6 to 40 nucleotides, from 6 to 30 nucleotides,from 6 to 20 nucleotides from 6 to 15 nucleotides, from 6 to 10nucleotides, from 7 to 50 nucleotides, from 7 to 40 nucleotides, from 7to 30 nucleotides, from 7 to 20 nucleotides, from 7 to 15 nucleotides,from 7 to 10 nucleotides, from 8 to 50 nucleotides, from 8 to 40nucleotides, from 8 to 30 nucleotides, from 8 to 20 nucleotides, from 8to 15 nucleotides, from 8 to 10 nucleotides, from 9 to 50 nucleotides,from 9 to 40 nucleotides, from 9 to 30 nucleotides, from 9 to 20nucleotides, from 9 to 15 nucleotides, from 9 to 10 nucleotides. Codons,however, preferably are 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 or 10 nucleotides in length.

In one embodiment, the set of codons used in the template maximizes thenumber of mismatches between any tow codons within a codon set to ensurethat only the proper anti-codons of the transfer units anneal to thecodon sites of the template. Furthermore, it is important that thetemplate has mismatches between all the members of one codon set and allthe codons of a different codon set to ensure that the anti-codons donot inadvertently bind to the wrong codon set. For example, with regardto the choice of codons n bases in length, each of the codons within aparticular codon set (for example, C1 in FIG. 5A) should differ with oneanother by k mismatches, and all of the codons in one codon set (forexample, C1 in FIG. 5A) should differ by m mismatches with all thecodons in the other codon set (for example, C2 in FIG. 5A). Exemplaryvalues for n, k, and m, for a variety of codon sets suitable for use ona template are summarized in Table 1. TABLE 1 n k m 2 1 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 32 2 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 1 5 3 2 53 3 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 6 1 1 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 4 1 64 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 6 5 4 6 5 5 7 1 1 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 3 1 73 2 7 3 3 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 4 4 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 5 3 7 5 4 7 5 5 7 6 1 76 2 7 6 3 7 6 4 7 6 5 7 6 6 8 1 1 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 4 1 84 2 8 4 3 8 4 4 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 4 8 5 5 8 6 1 8 6 2 8 6 3 8 6 4 86 5 8 6 6 8 7 1 8 7 2 8 7 3 8 7 4 8 7 5 8 7 6 8 7 7 9 1 1 9 2 1 9 2 2 93 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 9 4 1 9 4 2 9 4 3 9 4 4 9 5 1 9 5 2 9 5 3 9 5 4 9 5 5 96 1 9 6 2 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 6 6 9 7 1 9 7 2 9 7 3 9 7 4 9 7 5 9 7 6 97 7 9 8 1 9 8 2 9 8 3 9 8 4 9 8 5 9 8 6 9 8 7 9 8 8 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 2 210 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 4 4 10 5 1 10 5 2 10 5 3 105 4 10 5 5 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 3 10 6 4 10 6 5 10 6 6 10 7 1 10 7 2 10 73 10 7 4 10 7 5 10 7 6 10 7 7 10 8 1 10 8 2 10 8 3 10 8 4 10 8 5 10 8 610 8 7 10 8 8 10 9 1 10 9 2 10 9 3 10 9 4 10 9 5 10 9 6 10 9 7 10 9 8 109 9 11 1 1 11 2 1 11 2 2 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 44 11 5 1 11 5 2 11 5 3 11 5 4 11 5 5 11 6 1 11 6 2 11 6 3 11 6 4 11 6 511 6 6 11 7 1 11 7 2 11 7 3 11 7 4 11 7 5 11 7 6 11 7 7 11 8 1 11 8 2 118 3 11 8 4 11 8 5 11 8 6 11 8 7 11 8 8 11 9 1 11 9 2 11 9 3 11 9 4 11 95 11 9 6 11 9 7 11 9 8 11 9 9 11 10 1 11 10 2 11 10 3 11 10 4 11 10 5 1110 6 11 10 7 11 10 8 11 10 9 11 10 10 12 1 1 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 3 1 12 3 212 3 3 12 4 1 12 4 2 12 4 3 12 4 4 12 5 1 12 5 2 12 5 3 12 5 4 12 5 5 126 1 12 6 2 12 6 3 12 6 4 12 6 5 12 6 6 12 7 1 12 7 2 12 7 3 12 7 4 12 75 12 7 6 12 7 7 12 8 1 12 8 2 12 8 3 12 8 4 12 8 5 12 8 6 12 8 7 12 8 812 9 1 12 9 2 12 9 3 12 9 4 12 9 5 12 9 6 12 9 7 12 9 8 12 9 9 12 10 112 10 2 12 10 3 12 10 4 12 10 5 12 10 6 12 10 7 12 10 8 12 10 9 12 10 1012 11 1 12 11 2 12 11 3 12 11 4 12 11 5 12 11 6 12 11 7 12 11 8 12 11 912 11 10 12 11 11 13 1 1 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 4 1 13 42 13 4 3 13 4 4 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 5 3 13 5 4 13 5 5 13 6 1 13 6 2 13 6 313 6 4 13 6 5 13 6 6 13 7 1 13 7 2 13 7 3 13 7 4 13 7 5 13 7 6 13 7 7 138 1 13 8 2 13 8 3 13 8 4 13 8 5 13 8 6 13 8 7 13 8 8 13 9 1 13 9 2 13 93 13 9 4 13 9 5 13 9 6 13 9 7 13 9 8 13 9 9 13 10 1 13 10 2 13 10 3 1310 4 13 10 5 13 10 6 13 10 7 13 10 8 13 10 9 13 10 10 13 11 1 13 11 2 1311 3 13 11 4 13 11 5 13 11 6 13 11 7 13 11 8 13 11 9 13 11 10 13 11 1113 12 1 13 12 2 13 12 3 13 12 4 13 12 5 13 12 6 13 12 7 13 12 8 13 12 913 12 10 13 12 11 13 12 12 14 1 1 14 2 1 14 2 2 14 3 1 14 3 2 14 3 3 144 1 14 4 2 14 4 3 14 4 4 14 5 1 14 5 2 14 5 3 14 5 4 14 5 5 14 6 1 14 62 14 6 3 14 6 4 14 6 5 14 6 6 14 7 1 14 7 9 14 7 3 14 7 4 14 7 5 14 7 614 7 7 14 8 1 14 8 2 14 8 3 14 8 4 14 8 5 14 8 6 14 8 7 14 8 8 14 9 1 149 2 14 9 3 14 9 4 14 9 5 14 9 6 14 9 7 14 9 8 14 9 9 14 10 1 14 10 2 1410 3 14 10 4 14 10 5 14 10 6 14 10 7 14 10 8 14 10 9 14 10 10 14 11 1 1411 2 14 11 3 14 11 4 14 11 5 14 11 6 14 11 7 14 11 8 14 11 9 14 11 10 1411 11 14 12 1 14 12 2 14 12 3 14 12 4 14 12 5 14 12 6 14 12 7 14 12 8 1412 9 14 12 10 14 12 11 14 12 12 14 13 1 14 13 2 14 13 3 14 13 4 14 13 514 13 6 14 13 7 14 13 8 14 13 9 14 13 10 14 13 11 14 13 12 14 13 13 15 11 15 2 1 15 2 2 15 3 1 15 3 2 15 3 3 15 4 1 15 4 2 15 4 3 15 4 4 15 5 115 5 2 15 5 3 15 5 4 15 5 5 15 6 1 15 6 2 15 6 3 15 6 4 15 6 5 15 6 6 157 1 15 7 2 15 7 3 15 7 4 15 7 5 15 7 6 15 7 7 15 8 1 15 8 2 15 8 3 15 84 15 8 5 15 8 6 15 8 7 15 8 8 15 9 1 15 9 2 15 9 3 15 9 4 15 9 5 15 9 615 9 7 15 9 8 15 9 9 15 10 1 15 10 2 15 10 3 15 10 4 15 10 5 15 10 6 1510 7 15 10 8 15 10 9 15 10 10 15 11 1 15 11 2 15 11 3 15 11 4 15 11 5 1511 6 15 11 7 15 11 8 15 11 9 15 11 10 15 11 11 15 12 1 15 12 2 15 12 315 12 4 15 12 5 15 12 6 15 12 7 15 12 8 15 12 9 15 12 10 15 12 11 15 1212 15 13 1 15 13 2 15 13 3 15 13 4 15 13 5 15 13 6 15 13 7 15 13 8 15 139 15 13 10 15 13 11 15 13 12 15 13 13 15 14 1 15 14 2 15 14 3 15 14 4 1514 5 15 14 6 15 14 7 15 14 8 15 14 9 15 14 10 15 14 11 15 14 12 15 14 1315 14 14

Using an appropriate algorithm, it is possible to generate sets ofcodons that maximize mismatches between any tow codons within the sameset, where the codons are n bases long having at least k mismatchesbetween any two codons. Since between any two codons, there must be atleast k mismatches, any two subcodons of n-(k−1) bases must have atleast one mismatch. This sets an upper limit of 4^(n-k−1) on the size ofany (n, k) codon set. Such an algorithm preferably starts with the4^(n-k−1) possible subcodons of length n-(k−1) and then tests allcombinations of adding k−1 bases for those that always maintain kmismatches. All possible (n, k) sets can be generated for n>6. For n>6,the 4^(n-k+1) upper limits of codons cannot be met and a “full” packingof viable codons is mathematically impossible. In addition to therebeing at least one mismatch k between codons within the same codon set,there should also be at least one mismatch m between all the codons ofone codon set and all the codons of another codon set. Using thisapproach, different sets of codons can be generated so that no codonsare repeated.

By way of example, four (n=5, k=3, m=1) sets, each with 64 codons, canbe chosen that always have at least one mismatch between any two codonsin different sets and at least three mismatches between codons in thesame set. TABLE 2 Sequences of (5,3,1) Codon Set 1 Codon Codon CodonCodon Codon Codon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCTC CCGAG CCTCT CCAGACGCGT CGGCA CGTAC CGATG CTCCG CTGGC CTTTA CTAAT CACAA CAGTT CATGG CAACCGCCCA GCGGT GCTTG GCAAC GGCAG GGGTC GGTGA GGACT GTCTT GTGAA GTTCC GTAGGGACGC GAGCG GATAT GAATA TCCGG TCGCC TCTAA TCATT TGCTA TGGAT TGTCG TGAGCTTCAC TTGTG TTTGT TTACA TACCT TAGGA TATTC TAAAG ACCAT ACGTA ACTGC ACACGAGCCC AGGGG AGTTT AGAAA ATCGA ATGCT ATTAG ATATC AACTG AAGAC ATCA AAAGT

TABLE 3 Sequences of (5,3,1) Codon Set 2 Codon Codon Codon Codon CodonCodon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCAC CCGTG CCTGT CCACA CGCCT CGGGACGTTC CGAAG CTCGG CTGCC CTTAA CTATT CACTA CAGAT CATCG CAAGC GCCGA GCGCTGCTAG GCATC GGCTG GGGAC GGTCA GGAGT GTCAT GTGTA GTTGC GTACG GACCC GAGGGGATTT GAAAA TCCCG TCGGC TCTTA TCAAT TGCAA TGGTT TGTGG TGACC TTCTC TTGAGTTTCT TTAGA TACGT TAGCA TATAC TAATG ACCTT ACGAA ACTCC ACAGG AGCGC AGGCGAGTAT AGATA ATCCA ATGGT ATTTG ATAAC AACAG AAGTC AATGA AAACT

TABLE 4 Sequences of (5,3,1) Codon Set 3 Codon Codon Codon Codon CodonCodon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCTG CCGAC CCTCA CCAGT CGCAT CGGTACGTGC CGACG CTCCC CTGGG CTTTT CTAAA CACGA CAGCT CATAG CAATC GCCAA GCGTTGCTGG GCACC GGCTC GGGAG GGTCT GGAGA GTCGT GTGCA GTTAC GTATG GACCG GAGGCGATTA GAAAT TCCGC TCGCG TCTAT TCATA TGCCA TGGGT TGTTG TGAAC TTCAG TTGTCTTTGA TTACT TACTT TAGAA TATCC TAAGG ACCCT ACGGA ACTTC ACAAG AGCGG AGGCCAGTAA AGATT ATCTA ATGAT ATTCG ATAGC AACAC AAGTG AATGT AAACA

TABLE 5 Sequences of (5,3,1) Codon Set 4 Codon Codon Codon Codon CodonCodon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCAG CCGTC CCTGA CCACT CGCTT CGGAACGTCC CGAGG CTCGC CTGCG CTTAT CTATA CACCA CAGGT CATTG CAAAC GCCTA CGATGCTCG GCAGC GGCAC GGGTG GGTGT GGACA GTCCT GTGGA GTTTC GTAAG GACGG GAGCCGATAA GAATT TCCCC TCGGG TCTTT TCAAA TGCGA TGGCT TGTAG TGATC TTCTG TTGACTTTCA TTAGT TACAT TAGTA TATGC TAACG ACCGT ACGCA ACTAC ACATG AGCCG AGGGCAGTTA AGAAT ATCAA ATGTT ATTGG ATACC AACTC AAGAG AATCT AAAGA

Similarly, four (n=6, k=4, m=2) sets as shown below, each with 64codons, can be chosen that always have at least two mismatches betweenany two codons in different codon sets and at least four mismatchesbetween codons in the same codon set. TABLE 6 Sequences of (6,4,2) CodonSet 1 Codon Codon Codon Codon Codon Codon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq.CCCTCC TCGAAC CCGCTG TCTCCA CGGTAT TCATTT CCAGAA TGCACT CGCCGA TGGGTACTCAAG TGTTGC CGTGCG TGACAG CGAATC TTCCTC CTACCT TTGTCG CTGGGC TTTGATCTTTTA TTAAGA CATCAC TACTAA CACGTT TAGCGT CAGACA TATATG GCGGCT TAAGCCCAATGG ACCCAT GCCATA ACGTGA GGCGAC ACTGTC GCTTAG ACAACG GCACGC AGCTTGGGATCA AGGCCC GGGAGG AGTAAA GGTCTT AGAGGT GTTACC ATCGCA GTCTGT ATGATTGTGCAA ATTCGG GAGTTC ATATAC GTAGTG AACAGC GACCCG AAGGAG TCCGGG AATTCTGATGGA AAACTA GAAAAT CCTAGT

TABLE 7 Sequences of (6,4,2) Codon Set 2 Codon Codon Codon Codon CodonCodon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCCTC TCGGGC CCGTCG TCTTTA CGGCGTTCACCT CCAAGA TGCGTT CGCTAA TGGACA CTCGGG TGTCAC CGTATG TGATGG CGAGCCTTCTCC CTATTT TTGCTG CTGAAC TTTAGT CTTCCA TTAGAA CATTGC TACCGA CACACTTAGTAT CAGGTA TATGCG GCGATT TAAATC CAACAG ACCTGT GCCGCA ACGCAA GGCAGCACTACC GCTCGG ACAGTG GCATAC AGCCCG GGACTA AGGTTC GGGGAG AGTGGA GGTTCTAGAAAT GTTGTC ATCATA GTCCAT ATGGCT GTGTGA ATTTAG GAGCCC ATACGC GTAACGAACGAC GACTTG AAGAGG TCCAAG AATCTT GATAAA AAATCA GAAGGT CCTGAT

TABLE 8 Sequences of (6,4,2) Codon Set 3 Codon Codon Codon Codon CodonCodon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCGAC TCGCCC CCGAGG TCTAAA CGGGCTTCAGGT CCATCA TGCCAT CGCATA TGGTGA CTCCCG TGTGTC CGTTAG TGAACG CGACGCTTCAGC CTAAAT TTGGAG CTGTTC TTTTCT CTTGGA TTACTA CATACC TACGCA CACTGTTAGATT CAGCAA TATCGG GCGTAT TAATAC CAAGTG ACCACT GCCCGA ACGGTA GGCTCCACTTGC GCTGCG ACACAG GCAATC AGCGGG GGAGAA AGGAAC GGGCTG AGTCCA GGTAGTAGATTT GTTCAC ATCTAA GTCGTT ATGCGT GTGACA ATTATG GAGGGC ATAGCC GTATGGAACCTC GACAAG AAGTCG TCCTTG AATGAT GATTTA AAAAGA GAACCT CCTCTT

TABLE 9 Sequences of (6,4,2) Codon Set 4 Codon Codon Codon Codon CodonCodon Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. Seq. CCCAGC TCGTTC CCGGAG TCTGGA CGGATTTCAAAT CCACTA TGCTGT CGCGCA TGGCAA CTCTTG TGTACC CGTCGG TGAGTG CGATACTTCGAC CTAGGT TTGAGG CTGCCC TTTCTT CTTAAA TTATCA CATGTC TACATA CACCATTAGGCT CAGTGA TATTAG GCGCGT TAACGC CAAACG ACCGTT GCCTAA ACGACA GGCCTCACTCAC GCTATG ACATGG GCAGCC AGCAAG GGAAGA AGGGGC GGGTCG AGTTTA GGTGATAGACCT GTTTGC ATCCGA GTCACT ATGTAT GTGGTA ATTGCG GAGAAC ATAATC GTACAGAACTCC GACGGG AAGCTG TCCCCG AATAGT GATCCA AAAGAA GAATTT CCTTCT

Codons can also be chosen to increase control over the GC content and,therefore, the melting temperature of the codon and anti-codon. Codonssets with a wide range in GC content versus AT content may result inreagents that anneal with different efficiencies due to differentmelting temperatures. By screening for GC content among different (n, k)sets, the GC content for the codon sets can be optimized. For example,the four (6, 4, 2) codon sets set forth in Tables 6-9 each contain 40codons with identical GC content (i.e., 50% GC content). By using onlythese 40 codons at each position, all the reagents in theory will havecomparable melting temperatures, removing potential biases in annealingthat might otherwise affect library synthesis. Longer codons thatmaintain a large number of mismatches such as those appropriate forcertain applications such as the reaction discovery system can also bechosen using this approach. For example, by combining two (6, 4) setstogether while matching low GC to high GC codons, (12, 8) sets with 64codons all with 50% GC content can be generated for use in reactiondiscovery selections as well as other application where multiplemismatches might be advantageous. These codons satisfy the requirementsfor encoding a 30×30 matrix of functional group combinations forreaction discovery.

Although an anti-codon is intended to bind only to a codon, as shown inFIG. 6A, an anti-codon may also bind to an unintended sequence on atemplate if complementary sequence is present. Thus, an anti-codon mayinadvertently bind to a non-codon sequence as shown in FIG. 6B.Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 6C and 6D, an anti-codon mightinadvertently bind out-of-frame by annealing in part to one codon and inpart to another codon (FIG. 6C) or to a non-codon sequence (FIG. 6D).Finally, as shown in FIG. 6E, an anti-codon might bind in-frame to anincorrect codon, an issue addressed by the codon sets described above byrequiring at least one base difference distinguishing each codon. InNature, the problems of noncoding sequences and out-of-frame binding(FIGS. 6B-D) are avoided by the ribosome. The nucleic acid-templatedmethods described herein, however, do not take advantage of theribosome's fidelity. Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous annealing asin FIGS. 6B-D, the templates can be designed such that sequencescomplementary to anti-codons are found exclusively at in-frame codonpositions. For example, codons can be designed to begin, or end, with aparticular base (e.g., “G”). If that base is omitted from all otherpositions in the template (i.e., all other positions are restricted toT, C, and A), only perfect codon sequences in the template will be atthe in-frame codon sequences. Similarly, the codon may be designed to besufficiently long such that its sequence is unique and does not appearelsewhere in a template.

When the nucleic acid-templated synthesis is used to produce a polymer,spacer sequences may also be placed between the codons to prevent frameshifting. More preferably, the bases of the template that encode eachpolymer subunit (the “genetic code” for the polymer) may be chosen fromTable 10 to preclude or minimize the possibility of out-of-frameannealing. These genetic codes reduce undesired frameshifted nucleicacid-templated polymer translation and differ in the range of expectedmelting temperatures and in the minimum number of mismatches that resultduring out-of-frame annealing. TABLE 10 Representative Genetic Codes forNucleic Acid-templated Polymers That Preclude Out-Of-Frame AnnealingSequence Number of Possible Codons VVNT 36 possible codons NVVT 36possible codons SSWT 8 possible codons SSST 8 possible codons SSNT 16possible codons VNVNT or NVNVT 144 possible codons SSSWT or SSWST 16possible codons SNSNT or NSNST 64 possible codons SSNWT or SWNST 32possible codons WSNST or NSWST 32 possible codonswhere, V=A, C, or G, S═C or G, W=A or T, and N=A, C, G, or T

As in Nature, start and stop codons are useful, particularly in thecontext of polymer synthesis, to restrict erroneous anti-codon annealingto non-codons and to prevent excessive extension of a growing polymer.For example, a start codon can anneal to a transfer unit bearing a smallmolecule scaffold or a start monomer unit for use in polymer synthesis;the start monomer unit can be masked by a photolabile protecting groupas shown in Example 9A. A stop codon, if used to terminate polymersynthesis, should not conflict with any other codons used in thesynthesis and should be of the same general format as the other codons.Generally, a stop codon can encode a monomer unit that terminatespolymerization by not providing a reactive group for further attachment.For example, a stop monomer unit may contain a blocked reactive groupsuch as an acetamide rather than a primary amine as shown in Example 9A.In other embodiments, the stop monomer unit can include a biotinylatedterminus that terminates the polymerization and facilitates purificationof the resulting polymer.

(iii) Template Architecture

As discussed previously, depending upon the type of nucleicacid-templated synthesis contemplated, the template may be furtherassociated (for example, covalently coupled) with a particular reactiveunit. Various templates useful in nucleic acid-templated synthesis areshown in FIGS. 7A-7G, and include templates referred to as the “end-ofhelix” or “E” templates (see, FIG. 7A-C), “Hairpin” or “H” templates(see, FIG. 7D), “Omega” or “Ω” templates (see, FIG. 7E-F), or “T”templates (see, FIG. 7G).

FIGS. 7A-C show E type template architectures where the reactive unitson the annealed templates (denoted by A) and transfer units (denoted byB) are separated by 1 base (FIG. 7A), 10 bases (FIG. 7B) and 20 bases(FIG. 7C). FIG. 7D, shows a H type template architecture where thereactive unit is attached to the template (denoted by A) and thetemplate folds back on itself to create a hairpin loop stabilized by aplurality of intramolecular bonds. As shown, the reactive units on theannealed template (denoted by A) and the transfer unit (denoted by B)are separated by 1 base. FIGS. 7E-F show omega type templatearchitecture where the codon for the transfer unit, bearing reactiveunit B, is separated from reactive unit A on the template by 10intervening template bases (FIG. 7E) or by 20 bases (FIG. 7F). In FIG.7E, the omega template comprises a three base constant region (Ω-3) andcreates a seven base loop when the transfer unit anneals to thetemplate. In FIG. 7F, the omega template includes a five base constantregion (Ω-5) and creates a fifteen base loop when the transfer unitanneals to the template. The loop gets larger as transfer units annealto codons further away from the constant region of the template. FIG. 7Gshows a T-type template architecture where the reactive units on theannealed template (denoted by A) and the transfer unit (denoted by B)are separated by 1 base. In FIG. 7G, reactive unit A is attached at alocation intermediate the 5′ and 3′ terminal ends of the template. Usingthis architecture, it is contemplated that the reactive unit may beattached to the template at a location at least 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,70 bases or more downstream of the 5′ end of the template and/or atleast 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 bases or more upstream of the 3′ end ofthe template.

The ability of the E type template architecture and the H type templatearchitecture to facilitate nucleic acid mediated chemical syntheses isdescribed in detail in Example 1. However, as a result of performingnucleic acid mediated syntheses, it has been discovered that certainreactions, referred to as distance dependent reactions, do not proceedefficiently when the annealed reactive units on the template andtransfer unit are separated by even small numbers of bases. Using the Eand H type templates, certain distance dependent reactions may only beencoded by template bases at the reactive end of the template. The new Ωtype template overcomes the distance dependence problems that can beexperienced with the E and H type templates (see, Example 5).Furthermore, it has been discovered that the presence of double-strandednucleic acids between annealed reactive units can greatly reduce theefficiency of templated reactions because the flexibility of asingle-stranded template is required. This may hinder performing two ormore reactions in a single nucleic acid templated step using the E or Harchitectures even though the template may contain enough bases toencode multiple reactions. The new T type template overcomes thisproblem that can be experienced with the E and H type templates (see,Example 5).

Ω Templates

The omega architecture permits distance dependent reactions to bedirected efficiently by nucleotide bases far away from the reaction endof the template, effectively overcoming their distance dependence. Byway of example, in the omega architecture, five bases of the templateare held constant at the 5′-end of the template (see, FIG. 7F). Thetransfer units contain at their 3′-ends the complementary five bases butotherwise possess sequences that complement distal coding regions of thetemplate. This permits the transfer unit to anneal to the distal codingregions of the template while still placing the reactive group of thetransfer unit in close proximity by looping out large numbers oftemplate bases that would ordinarily prevent a distance dependentreaction from proceeding. The omega architecture retains sequencespecificity because the five bases of the transfer unit that complementthe end of the template are insufficient by themselves to anneal to thetemplate at room temperature.

The usefulness of this type of template architecture is apparent, forexample, in nucleic acid-templated reductive amination reactions. Thesereactions are strongly distance dependent and very little product isproduced when the reaction is attempted using the hairpin orend-of-helix architectures with more than one base of distance betweenthe annealed amine and aldehyde groups. In contrast, product formsefficiently using the omega architecture even when a region of thetemplate 20 bases away from the reactive end is used to recruit thereagent (see, Example 5). No product is observed when the coding regionof the transfer unit is mismatched, despite the presence of five basesat the end of the transfer unit that are complementary to the end of thetemplate.

By enabling distance-dependent nucleic acid mediated reactions to beencoded by bases far away from the reactive end of the template, theomega architecture expands the types of reactions that can be encodedanywhere on the template.

T Templates

The T architecture permits a single template to encode twodistance-dependent reactions and in addition permits a template toundergo two different nucleotide-templated reactions in a singlesolution or in “one-pot.” Using this architecture, the template canpresent a molecular scaffold through the non-Watson-Crick face of a baselocated in the center, rather than the end, of the template (see, FIG.7G). This permits two transfer units to anneal to either side of thereactive unit attached to the template and react either simultaneouslyor in successive steps to give the product of two nucleotide-templatedtransformations. As expected, distance dependent reactions tolerate thisarchitecture when reactive groups are proximal. Thus, the T-typearchitecture permits two sequence-specific nucleic acid-templatedreactions to take place on one template in one solution, i.e., in onestep. In addition to reducing the number of separate DNA-templated stepsneeded to synthesize a target structure, this architecture may permitthree- or more component reactions commonly used to build structuralcomplexity in synthetic libraries.

The omega and T architectures permit a broader range of templatemediated reactions that can be performed in fewer steps with othertemplate architectures and are especially useful in distance-dependentreactions. The variety of available architectures provide significantflexibility in the placement of reactive units on templates,particularly for the synthesis of small molecules. It is contemplatedthat the reactive unit including, for example, molecular scaffold may beassociated with a template at any site along the template including the5′-end (e.g., end-of-helix architecture, omega architecture), the 3′-end(e.g., end-of-helix architecture, omega architecture), at the end of ahairpin loop (e.g., hairpin architecture), or in the middle of thetemplate (e.g., T architecture). Preferably, the molecular scaffold isattached covalently to the template. However, in certain embodiments,the molecular scaffold, like the other reactive units, can be brought tothe template using a transfer unit, in which case the molecular scaffoldis only associated with the template through a non-covalent (here,hydrogen bonding) interaction. It is contemplated, however, that undercertain circumstances it may be advantageous to covalently link themolecular scaffold or another reactive unit to the template to produce aT- or E-type template architecture. For reactions that are not distancedependent, the position of the molecular scaffold along the template ismore flexible because the reactive units brought to the template by thetransfer units are able to react with the scaffold even if the scaffoldand reactive group are separated by many bases.

(iv) Template Synthesis

The templates may be synthesized using methodologies well known in theart. For example, the nucleic acid sequence may be prepared using anymethod known in the art to prepare nucleic acid sequences. These methodsinclude both in vivo and in vitro methods including PCR, plasmidpreparation, endonuclease digestion, solid phase synthesis (for example,using an automated synthesizer), in vitro transcription, strandseparation, etc. Following synthesis, the template, when desired may beassociated (for example, covalently or non covalently coupled) with areactive unit of interest using standard coupling chemistries known inthe art.

By way of example, it is possible to create a library of templates via aone-pot modular ligation reaction using oligonucleotide cassettes shownas discussed, for example, in Example 9C. Specifically, it is possibleto combine short oligonucleotides representing all transfer unitannealing regions together with T4 DNA ligase in a single solution. Dueto the sequence design of the oligonucleotide termini, the desiredassembled template library is the only possible product when theligation is complete. This strategy requires 2n×m short oligonucleotidesto assemble a library of n^(m) templates, where n refers to the numberof different sequences per codon position and m refers to the number ofcodons per library member. Thus, for a two-codon template with 64possible sequences per codon, 2×64×2 (256) oligonucleotides are requiredto assemble a library of 64² (4096) templates. The one-pot assembly ofthe templates for the 83-membered macrocyclic fumaramide library isdiscussed in Example 9B. Excellent yields of the desired templatelibrary resulted from a 4 hour ligation reaction. Following ligation, T7exonuclease was added to degrade the non-coding template strand (thedesired coding strand is protected by its non-natural 5′-aminoethyleneglycol linker). This procedure can provide 20 nmoles of the 5′functionalized single-stranded template library (sufficient material forthousands of DNA-templated library syntheses and selections) in about 6hours. The constant 10-base primer binding regions at the ends of eachtemplate were sufficient to permit PCR amplification of as few as 1,000molecules (10⁻²¹ mol) of template from this assembled material.

Another approach for synthesizing templates is shown in FIG. 8. Inparticular, FIG. 8 shows a protocol for producing a template containingin a 5′ to 3′ direction, a small molecule reactant, a hairpin loop, anannealing region, a coding region, and a primer binding site. This typeof protocol may be used to synthesize a wide variety of templates, inparticular, H type templates useful in the practice of the invention.

An efficient method to synthesize a large variety of templates is to usea “split-pool” technique. The oligonucleotides are synthesized usingstandard 3′ to 5′ chemistries. First, the constant 3′ end issynthesized. This is then split into n different vessels, where n is thenumber of different codons to appear at that position in the template.For each vessel, one of the n different codons is synthesized on the(growing) 5′ end of the constant 3′ end. Thus, each vessel contains,from 5′ to 3′, a different codon attached to a constant 3′ end. The nvessels are then pooled, so that a single vessel contains n differentcodons attached to the constant 3′ end. Any constant bases adjacent the5′ end of the codon are now synthesized. The pool then is split into mdifferent vessels, where m is the number of different codons to appearat the next (more 5′) position of the template. A different codon issynthesized (at the 5′ end of the growing oligonucleotide) in each ofthe m vessels. The resulting oligonucleotides are pooled in a singlevessel. Splitting, synthesizing, and pooling are repeated as required tosynthesize all codons and constant regions in the oligonucleotides.

H. Transfer Units

A transfer unit comprises an oligonucleotide containing an anti-codonsequence and a reactive unit. The anti-codons are designed to becomplementary to the codons present in the template. Accordingly, thesequences used in the template and the codon lengths should beconsidered when designing the anti-codons. Any molecule complementary toa codon used in the template may be used, including natural ornon-natural nucleotides. In certain embodiments, the codons include oneor more bases found in nature (i.e., thymidine, uracil, guanidine,cytosine, and adenine). Thus, the anti-codon can include one or morenucleotides normally found in Nature with a base, a sugar, and anoptional phosphate group. Alternatively, the bases may be connected viaa backbone other than the sugar-phosphate backbone normally found inNature (e.g., non-natural nucleotides).

As discussed above, the anti-codon is associated with a particular typeof reactive unit to form a transfer unit. The reactive unit mayrepresent a distinct entity or may be part of the functionality of theanti-codon unit. In certain embodiments, each anti-codon sequence isassociated with one monomer type. For example, the anti-codon sequenceATTAG may be associated with a carbamate residue with an isobutyl sidechain, and the anti-codon sequence CATAG may be associated with acarbamate residue with a phenyl side chain. This one-for-one mapping ofanti-codon to monomer units allows the decoding of any polymer of thelibrary by sequencing the nucleic acid template used in the synthesisand allows synthesis of the same polymer or a related polymer by knowingthe sequence of the original polymer. By changing (e.g., mutating) thesequence of the template, different monomer units may be introduced,thereby allowing the synthesis of related polymers, which cansubsequently be selected and evolved. In certain preferred embodiments,several anti-codons may code for one monomer unit as is the case inNature.

In certain other embodiments, where a small molecule library is to becreated rather than a polymer library, the anti-codon generally isassociated with a reactive unit or reactant used to modify a smallmolecule scaffold. In certain embodiments, the reactant is linked to theanti-codon via a linker long enough to allow the reactant to come intoreactive proximity with the small molecule scaffold. The linkerpreferably has a length and composition to permit intramolecularreactions but yet minimize intermolecular reactions. The reactantsinclude a variety of reagents as demonstrated by the wide range ofreactions that can be utilized in nucleic acid-templated synthesis (see,Examples 2, 4 and 7) and can be any chemical group, catalyst (e.g.,organometallic compounds), or reactive moiety (e.g., electrophiles,nucleophiles) known in the chemical arts.

Additionally, the association between the anti-codon and the reactiveunit, for example, a monomer unit or reactant, in the transfer unit maybe covalent or non-covalent. The association maybe through a covalentbond and, in certain embodiments, the covalent bond may be severable.

Thus, the anti-codon can be associated with the reactant through alinker moiety (see Example 3). The linkage can be cleavable by light,oxidation, hydrolysis, exposure to acid, exposure to base, reduction,etc. Fruchtel et al.(1996) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. ENGL. 35: 17 describesa variety of linkages useful in the practice of the invention. Thelinker facilitates contact of the reactant with the small moleculescaffold and in certain embodiments, depending on the desired reaction,positions DNA as a leaving group (“autocleavable” strategy), or may linkreactive groups to the template via the “scarless” linker strategy(which yields product without leaving behind an additional atom or atomshaving chemical functionality), or a “useful scar” strategy (in which aportion of the linker is left behind to be functionalized in subsequentsteps following linker cleavage).

With the “autocleavable” linker strategy, the DNA-reactive group bond iscleaved as a natural consequence of the reaction. In the “scarless”linker strategy, DNA-templated reaction of one reactive group isfollowed by cleavage of the linker attached through a second reactivegroup to yield products without leaving behind additional atoms capableof providing chemical functionality. Alternatively, a “useful scar” maybe utilized on the theory that it may be advantageous to introduceuseful atoms and/or chemical groups as a consequence of linker cleavage.In particular, a “useful scar” is left behind following linker cleavageand can be functionalized in subsequent steps.

The anti-codon and the reactive unit (monomer unit or reactant) may alsobe associated through non-covalent interactions such as ionic,electrostatic, hydrogen bonding, van der Waals interactions, hydrophobicinteractions, pi-stacking, etc. and combinations thereof To give but oneexample, an anti-codon may be linked to biotin, and a monomer unitlinked to streptavidin. The propensity of streptavidin to bind biotinleads to the non-covalent association between the anti-codon and themonomer unit to form the transfer unit.

The specific annealing of transfer units to templates permits the use oftransfer units at concentrations lower than concentrations used in manytraditional organic syntheses. Thus, transfer units can be used atsubmillimolar concentrations (e.g. less than 100 μM, less than 10 μM,less than 1 μM, less than 100 nM, or less than 10 nM).

E. Chemical Reactions

A variety of compounds and/or libraries can be prepared using themethods described herein. In certain embodiments, compounds that arenot, or do not resemble, nucleic acids or analogs thereof, aresynthesized according to the method of the invention. In certain otherembodiments, compounds that are not, or do not resemble, proteins,peptides, or analogs thereof, are synthesized according to the method ofthe invention.

(i) Coupling Reactions for Small Molecule Synthesis

In some embodiments, it is possible to create compounds such as smallmolecules using the methods described herein. These small molecules maybe like natural products, non-polymeric, and/or non-oligomeric. Thesubstantial interest in small molecules is due in part to their use asthe active ingredient in many pharmaceutical preparations although theymay also be used, for example, as catalysts, materials, or additives.

In synthesizing small molecules using the method of the presentinvention, an evolvable template also is provided. The template caninclude a small molecule scaffold upon which the small molecule is to bebuilt, or a small molecule scaffold may be added to the template. Thesmall molecule scaffold can be any chemical compound with two or moresites for functionalization. For example, the small molecule scaffoldcan include a ring system (e.g., the ABCD steroid ring system found incholesterol) with functionalizable groups coupled to the atoms making upthe rings. In another example, the small molecule may be the underlyingstructure of a pharmaceutical agent such as morphine, epothilone or acephalosporin antibiotic. The sites or groups to be functionalized onthe small molecule scaffold may be protected using methods andprotecting groups known in the art. The protecting groups used in asmall molecule scaffold may be orthogonal to one another so thatprotecting groups can be removed one at a time.

In this embodiment, the transfer units comprise an anti-codon associatedwith a reactant or a building block for use in modifying, adding to, ortaking away from the small molecule scaffold. The reactants or buildingblocks may be, for example, electrophiles (e.g., acetyl, amides, acidchlorides, esters, nitrites, imines), nucleophiles (e.g., amines,hydroxyl groups, thiols), catalysts (e.g., organometallic catalysts), orside chains. The transfer units are allowed to contact the templateunder hydridizing conditions. As a result of oligonucleotide annealing,the attached reactant or building block is allowed to react with a siteon the small molecule scaffold. In certain embodiments, protectinggroups on the small molecule template are removed one at a time from thesites to be functionalized so that the reactant of the transfer unitwill react at only the desired position on the scaffold.

The reaction conditions, linker, reactant, and site to be functionalizedare chosen to avoid intermolecular reactions and accelerateintramolecular reactions. Sequential or simultaneous contacting of thetemplate with transfer units can be employed depending on the particularcompound to be synthesized. In certain embodiments of special interest,the multi-step synthesis of chemical compounds is provided in which thetemplate is contacted sequentially with two or more transfer units tofacilitate multi-step synthesis of complex chemical compounds.

After the sites on the scaffold have been modified, the newlysynthesized small molecule remains associated with the template thatencoded its synthesis. Decoding the sequence of the template permits thedeconvolution of the synthetic history and thereby the structure of thesmall molecule. The template can also be amplified in order to createmore of the desired small molecule and/or the template can be evolved(mutagenized) to create related small molecules. The small molecule canalso be cleaved from the template for purification or screening.

(ii) Coupling Reactions for Polymer Synthesis

In certain embodiments, polymers, specifically unnatural polymers, areprepared according to the method of the present invention. The unnaturalpolymers that can be created using the inventive method and systeminclude any unnatural polymers. Exemplary unnatural polymers include,but are not limited to, peptide nucleic acid (PNA) polymers,polycarbamates, polyureas, polyesters, polyacrylate, polyalkylene (e.g.,polyethylene, polypropylene), polycarbonates. polypeptides withunnatural stereochemistry, polypeptides with unnatural amino acids, andcombination thereof. In certain embodiments, the polymers comprise atleast 10, 25, 75, 100, 125, 150 monomer units or more. The polymerssynthesized using the inventive system may be used, for example, ascatalysts, pharmaceuticals, metal chelators, or catalysts.

In preparing certain unnatural polymers, the monomer units attached tothe anti-codons may be any monomers or oligomers capable of being joinedtogether to form a polymer. The monomer units may be, for example,carbamates, D-amino acids, unnatural amino acids, PNAs, ureas, hydroxyacids, esters, carbonates, acrylates, or ethers. In certain embodiments,the monomer units have two reactive groups used to link the monomer unitinto the growing polymer chain, as depicted in FIG. 4. Preferably, thetwo reactive groups are not the same so that the monomer unit may beincorporated into the polymer in a directional sense, for example, atone end may be an electrophile and at the other end a nucleophile.Reactive groups may include, but are not limited to, esters, amides,carboxylic acids, activated carbonyl groups, acid chlorides, amines,hydroxyl groups, and thiols. In certain embodiments, the reactive groupsare masked or protected (Greene et al. (1 999) PROTECTIVE GROUPS INORGANIC SYNTHESIS 3rd Edition, Wiley) so that polymerization may nottake place until a desired time when the reactive groups aredeprotected. Once the monomer units are assembled along the nucleic acidtemplate, initiation of the polymerization sequence results in a cascadeof polymerization and deprotection steps wherein the polymerization stepresults in deprotection of a reactive group to be used in the subsequentpolymerization step.

The monomer units to be polymerized can include two or more monomersdepending on the geometry along the nucleic acid template. The monomerunits to be polymerized must be able to stretch along the nucleic acidtemplate and particularly across the distance spanned by its encodinganti-codon and optional spacer sequence. In certain embodiments, themonomer unit actually comprises two monomers, for example, adicarbamate, a diurea, or a dipeptide. In yet other embodiments, themonomer unit comprises three or more monomers. Example 9C, for example,discloses the synthesis of PNA based polymers wherein each monomer unitcomprises four PNA molecules.

The monomer units may contain any chemical groups known in the art.Reactive chemical groups especially those that would interfere withpolymerization, hybridization, etc. are preferably masked using knownprotecting groups (Greene et al. (1999) supra). In general, theprotecting groups used to mask these reactive groups are orthogonal tothose used in protecting the groups used in the polymerization steps.

It has been discovered that, under certain circumstances, the type ofchemical reaction may affect the fidelity of the polymerization process.For example, distance independent chemical reactions (for example,reactions that occur efficiently when the reactive units are spacedapart by intervening bases, for example, amine acylation reactions) mayresult in the spurious incorporation of the wrong monomers at aparticular position of a polymer chain. In contrast, by choosingchemical reactions for template mediated syntheses that are distancedependent (for example, reactions that become inefficient the furtherthe reactive units are spaced part via intervening bases, for example,reductive amination reactions), it is possible control the fidelity ofthe polymerization process. Example 9 discusses in detail effect ofusing distance dependent chemical reactions to enhance the fidelity ofthe polymerization process during template mediated synthesis.

(iii) Functional Group Transformations

Nucleic acid-templated synthesis can be used to effect functional grouptransformations that either (i) unmask or (ii) interconvertfunctionality used in coupling reactions. By exposing or creating areactive group within a sequence-programmed subset of a library, nucleicacid-templated functional group interconversions permit the generationof library diversity by sequential unmasking. The sequential unmaskingapproach offers the major advantage of enabling reactants that wouldnormally lack the ability to be linked to a nucleic acid (for example,simple alkyl halides) to contribute to library diversity by reactingwith a sequence-specified subset of templates in an intermolecular,non-templated reaction mode. This advantage significantly increases thetypes of structures that can be generated.

One embodiment of the invention involves deprotection or unmasking offunctional groups present in a reactive unit. According to thisembodiment, a nucleic acid-template is associated with a reactive unitthat contains a protected functional group. A transfer unit, comprisingan oligonucleotide complimentary to the template codon region and areagent capable of removing the protecting group, is annealed to thetemplate, and the reagent reacts with the protecting group, removing itfrom the reactive unit. To further functionalize the reactive unit, theexposed functional group then is subjected to a reagent not linked to anucleic acid. In some embodiments, the reactive unit contains two ormore protected functional groups. In still other embodiments, theprotecting groups are orthogonal protecting groups that are sequentiallyremoved by iterated annealing with reagents linked to transfer units.

Another embodiment of the invention involves interconversions offunctional groups present on a reactive unit. According to thisembodiment, a transfer unit associated with a reagent that can catalyzea reaction is annealed to a template bearing the reactive unit. Areagent not linked to a nucleic acid is added to the reaction, and thetransfer unit reagent catalyzes the reaction between the unlinkedreagent and the reactive unit, yielding a newly functionalized reactiveunit. In some embodiments, the reactive unit contains two or morefunctional groups which are sequentially interconverted by iterativeexposure to different transfer unit-bound reagents.

(iv) Reaction Conditions

Nucleic acid-templated reactions can occur in aqueous or non-aqueous(i.e., organic) solutions, or a mixture of one or more aqueous andnon-aqueous solutions. In aqueous solutions, reactions can be performedat pH ranges from about 2 to about 12, or preferably from about 2 toabout 10, or more preferably from about 4 to about 10. The reactionsused in DNA-templated chemistry preferably should not require very basicconditions (e.g., pH>12, pH>10) or very acidic conditions (e.g., pH<1,pH<2, pH<4), because extreme conditions may lead to degradation ormodification of the nucleic acid template and/or molecule (for example,the polymer, or small molecule) being synthesized. The aqueous solutioncan contain one or more inorganic salts, including, but not limited to,NaCl, Na₂SO₄, KCl, Mg⁺², Mn⁺², etc., at various concentrations.

Organic solvents suitable for nucleic acid-templated reactions include,but are not limited to, methylene chloride, chloroform,dimethylformamide, and organic alcohols, including methanol and ethanol.To permit quantitative dissolution of reaction components in organicsolvents, quaternized ammonium salts, such as, for example, long chaintetraalkylammonium salts, can be added (Jost et al. (1989) NUCLEIC ACIDSRES. 17: 2143; Mel'nikov et al. (1999) LANGMUIR 15: 1923-1928).

Nucleic acid-templated reactions may require a catalyst, such as, forexample, homogeneous, heterogeneous, phase transfer, and asymmetriccatalysis. In other embodiments, a catalyst is not required. Thepresence of additional, accessory reagents not linked to a nucleic acidare preferred in some embodiments. Useful accessory reagents caninclude, for example, oxidizing agents (e.g., NaIO₄); reducing agents(e.g., NaCNBH₃); activating reagents (e.g., EDC, NHS, and sulfo-NHS);transition metals such as nickel (e.g., Ni(NO₃)₂), rhodium (e.g. RhCl₃).ruthenium (e.g. RuCl₃), copper (e.g. Cu(NO₃)₂), cobalt (e.g. CoCl₂),iron (e.g. Fe(NO₃)₃), osmium (e.g. OsO₄), titanium (e.g. TiCl₄ ortitanium tetraisopropoxide), palladium (e.g. NaPdCl₄), or Ln; transitionmetal ligands (e.g., phosphines, amines, and halides); Lewis acids; andLewis bases.

Reaction conditions preferably are optimized to suit the nature of thereactive units and oligonucleotides used.

(v) Classes of Chemical Reactions

Known chemical reactions for synthesizing polymers, small molecules, orother chemical compounds can be used in nucleic acid-templatedreactions. Thus, reactions such as those listed in March's AdvancedOrganic Chemistry, Organic Reactions, Organic Syntheses, organic textbooks, journals such as Journal of the American Chemical Society journalof Organic Chemistry, Tetrahedra, etc., and Carruther's Some ModernMethods of Organic Chemistry can be used. The chosen reactionspreferably are compatible with nucleic acids such as DNA or RNA or arecompatible with the modified nucleic acids used as the template.

Reactions useful in nucleic-acid templated chemistry include, forexample, substitution reactions, carbon-carbon bond forming reactions,elimination reactions, acylation reactions, and addition reactions. Anillustrative but not exhaustive list of aliphatic nucleophilicsubstitution reactions useful in the present invention includes, forexample, S_(N)2 reactions, S_(N)1 reactions, S_(N)i reactions, allylicrearrangements, nucleophilic substitution at an aliphatic trigonalcarbon, and nucleophilic substation at a vinylic carbon.

Specific aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions with oxygennucleophiles include, for example, hydrolysis of alkyl halides,hydrolysis of gen-dihalides, hydrolysis of 1,1,1-trihalides, hydrolysisof alkyl esters or inorganic acids, hydrolysis of diazo ketones,hydrolysis of acetal and enol ethers, hydrolysis of epoxides, hydrolysisof acyl halides, hydrolysis of anhydrides, hydrolysis of carboxylicesters, hydrolysis of amides, alkylation with alkyl halides (WilliamsonReaction), epoxide formation, alkylation with inorganic esters,alkylation with diazo compounds, dehydration of alcohols,transetherification, alcoholysis of epoxides, alkylation with oniumsalts, hydroxylation of silanes, alcoholysis of acyl halides,alcoholysis of anhydrides, esterfication of carboxylic acids,alcoholysis of carboxylic esters (transesterfication), alcoholysis ofamides, alkylation of carboxylic acid salts, cleavage of ether withacetic anhydride, alkylation of carboxylic acids with diazo compounds,acylation of caroxylic acids with acyl halides, acylation of carboxylicacids with carboxylic acids, formation of oxonium salts, preparation ofperoxides and hydroperoxides, preparation of inorganic esters (e.g.,nitrites, nitrates, sulfonates), preparation of alcohols from amines,and preparation of mixed organic-inorganic anhydrides.

Specific aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions with sulfurnucleophiles, which tend to be better nucleophiles than their oxygenanalogs, include, for example, attack by SH at an alkyl carbon to formthiols, attack by S at an alkyl carbon to form thioethers, attack by SHor SR at an acyl carbon, formation of disulfides, formation of Buntesalts, alkylation of sulfinic acid salts, and formation of alkylthiocyanates.

Aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions with nitrogen nucleophilesinclude, for example, alkylation of amines, N-arylation of amines,replacement of a hydroxy by an amino group, transamination,transamidation, alkylation of amines with diazo compounds, amination ofepoxides, amination of oxetanes, amination of aziridines, amination ofalkanes, formation of isocyanides, acylation of amines by acyl halides,acylation of amines by anhydrides, acylation of amines by carboxylicacids, acylation of amines by carboxylic esters, acylation of amines byamides, acylation of amines by other acid derivatives, N-alkylation orN-arylation of amides and imides, N-acylation of amides and imides,formation of aziridines from epoxides, formation of nitro compounds,formation of azides, formation of isocyanates and isothiocyanates, andformation of azoxy compounds.

Aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions with halogen nucleophilesinclude, for example, attack at an alkyl carbon, halide exchange,formation of alkyl halides from esters of sulfuric and sulfonic acids,formation of alkyl halides from alcohols, formation of alkyl halidesfrom ethers, formation of halohydrins from epoxides, cleavage ofcarboxylic esters with lithium iodide, conversion of diazo ketones toa-halo ketones, conversion of amines to halides, conversion of tertiaryamines to cyanamides (the von Braun reaction), formation of acyl halidesfrom carboxylic acids, and formation of acyl halides from acidderivatives.

Aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions using hydrogen as anucleophile include, for example, reduction of alkyl halides, reductionof tosylates, other sulfonates, and similar compounds, hydrogenolysis ofalcohols, hydrogenolysis of esters (Barton-McCombie reaction),hydrogenolysis of nitriles, replacement of alkoxyl by hydrogen reductionof epoxides, reductive cleavage of carboxylic esters, reduction of a C—Nbond, desulfurization, reduction of acyl halides, reduction ofcarboxylic acids, esters, and anhydrides to aldehydes, and reduction ofamides to aldehydes.

Although certain carbon nucleophiles may be too nucleophilic and/orbasic to be used in certain embodiments of the invention, aliphaticnucleophilic substitution reactions using carbon nucleophiles include,for example, coupling with silanes, coupling of alkyl halides (the Wurtzreaction), the reaction of alkyl halides and sulfonate esters with GroupI (I A) and II (II A) organometallic reagents, reaction of alkyl halidesand sulfonate esters with organocuprates, reaction of alkyl halides andsulfonate esters with other organometallic reagents, allylic andpropargylic coupling with a halide substrate, coupling of organometallicreagents with esters of sulfuric and sulfonic acids, sulfoxides, andsulfones, coupling involving alcohols, coupling of organometallicreagents with carboxylic esters, coupling of organometallic reagentswith compounds containing an esther linkage, reaction of organometallicreagents with epoxides, reaction of organometallics with aziridine,alkylation at a carbon bearing an active hydrogen, alkylation ofketones, nitriles, and carboxylic esters, alkylation of carboxylic acidsalts, alkylation at a position a to a heteroatom (alkylation of1,3-dithianes), alkylation of dihydro-1,3-oxazine (the Meyers synthesisof aldehydes, ketones, and carboxylic acids), alkylation withtrialkylboranes, alkylation at an alkynyl carbon, preparation ofnitriles, direct conversion of alkyl halides to aldehydes and ketones,conversion of alkyl halides, alcohols, or alkanes to carboxylic acidsand their derivatives, the conversion of acyl halides to ketones withorganometallic compounds, the conversion of anhydrides, carboxylicesters, or amides to ketones with organometallic compounds, the couplingof acyl halides, acylation at a carbon bearing an active hydrogen,acylation of carboxylic esters by carboxylic esters (the Claisen andDieckmann condensation), acylation of ketones and nitriles withcarboxylic esters, acylation of carboxylic acid salts, preparation ofacyl cyanides, and preparation of diazo ketones, ketonicdecarboxylation.

Reactions which involve nucleophilic attack at a sulfonyl sulfur atommay also be used in the present invention and include, for example,hydrolysis of sulfonic acid derivatives (attack by OH), formation ofsulfonic esters (attack by OR), formation of sulfonamides (attack bynitrogen), formation of sulfonyl halides (attack by halides), reductionof sulfonyl chlorides (attack by hydrogen), and preparation of sulfones(attack by carbon).

Aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions may also be used innucleotide-templated chemistry. Hydrogen exchange reactions are examplesof aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions that use hydrogen asthe electrophile. Aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions whichuse nitrogen electrophiles include, for example, nitration andnitro-de-hydrogenation, nitrosation of nitroso-de-hydrogenation,diazonium coupling, direct introduction of the diazonium group, andamination or amino-de-hydrogenation. Reactions of this type with sulfurelectrophiles include, for example, sulfonation, sulfo-de-hydrogenation,halosulfonation, halosulfo-de-hydrogenation, sulfurization, andsulfonylation. Reactions using halogen electrophiles include, forexample, halogenation, and halo-de-hydrogenation. Aromatic electrophilicsubstitution reactions with carbon electrophiles include, for example,Friedel-Crafts alkylation, alkylation, alkyl-de-hydrogenation,Friedel-Crafts arylation (the Scholl reaction), Friedel-Craftsacylation, formylation with disubstituted formamides, formylation withzinc cyanide and HCl (the Gatterman reaction), formylation withchloroform (the Reimer-Tiemann reaction), other formylations,formyl-de-hydrogenation, carboxylation with carbonyl halides,carboxylation with carbon dioxide (the Kolbe-Schmitt reaction),amidation with isocyanates, N-alkylcarbamoyl-de-hydrogenation,hydroxyalkylation, hydroxyalkyl-de-hydrogenation, cyclodehydration ofaldehydes and ketones, haloalkylation, halo-de-hydrogenation,aminoalkylation, amidoalkylation, dialkylaminoalkylation,dialkylamino-de-hydrogenation, thioalkylation, acylation with nitriles(the Hoesch reaction), cyanation, and cyano-de-hydrogenation. Reactionsusing oxygen electrophiles include, for example, hydroxylation andhydroxy-de-hydrogenation.

Rearrangement reactions include, for example, the Fries rearrangement,migration of a nitro group, migration of a nitroso group (theFischer-Hepp Rearrangement), migration of an arylazo group, migration ofa halogen (the Orton rearrangement), migration of an alkyl group, etc.Other reaction on an aromatic ring include the reversal of aFriedel-Crafts alkylation, decarboxylation of aromatic aldehydes,decarboxylation of aromatic acids, the Jacobsen reaction, deoxygenation,desulfonation, hydro-de-sulfonation, dehalogenation,hydro-de-halogenation, and hydrolysis of organometallic compounds.

Aliphatic electrophilic substitution reactions are also useful.Reactions using the S_(E)1, S_(E)2 (front), S_(E)2 (back), S_(E)i,addition-elimination, and cyclic mechanisms can be used in the presentinvention. Reactions of this type with hydrogen as the leaving groupinclude, for example, hydrogen exchange (deuterio-de-hydrogenation,deuteriation), migration of a double bond, and keto-enoltautomerization. Reactions with halogen electrophiles include, forexample, halogenation of aldehydes and ketones, halogenation ofcarboxylic acids and acyl halides, and halogenation of sulfoxides andsulfones. Reactions with nitrogen electrophiles include, for example,aliphatic diazonium coupling, nitrosation at a carbon bearing an activehydrogen, direct formation of diazo compounds, conversion of amides toα-azido amides, direct amination at an activated position, and insertionby nitrenes. Reactions with sulfur or selenium electrophiles include,for example, sulfenylation, sulfonation, and selenylation of ketones andcarboxylic esters. Reactions with carbon electrophiles include, forexample, acylation at an aliphatic carbon, conversion of aldehydes toβ-keto esters or ketones, cyanation, cyano-de-hydrogenation, alkylationof alkanes, the Stork enamine reaction, and insertion by carbenes.Reactions with metal electrophiles include, for example, metalation withorganometallic compounds, metalation with metals and strong bases, andconversion of enolates to silyl enol ethers. Aliphatic electrophilicsubstitution reactions with metals as leaving groups include, forexample, replacement of metals by hydrogen, reactions betweenorganometallic reagents and oxygen, reactions between organometallicreagents and peroxides, oxidation of trialkylboranes to borates,conversion of Grignard reagents to sulfur compounds, halo-de-metalation,the conversion of organometallic compounds to amines, the conversion oforganometallic compounds to ketones, aldehydes, carboxylic esters andamides, cyano-de-metalation, transmetalation with a metal,transmetalation with a metal halide, transmetalation with anorganometallic compound, reduction of alkyl halides,metallo-de-halogenation, replacement of a halogen by a metal from anorganometallic compound, decarboxylation of aliphatic acids, cleavage ofalkoxides, replacement of a carboxyl group by an acyl group, basiccleavage of β-keto esters and β-diketones, haloform reaction, cleavageof non-enolizable ketones, the Haller-Bauer reaction, cleavage ofalkanes decyanation, and hydro-de-cyanation. Electrophlic substitutionreactions at nitrogen include, for example, diazotization, conversion ofhydrazines to azides, N-nitrosation, N-nitroso-de-hydrogenation,conversion of amines to azo compounds, N-halogenation,N-halo-de-hydrogenation, reactions of amines with carbon monoxide, andreactions of amines with carbon dioxide.

Aromatic nucleophilic substitution reactions may also be used in thepresent invention. Reactions proceeding via the S_(N)Ar mechanism, theS_(N)1 mechanism, the benzyne mechanism, the S_(RN)1 mechanism, or othermechanism, for example, can be used. Aromatic nucleophilic substitutionreactions with oxygen nucleophiles include, for example,hydroxy-de-halogenation, alkali fusion of sulfonate salts, andreplacement of OR or OAr. Reactions with sulfur nucleophiles include,for example, replacement by SH or SR. Reactions using nitrogennucleophiles include, for example, replacement by NH₂, NHR, or NR₂, andreplacement of a hydroxy group by an amino group. Reactions with halogennucleophiles include, for example, the introduction halogens. Aromaticnucleophilic substitution reactions with hydrogen as the nucleophileinclude, for example, reduction of phenols and phenolic esters andethers, and reduction of halides and nitro compounds. Reactions withcarbon nucleophiles include, for example, the Rosenmund-von Braunreaction, coupling of organometallic compounds with aryl halides,ethers, and carboxylic esters, arylation at a carbon containing anactive hydrogen, conversions of aryl substrates to carboxylic acids,their derivatives, aldehydes, and ketones, and the Ullmann reaction.Reactions with hydrogen as the leaving group include, for example,alkylation, arylation, and amination of nitrogen heterocycles. Reactionswith N₂ ⁺ as the leaving group include, for example,hydroxy-de-diazoniation, replacement by sulfur-containing groups,iodo-de-diazoniation, and the Schiemann reaction. Rearrangementreactions include, for example, the von Richter rearrangement, theSommelet-Hauser rearrangement, rearrangement of aryl hydroxylamines, andthe Smiles rearrangement.

Reactions involving free radicals can also be used, although the freeradical reactions used in nucleotide-templated chemistry should becarefully chosen to avoid modification or cleavage of the nucleotidetemplate. With that limitation, free radical substitution reactions canbe used in the present invention. Particular free radical substitutionreactions include, for example, substitution by halogen, halogenation atan alkyl carbon, allylic halogenation, benzylic halogenation,halogenation of aldehydes, hydroxylation at an aliphatic carbon,hydroxylation at an aromatic carbon, oxidation of aldehydes tocarboxylic acids, formation of cyclic ethers, formation ofhydroperoxides, formation of peroxides, acyloxylation,acyloxy-de-hydrogenation, chlorosulfonation, nitration of alkanes,direct conversion of aldehydes to amides, amidation and amination at analkyl carbon, simple coupling at a susceptible position, coupling ofalkynes, arylation of aromatic compounds by diazonium salts, arylationof activated alkenes by diazonium salts (the Meerwein arylation),arylation and alkylation of alkenes by organopalladium compounds (theHeck reaction), arylation and alkylation of alkenes by vinyltincompounds (the Stille reaction), alkylation and arylation of aromaticcompounds by peroxides, photochemical arylation of aromatic compounds,alkylation, acylation, and carbalkoxylation of nitrogen heterocyclesParticular reactions in which N₂ ⁺is the leaving group include, forexample, replacement of the diazonium group by hydrogen, replacement ofthe diazonium group by chlorine or bromine, nitro-de-diazoniation,replacement of the diazonium group by sulfur-containing groups, aryldimerization with diazonium salts, methylation of diazonium salts,vinylation of diazonium salts, arylation of diazonium salts, andconversion of diazonium salts to aldehydes, ketones, or carboxylicacids. Free radical substitution reactions with metals as leaving groupsinclude, for example, coupling of Grignard reagents, coupling ofboranes, and coupling of other organometallic reagents. Reaction withhalogen as the leaving group are included. Other free radicalsubstitution reactions with various leaving groups include, for example,desulfurization with Raney Nickel, conversion of sulfides toorganolithium compounds, decarboxylative dimerization (the Kolbereaction), the Hunsdiecker reaction, decarboxylative allylation, anddecarbonylation of aldehydes and acyl halides.

Reactions involving additions to carbon-carbon multiple bonds are alsoused in nucleotide-templated chemistry. Any mechanism may be used in theaddition reaction including, for example, electrophilic addition,nucleophilic addition, free radical addition, and cyclic mechanisms.Reactions involving additions to conjugated systems can also be used.Addition to cyclopropane rings can also be utilized. Particularreactions include, for example, isomerization, addition of hydrogenhalides, hydration of double bonds, hydration of triple bonds, additionof alcohols, addition of carboxylic acids, addition of H₂S and thiols,addition of ammonia and amines, addition of amides, addition ofhydrazoic acid, hydrogenation of double and triple bonds, otherreduction of double and triple bonds, reduction of the double and triplebonds of conjugated systems, hydrogenation of aromatic rings, reductivecleavage of cyclopropanes, hydroboration, other hydrometalations,addition of alkanes, addition of alkenes and/or alkynes to alkenesand/or alkynes (e.g., pi-cation cyclization reactions,hydro-alkenyl-addition), ene reactions, the Michael reaction, additionof organometallics to double and triple bonds not conjugated tocarbonyls, the addition of two alkyl groups to an alkyne, 1,4-additionof organometallic compounds to activated double bonds, addition ofboranes to activated double bonds, addition of tin and mercury hydridesto activated double bonds, acylation of activated double bonds and oftriple bonds, addition of alcohols, amines, carboxylic esters,aldehydes, etc., carbonylation of double and triple bonds,hydrocarboxylation, hydroformylation, addition of aldehydes, addition ofHCN, addition of silanes, radical addition, radical cyclization,halogenation of double and triple bonds (addition of halogen, halogen),halolactonization, halolactamization, addition of hypohalous acids andhypohalites (addition of halogen, oxygen), addition of sulfur compounds(addition of halogen, sulfur), addition of halogen and an amino group(addition of halogen, nitrogen), addition of NOX and NO₂X (addition ofhalogen, nitrogen), addition of XN₃ (addition of halogen, nitrogen),addition of alkyl halides (addition of halogen, carbon), addition ofacyl halides (addition of halogen, carbon), hydroxylation (addition ofoxygen, oxygen) (e.g. asymmetric dihydroxylation reaction with OsO₄),dihydroxylation of aromatic rings, epoxidation (addition of oxygen,oxygen) (e.g., Sharpless asymmetric epoxidation), photooxidation ofdienes (addition of oxygen, oxygen), hydroxysulfenylation (addition ofoxygen, sulfur), oxyamination (addition of oxygen, nitrogen),diamnination (addition of nitrogen, nitrogen), formation of aziridines(addition of nitrogen), aminosulfenylation (addition of nitrogen,sulfur), acylacyloxylation and acylamidation (addition of oxygen, carbonor nitrogen, carbon), 1,3-dipolar addition (addition of oxygen,nitrogen, carbon), Diels-Alder reaction, heteroatom Diels-Alderreaction, all carbon 3+2 cycloadditions, dimerization of alkenes, theaddition of carbenes and carbenoids to double and triple bonds,trimerization and tetramerization of alkynes, and other cycloadditionreactions.

In addition to reactions involving additions to carbon-carbon multiplebonds, addition reactions to carbon-hetero multiple bonds can be used innucleotide-templated chemistry. Exemplary reactions include, forexample, the addition of water to aldehydes and ketones (formation ofhydrates), hydrolysis of carbon-nitrogen double bond, hydrolysis ofaliphatic nitro compounds, hydrolysis of nitriles, addition of alcoholsand thiols to aldehydes and ketones, reductive alkylation of alcohols,addition of alcohols to isocyanates, alcoholysis of nitriles, formationof xanthates, addition of H₂S and thiols to carbonyl compounds,formation of bisulfite addition products, addition of amines toaldehydes and ketones, addition of amides to aldehydes, reductivealkylation of ammonia or amines, the Mannich reaction, the addition ofamines to isocyanates, addition of ammonia or amines to nitriles,addition of amines to carbon disulfide and carbon dioxide, addition ofhydrazine derivative to carbonyl compounds, formation of oximes,conversion of aldehydes to nitriles, formation of gem-dihalides fromaldehydes and ketones, reduction of aldehydes and ketones to alcohols,reduction of the carbon-nitrogen double bond, reduction of nitriles toamines, reduction of nitriles to aldehydes, addition of Grignardreagents and organolithium reagents to aldehydes and ketones, additionof other organometallics to aldehydes and ketones, addition oftrialkylallylsilanes to aldehydes and ketones, addition of conjugatedalkenes to aldehydes (the Baylis-Hillman reaction), the Reformatskyreaction, the conversion of carboxylic acid salts to ketones withorganometallic compounds, the addition of Grignard reagents to acidderivatives, the addition of organometallic compounds to CO₂ and CS₂,addition of organometallic compounds to C═N compounds, addition ofcarbenes and diazoalkanes to C═N compounds, addition of Grignardreagents to nitriles and isocyanates, the Aldol reaction, MukaiyamaAldol and related reactions, Aldol-type reactions between carboxylicesters or amides and aldehydes or ketones, the Knoevenagel reaction(e.g., the Nef reaction, the Favorskii reaction), the Petersonalkenylation reaction, the addition of active hydrogen compounds to CO₂and CS₂, the Perkin reaction, Darzens glycidic ester condensation, theTollens' reaction, the Wittig reaction, the Tebbe alkenylation, thePetasis alkenylation, alternative alkenylations, the Thorpe reaction,the Thorpe-Ziegler reaction, addition of silanes, formation ofcyanohydrins, addition of HCN to C═N and C═N bonds, the Prins reaction,the benzoin condensation, addition of radicals to C═O, C═S, C═Ncompounds, the Ritter reaction, acylation of aldehydes and ketones,addition of aldehydes to aldehydes, the addition of isocyanates toisocyanates (formation of carbodiimides), the conversion of carboxylicacid salts to nitriles, the formation of epoxides from aldehydes andketones, the formation of episulfides and episulfones, the formation ofβ-lactones and oxetanes (e.g., the Paterno-Büchi reaction), theformation of β-lactams, etc. Reactions involving addition to isocyanidesinclude the addition of water to isocyanides, the Passerini reaction,the Ug reaction, and the formation-of metalated aldimines.

Elimination reactions, including α, β, and γ eliminations, as well asextrusion reactions, can be performed using nucleotide-templatedchemistry, although the strength of the reagents and conditions employedshould be considered. Preferred elimination reactions include reactionsthat go by E1, E2, E1cB, or E2C mechanisms. Exemplary reactions include,for example, reactions in which hydrogen is removed from one side (e.g.,dehydration of alcohols, cleavage of ethers to alkenes, the Chugaevreaction, ester decomposition, cleavage of quarternary ammoniumhydroxides, cleavage of quaternary ammonium salts with strong bases,cleavage of amine oxides, pyrolysis of keto-ylids, decomposition oftoluene-p-solfonylhydrazones, cleavage of sulfoxides, cleavage ofselenoxides, cleavage of sulfomes, dehydrogalogenation of alkyl halides,dehydrohalogenation of acyl halides, dehydrohalogenation of sulfonylhalides, elimination of boranes, conversion of alkenes to alkynes,decarbonylation of acyl halides), reactions in which neither leavingatom is hydrogen (e.g., deoxygenation of vicinal diols, cleavage ofcyclic thionocarbonates, conversion of epoxides to episulfides andalkenes, the Ramberg-Bäcklund reaction, conversion of aziridines toalkenes, dehalogenation of vicinal dihalides, dehalogenation of α-haloacyl halides, and elimination of a halogen and a hetero group),fragmentation reactions (i.e., reactions in which carbon is the positiveleaving group or the electrofuge, such as, for example, fragmentation ofγ-amino and γ-hydroxy halides, fragmentation of 1,3-diols,decarboxylation of β-hydroxy carboxylic acids, decarboxylation ofβ-lactones, fragmentation of α,β-epoxy hydrazones, elimination of COfrom briged bicyclic compounds, and elimination of CO₂ from bridgedbicyclic compounds), reactions in which C≡N or C═N bonds are formed(e.g., dehydration of aldoximes or similar compounds, conversion ofketoximes to nitriles, dehydration of unsubstituted amides, andconversion of N-alkylformamides to isocyanides), reactions in which C═Obonds are formed (e.g., pyrolysis of β-hydroxy alkenes), and reactionsin which N═N bonds are formed (e.g, eliminations to give diazoalkenes).Extrusion reactions include, for example, extrusion of N₂ frompyrazolines, extrusion of N₂ from pyrazoles, extrusion of N₂ fromtriazolines, extrusion of CO, extrusion of CO₂, extrusion of SO₂, theStory synthesis, and alkene synthesis by twofold extrusion.

Rearrangements, including, for example, nucleophilic rearrangements,electrophilic rearrangements, prototropic rearrangements, andfree-radical rearrangements, can also be performed usingnucleotide-templated chemistry. Both 1,2 rearrangements and non-1,2rearrangements can be performed. Exemplary reactions include, forexample, carbon-to-carbon migrations of R, H, and Ar (e.g.,Wagner-Meerwein and related reactins, the Pinacol rearrangement, ringexpansion reactions, ring contraction reactions, acid-catalyzedrearrangements of aldehydes and ketones, the dienone-phenolrearrangement, the Favorskii rearrangement, the Arndt-Eistert synthesis,homologation of aldehydes, and homologation of ketones),carbon-to-carbon migrations of other groups (e.g., migrations ofhalogen, hydroxyl, amino, etc.; migration of boron; and the Neberrearrangement), carbon-to-nitrogen migrations of R and Ar (e.g., theHofmann rearrangement, the Curtius rearrangement, the Lossenrearrangement, the Schmidt reaction, the Beckman rearrangement, theStieglits rearrangement, and related rearrangements), carbon-to-oxygenmigrations of R and Ar (e.g., the Baeyer-Villiger rearrangement andrearrangment of hydroperoxides), nitrogen-to-carbon, oxygen-to-carbon,and sulfur-to-carbon migration (e.g., the Stevens rearrangement, and theWittig rearrangement), boron-to-carbon migrations (e.g., conversion ofboranes to alcohols (primary or otherwise), conversion of boranes toaldehydes, conversion of boranes to carboxylic acids, conversion ofvinylic boranes to alkenes, formation of alkynes from boranes andacetylides, formation of alkenes from boranes and acetylides, andformation of ketones from boranes and acetylides), electrocyclicrearrangements (e.g., of cyclobutenes and 1,3-cyclohexadienes, orconversion of stilbenes to phenanthrenes), sigmatropic rearrangements(e.g., (1,j) sigmatropic migrations of hydrogen, (1,j) sigmatropicmigrations of carbon, conversion of vinylcyclopropanes to cyclopentenes,the Cope rearrangement, the Claisen rearrangement, the Fischer indolesynthesis, (2,3) sigmatropic rearrangements, and the benzidinerearrangement), other cyclic rearrangements (e.g., metathesis ofalkenes, the di-7-methane and related rearrangements, and theHofmann-Löffler and related reactions), and non-cyclic rearrangements(e.g., hydride shifts, the Chapman rearrangement, the Wallachrearrangement, and dyotropic rearrangements).

Oxidative and reductive reactions may also be performed usingnucleotide-templated chemistry. Exemplary reactions may involve, forexample, direct electron transfer, hydride transfer, hydrogen-atomtransfer, formation of ester intermediates, displacement mechanisms, oraddition-elimination mechanisms. Exemplary oxidations include, forexample, eliminations of hydrogen (e.g., aromatization of six-memberedrings, dehydrogenations yielding carbon-carbon double bonds, oxidationor dehydrogenation of alcohols to aldehydes and ketones, oxidation ofphenols and aromatic amines to quinones, oxidative cleavage of ketones,oxidative cleavage of aldehydes, oxidative cleavage of alcohols,ozonolysis, oxidative cleavage of double bonds and aromatic rings,oxidation of aromatic side chains, oxidative decarboxylation, andbisdecarboxylation), reactions involving replacement of hydrogen byoxygen (e.g., oxidation of methylene to carbonyl, oxidation of methyleneto OH, CO₂R, or OR, oxidation of arylmethanes, oxidation of ethers tocarboxylic esters and related reactions, oxidation of aromatichydrocarbons to quinones, oxidation of amines or nitro compounds toaldehydes, ketones, or dihalides, oxidation of primary alcohols tocarboxylic acids or carboxylic esters, oxidation of alkenes to aldehydesor ketones, oxidation of amines to nitroso compounds and hydroxylamines,oxidation of primary amines, oximes, azides, isocyanates, or notrosocompounds, to nitro compounds, oxidation of thiols and other sulfurcompounds to sulfonic acids), reactions in which oxygen is added to thesubtrate (e.g., oxidation of alkynes to a-diketones, oxidation oftertiary amines to amine oxides, oxidation of thioesters to sulfoxidesand sulfones, and oxidation of carboxylic acids to peroxy acids), andoxidative coupling reactions (e.g., coupling involving carbanoins,dimerization of silyl enol ethers or of lithium enolates, and oxidationof thiols to disulfides).

Exemplary reductive reactions include, for example, reactions involvingreplacement of oxygen by hydrogen (e.g., reduction of carbonyl tomethylene in aldehydes and ketones, reduction of carboxylic acids toalcohols, reduction of amides to amines, reduction of carboxylic estersto ethers, reduction of cyclic anhydrides to lactones and acidderivatives to alcohols, reduction of carboxylic esters to alcohols,reduction of carboxylic acids and esters to alkanes, complete reductionof epoxides, reduction of nitro compounds to amines, reduction of nitrocompounds to hydroxylamines, reduction of nitroso compounds andhydroxylamines to amines, reduction of oximes to primary amines oraziridines, reduction of azides to primary amines, reduction of nitrogencompounds, and reduction of sulfonyl halides and sulfonic acids tothiols), removal of oxygen from the substrate (e.g., reduction of amineoxides and azoxy compounds, reduction of sulfoxides and sulfones,reduction of hydroperoxides and peroxides, and reduction of aliphaticnitro compounds to oximes or nitriles), reductions that include cleavage(e.g., de-alkylation of amines and amides, reduction of azo, azoxy, andhydrazo compounds to amines, and reduction of disulfides to thiols),reductive couplic reactions (e.g., bimolecular reduction of aldehydesand ketones to 1,2-diols, bimolecular reduction of aldehydes or ketonesto alkenes, acyloin ester condensation, reduction of nitro to azoxycompounds, and reduction of nitro to azo compounds), and reductions inwhich an organic substrate is both oxidized and reduced (e.g., theCannizzaro reaction, the Tishchenko reaction, the Pummererrearrangement, and the Willgerodt reaction).

(vi) Stereoselectivity

The chiral nature of nucleic acids raises the possibility that nucleicacid-templated synthesis can proceed stereoselectively without theassistance of chiral groups beyond those present in the nucleic acid,thereby transferring not only sequence but also stereochemicalinformation from the template to the product. Previous studies havedemonstrated that the chirality of nucleic acid templates can induce apreference for the template-directed ligation of (D)-nucleotides over(L)-nucleotides (Kozlov et al. (2000) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 39:4292-4295; Bolli et al. (1997) A. CHEM. BIOL. 4: 309-320).

During nucleic acid-templated synthesis it is possible to transfer thechirality of a nucleic acid template transfer unit, catalyst or acombination of the foregoing to reaction products that do not resemblethe nucleic acid backbone. In some embodiments, the reactive unit with achiral center is associated with the template and the reactive unitassociated with the transfer unit is achiral, while in otherembodiments, the transfer unit's reactive unit is chiral and thetemplate's reactive unit is achiral. Alternatively, both reactive unitscan possess chiral centers. In each of these cases, the chirality of thetemplate directs which of the chiral reactive unit's stereoisomersreacts preferentially (i.e., with a higher rate constant) with the otherreactive unit.

Useful template architectures include the H type, E type, Ω type and Ttype architecture. One or more template or transfer unit nucleotides maybe replaced with non-nucleotide linkers, however, replacement of thenucleotides nearest the reactive units may result in loss ofstereoselectivity. Preferably, 5 or more consecutive aromaticnucleotides are adjacent to the reactive units, and more preferably 6 ormore consecutive aromatic nucleotides are adjacent to the reactiveunits.

At high salt concentrations, double-stranded DNA sequences rich in(5-Me-C)G repeats can adopt a left-handed helix (Z-form) rather than theusual right-handed helix (B-form). During DNA-templated synthesis,template-transfer unit complexes in the Z-form cause preferentialreaction with one stereoisomer of a reactive unit, whiletemplate-transfer unit complexes in the B-form cause preferentialreaction with the other stereoisomer of a reactive unit. Therefore, insome embodiments, a high concentration (e.g., at least 2.5 M, or atleast 5 M) of a salt, such as, for example, sodium chloride (NaCl) orsodium sulfate (Na₂SO₄) is used during DNA-templated synthesis. In otherembodiments, the concentration of salt is low (e.g., not greater than100 mM) or is not present at all. The principles of DNA-templatedstereospecific reactions are discussed in more detail in Example 6.

(vii) Otherwise Incompatible Reactions

It has been discovered that during nucleic acid-templated synthesis,oligonucleotides can simultaneously direct several different types ofsynthetic reactions within the same solution, even though the reactantsinvolved would be cross-reactive and therefore incompatible undertraditional synthesis conditions (see, Example 7). As a result, nucleicacid-templated synthesis permits one-pot diversification of syntheticlibrary precursors into products of multiple reaction types.

In one embodiment, one or more templates associated with a singlereactive unit are exposed to two or more transfer units, each associatedwith a different reagent that is capable of reacting with the templatesreactive unit. In other embodiments, one or more transfer unitsassociated with a single reagent are exposed to two or more templates,each associated with a different reactive unit that is capable ofreacting with the reagent. Under the conditions of nucleicacid-templated synthesis, it is possible to have in a single solutionmultiple reactive units (attached to the template and/or the transferunits) that in normal synthetic reactions would cross react with oneanother. The nucleic acid-templated chemistries described herein usevery low concentrations of reactants that because of concentrationeffects do not react with one another. It is only when the reactants arebrought together via annealing of the oligonucleotide in the transferunit to the template that their local concentrations are increased topermit a reaction occur. In some embodiments, a single accessory reagent(i.e., a reagent not linked to a nucleic acid or nucleic acid analog),such as, for example, a reducing agent, an oxidizing agent, or anactivating agent, is added to the reaction. In other embodiments, noaccessory reagent is added. In all cases, only the reactive units andreagents that are associated with complimentary oligonucleotides (i.e.,that contain complimentary codon/anti-codon sequences) react to form areaction product, demonstrating the ability of nucleic acid-templatedsynthesis to direct the selective one-pot transformation of a singlefunctional group into multiple distinct types of products.

In another embodiment, templates and transfer units are provided asdescribed above, but the template reactive units and transfer unitreagents react with one another using multiple different reaction types.In some embodiments, multiple different accessory reagents are added tothe reaction. Again, only reaction products resulting from complimentarytemplate/transfer unit sequences are formed in appreciable amounts.

In certain embodiments, multiple transfer unit reagents are capable ofreacting with each template reactive unit, and some of the transfer unitreagents can cross react with one another. Even in the presence ofseveral different cross-reactive functional groups, only reactionproducts resulting from complimentary template/transfer unit sequencesare formed in appreciable amounts. These findings indicate thatreactions of significantly different rates requiring a variety ofaccessory reagents can be directed by nucleic acid-templated synthesisin the same solution, even when both templates and reagents containseveral different cross-reactive functional groups. The ability ofnucleic acid templates to direct multiple reactions at concentrationsthat exclude non-templated reactions from proceeding at appreciablerates mimics, in a single solution, a spatially separated set ofreactions.

(viii) Identification of New Chemical Reactions

In another aspect of the invention, as illustrated in FIG. 12, nucleicacid-templated synthesis can be used to discover previously unknownchemical reactions between two or more reactive units. To facilitatereaction discovery, multiple templates are synthesized, each comprisinga different reactive unit coupled to a different oligonucleotide. Eachtemplate oligonucleotide contains a coding region, which identifies thereactive unit attached to the template, and an annealing region. In someembodiments, other sequences are included in the templateoligonucleotide, including, for example, PCR primer sites. Multipletransfer units are also prepared, each comprising a different reagentcoupled to a different oligonucleotide.

To test for new bond-forming reactions, one or more templates arecombined with one or more transfer units under conditions that allow forhybridization of the transfer units to the templates. In someembodiments, non-DNA linked accessory molecules are added to thereaction, such as, for example, an activating agent or a catalyst. Inother embodiments, reaction conditions, including, for example, reactionduration, temperature, solvent, and pH, are varied to select reactionsthat proceed at different rates and under different conditions.

The crude reaction mixture then is selected for particular reactionproducts. The reaction products preferably still are associated withtheir respective templates whose nucleotide sequence encodes the bondforming reactions that produced the reaction products. In someembodiments, the transfer unit is coupled to a capturable molecule, suchas, for example, biotin. Following creation and selection of thereaction products the associated templates can be selected by capturingthe biotin by streptavidin. In one embodiment, the streptavidin isimmobilized to a solid support, for example, by linkage to a magneticbead. The selected templates then are amplified by PCR and subjected toDNA sequencing to determine the identities of the reactive unit and thereagent. In another embodiment, the reactions revealed by the aboveapproach are characterized in a non-DNA-templated format in both aqueousand organic solvents using traditional reaction analysis methodsincluding, for example, thin-layer chromatography, NMR, HPLC, and massspectroscopy.

It is theoretically possible that some of the reactions discovered willrequire some aspect of the DNA template to proceed efficiently. However,the vast majority, if not all, of the reactions discovered in thissystem will take place in the absence of DNA template when performed attypical non-DNA-templated synthesis concentrations (e.g., about 0.1 M).Reactions discovered in this manner also are naturally well-suited forDNA-templated small molecule library synthesis. An illustrative exampleof this embodiment appears in Example 12, describing the discovery of anew palladium-mediated coupling reaction between a terminal alkyne and asimple alkene.

(ix) Preparing Product Libraries

A major practical difference between traditional and nucleicacid-templated library synthesis is the scale of each manipulation. Dueto the amounts of material needed for screening and compoundidentification, traditional combinatorial syntheses typically proceed onthe nmol-μmol scale per library member. In contrast, nucleicacid-templated library synthesis can take place on the fmol-pmol scalebecause only minute quantities (e.g., about 10⁻²⁰ mol) of each nucleicacid-linked synthetic molecule are needed for selection and PCRamplification. This vast difference in scale, combined with thesingle-solution format of the nucleic acid-templated libraries,simplifies significantly the preparation of materials required fornucleic acid-templated library syntheses.

Libraries can be produced via the template mediated syntheses describedherein. For example, the template may comprise one or more reactiveunits (for example, scaffold molecules). However, in each case thetemplate contains a coding sequence that identifies the particularreactive unit associated with the oligonucleotide. A library oftemplates is initially subjected to one or more nucleic acid-templatedbond formation reactions using reagents attached to decodingoligonucleotides through a linker as described above. Depending upon thecircumstances, the template library can be subjected to multipleiterations of bond formation reactions, wherein each intermediateproduct is purified before the subsequent round of reactions. In othercircumstances, the intermediate products are not purified betweenreaction iterations. Preferably less than 20 bond forming reactions arerequired to create a library. In other embodiments, less than 10 bondforming reaction steps are needed, and more preferably, between 3 and 7steps are needed to create a full library.

After the final round of nucleic acid-templated bond formation reactionshas been performed accessory reagents can be added to protect exposedreactive functional groups on the reaction product, if necessary. Insome embodiments, accessory reagents are added to initiate a subsequentreaction with the reaction product, such as, for example, a cyclizationreaction. The resulting library of reaction products attached totemplate oligonucleotides then are purified and/or selected as discussedherein. As would be appreciated by one skilled in this art, libraries ofsmall molecules or polymers can be synthesized using the principlesdiscussed herein.

Using similar approaches, it is possible to create a library ofnon-natural polymers from a library of template oligonucleotides thatare not initially associated with a reactive unit. In this case, thetemplate encodes two or more codons which when annealed to correspondinganti-codons attached to monomer units bring together the monomer unitsin a sequence specific manner. The transfer units then are allowed tocontact the template under conditions that permit hybridization of theanti-codons on each transfer unit to the complementary codon on thetemplate. Polymerization of the monomer units along the template thenproduces the polymer. The polymerization may be step-by step or may beessentially simultaneous with the chain being formed in one largereaction with one reaction between adjacent monomers leading to theattachment of the next monomer. In some embodiments, the functionalgroup or groups of each monomer are protected, and must be deprotectedprior to polymerization. The newly synthesized polymer can then becleaved from the anti-codons and the template, and selected for adesired activity or characteristic, as described herein. DNA-templatedpolymer synthesis reactions are described in more detail in Example 9Aand 9C.

IV. Selection and Screening

Selection and/or screening for reaction products with desired activities(such as catalytic activity, binding affinity, or a particular effect inan activity assay) may be performed according to any standard protocol.For example, affinity selections may be performed according to theprinciples used in library-based selection methods such as phagedisplay, polysome display, and mRNA-fusion protein displayed peptides.Selection for catalytic activity may be performed by affinity selectionson transition-state analog affinity columns (Baca et al. (1997) PROC.NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA 94(19): 10063-8) or by function-based selectionschemes (Pedersen et al. (1998) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA 95(18):10523-8). Since minute quantities of DNA (˜10⁻²⁰ mol) can be amplifiedby PCR (Kramer et al.(I 999) CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY (ed.Ausubel, F. M.) 15.1-15.3, Wiley), these selections can be conducted ona scale ten or more orders of magnitude less than that required forreaction analysis by current methods, making a truly broad search botheconomical and efficient.

(i) Selection for Binding to Target Molecule

The templates and reaction products can be selected (or screened) forbinding to a target molecule. In this context, selection or partitioningmeans any process whereby a library member bound to a target molecule isseparated from library members not bound to target molecules. Selectioncan be accomplished by various methods known in the art.

The templates of the present invention contain a built-in function fordirect selection and amplification. In most applications, binding to atarget molecule preferably is selective, such that the template and theresulting reaction product bind preferentially with a specific targetmolecule, perhaps preventing or inducing a specific biological effect.Ultimately, a binding molecule identified using the present inventionmay be useful as a therapeutic and/or diagnostic agent. Once theselection is complete, the selected templates optionally can beamplified and sequenced. The selected reaction products, if present insufficient quantity, can be separated from the templates, purified(e.g., by HPLC, column chromatography, or other chromatographic method),and further characterized.

(ii) Target Molecules

Binding assays provide a rapid means for isolating and identifyingreaction products that bind to, for example, a surface (such as metal,plastic, composite, glass, ceramics, rubber, skin, or tissue); apolymer; a catalyst; or a target biomolecule such as a nucleic acid, aprotein (including enzymes, receptors, antibodies, and glycoproteins), asignal molecule (such as cAMP, inositol triphosphate, peptides, orprostaglandins), a carbohydrate, or a lipid. Binding assays can beadvantageously combined with activity assays for the effect of areaction product on a function of a target molecule.

The selection strategy can be carried out to allow selection againstalmost any target. Importantly, the selection strategy does not requireany detailed structural information about the target molecule or aboutthe molecules in the libraries. The entire process is driven by thebinding affinity involved in the specific recognition and binding of themolecules in the library to a given target. Examples of variousselection procedures are described below.

The libraries of the present invention can contain molecules that couldpotentially bind to any known or unknown target. The binding region of atarget molecule could include a catalytic site of an enzyme, a bindingpocket on a receptor (for example, a G-protein coupled receptor), aprotein surface area involved in a protein-protein or protein-nucleicacid interaction (preferably a hot-spot region), or a specific site onDNA (such as the major groove). The natural function of the target couldbe stimulated (agonized), reduced (antagonized), unaffected, orcompletely changed by the binding of the reaction product. This willdepend on the precise binding mode and the particular binding site thereaction product occupies on the target.

Functional sites (such as protein-protein interaction or catalyticsites) on proteins often are more prone to bind molecules than are othermore neutral surface areas on a protein. In addition, these functionalsites normally contain a smaller region that seems to be primarilyresponsible for the binding energy: the so-called 'shot-spotregions“(Wells, et al.(1993) RECENT PROG. HORMONE RES. 48: 253-262).This phenomenon facilitates selection for molecules affecting thebiological function of a certain target.

The linkage between the template molecule and reaction product allowsrapid identification of binding molecules using various selectionstrategies. This invention broadly permits identifying binding moleculesfor any known target molecule. In addition, novel unknown targets can bediscovered by isolating binding molecules against unknown antigens(epitopes) and using these binding molecules for identification andvalidation. In another preferred embodiment, the target molecule isdesigned to mimic a transition state of a chemical reaction; one or morereaction products resulting from the selection may stabilize thetransition state and catalyze the chemical reaction.

(iii) Binding Assays

The template-directed synthesis of the invention permits selectionprocedures analogous to other display methods such as phage display(Smith (1985) SCIENCE 228: 1315-1317). Phage display selection has beenused successfully on peptides (Wells et al. (1992) CURR. OP. STRUCT.BIOL. 2: 597-604), proteins (Marks et al.(1992) J. BIOL. CHEM. 267:16007-16010) and antibodies (Winter et al. (1994) ANNU. REV. IMMUNOL.12: 433-455). Similar selection procedures also are exploited for othertypes of display systems such as ribosome display Mattheakis etal.(1994) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. 91: 9022-9026) and mRNA display(Roberts, et al. (1997) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. 94:12297-302). Thelibraries of the present invention, however, allow direct selection oftarget-specific molecules without requiring traditionalribosome-mediated translation. The present invention also allows thedisplay of small molecules which have not previously been synthesizeddirectly from a nucleic acid template.

Selection of binding molecules from a library can be performed in anyformat to identify optimal binding molecules. Binding selectionstypically involve immobilizing the desired target molecule, adding alibrary of potential binders, and removing non-binders by washing. Whenthe molecules showing low affinity for an immobilized target are washedaway, the molecules with a stronger affinity generally remain attachedto the target. The enriched population remaining bound to the targetafter stringent washing is preferably eluted with, for example, acid,chaotropic salts, heat, competitive elution with a known ligand or byproteolytic release of the target and/or of template molecules. Theeluted templates are suitable for PCR, leading to many orders ofamplification, whereby essentially each selected template becomesavailable at a greatly increased copy number for cloning, sequencing,and/or further enrichment or diversification.

In a binding assay, when the concentration of ligand is much less thanthat of the target (as it would be during the selection of aDNA-templated library), the fraction of ligand bound to target isdetermined by the effective concentration of the target protein (see,FIG. 10). The fraction of ligand bound to target is a sigmoidal functionof the concentration of target, with the midpoint (50% bound) at[target]=K_(d) of the ligand-target complex. This relationship indicatesthat the stringency of a specific selection—the minimum ligand affinityrequired to remain bound to the target during the selection—isdetermined by the target concentration. Therefore, selection stringencyis controllable by varying the effective concentration of target.

The target molecule (peptide, protein, DNA or other antigen) can beimmobilized on a solid support, for example, a container wall, a wall ofa microtiter plate well. The library preferably is dissolved in aqueousbinding buffer in one pot and equilibrated in the presence ofimmobilized target molecule. Non-binders are washed away with buffer.Those molecules that may be binding to the target molecule through theirattached DNA templates rather than through their synthetic moieties canbe eliminated by washing the bound library with unfunctionalizedtemplates lacking PCR primer binding sites. Remaining bound librarymembers then can be eluted, for example, by denaturation.

Alternatively, the target molecule can be immobilized on beads,particularly if there is doubt that the target molecule will adsorbsufficiently to a container wall, as may be the case for an unfoldedtarget eluted from an SDS-PAGE gel. The derivatized beads can then beused to separate high-affinity library members from nonbinders by simplysedimenting the beads in a benchtop centrifuge. Alternatively, the beadscan be used to make an affinity column. In such cases, the library ispassed through the column one or more times to permit binding. Thecolumn then is washed to remove nonbinding library members. Magneticbeads are essentially a variant on the above; the target is attached tomagnetic beads which are then used in the selection.

There are many reactive matrices available for immobilizing the targetmolecule, including matrices bearing —NH₂ groups or —SH groups. Thetarget molecule can be immobilized by conjugation with NHS ester ormaleimide groups covalently linked to Sepharose beads and the integrityof known properties of the target molecule can be verified. Activatedbeads are available with attachment sites for —NH₂ or —COOH groups(which can be used for coupling). Alternatively, the target molecule isblotted onto nitrocellulose or PVDF. When using a blotting strategy, theblot should be blocked (e.g., with BSA or similar protein) afterimmobilization of the target to prevent nonspecific binding of librarymembers to the blot.

Library members that bind a target molecule can be released bydenaturation, acid, or chaotropic salts. Alternatively, elutionconditions can be more specific to reduce background or to select for adesired specificity. Elution can be accomplished using proteolysis tocleave a linker between the target molecule and the immobilizing surfaceor between the reaction product and the template. Also, elution can beaccomplished by competition with a known competitive ligand for thetarget molecule. Alternatively, a PCR reaction can be performed directlyin the presence of the washed target molecules at the end of theselection procedure. Thus, the binding molecules need not be elutablefrom the target to be selectable since only the template is needed forfurther amplification or cloning, not the reaction product itself.Indeed, some target molecules bind the most avid ligands so tightly thatelution would be difficult.

To select for a molecule that binds a protein expressible on a cellsurface, such as an ion channel or a transmembrane receptor, the cellsthemselves can be used as the selection agent. The library preferably isfirst exposed to cells not expressing the target molecule on theirsurfaces to remove library members that bind specifically or nonspecifically to other cell surface epitopes. Alternatively, cellslacking the target molecule are present in large excess in the selectionprocess and separable (by fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS),for example) from cells bearing the target molecule. In either method,cells bearing the target molecule then are used to isolate librarymembers bearing the target molecule (e.g., by sedimenting the cells orby FACS sorting). For example, a recombinant DNA encoding the targetmolecule can be introduced into a cell line; library members that bindthe transformed cells but not the untransformed cells are enriched fortarget molecule binders. This approach is also called subtractionselection and has successfully been used for phage display on antibodylibraries (Hoogenboom et al.(1998) IMMUNOTECH 4: 1-20).

A selection procedure can also involve selection for binding to cellsurface receptors that are internalized so that the receptor togetherwith the selected binding molecule passes into the cytoplasm, nucleus,or other cellular compartment, such as the Golgi or lysosomes. Dependingon the dissociation rate constant for specific selected bindingmolecules, these molecules may localize primarily within theintracellular compartments. Internalized library members can bedistinguished from molecules attached to the cell surface by washing thecells, preferably with a denaturant. More preferably, standardsubcellular fractionation techniques are used to isolate the selectedlibrary members in a desired subcellular compartment.

An alternative selection protocol also includes a known, weak ligandaffixed to each member of the library. The known ligand guides theselection by interacting with a defined part of the target molecule andfocuses the selection on molecules that bind to the same region,providing a cooperative effect. This can be particularly useful forincreasing the affinity of a ligand with a desired biological functionbut with too low a potency.

Other methods for selection or partitioning are also available for usewith the present invention. These include, for example:immunoprecipitation (direct or indirect) where the target molecule iscaptured together with library members; mobility shift assays in agaroseor polyacrylamide gels, where the selected library members migrate withthe target molecule in a gel; cesium chloride gradient centrifugation toisolate the target molecule with library members; mass spectroscopy toidentify target molecules labeled with library members. In general, anymethod where the library member/target molecule complex can be separatedfrom library members not bound to the target is useful.

The selection process is well suited for optimizations, where theselection steps are made in series, starting with the selection ofbinding molecules and ending with an optimized binding molecule. Theprocedures in each step can be automated using various robotic systems.Thus, the invention permits supplying a suitable library and targetmolecule to a fully automatic system which finally generates anoptimized binding molecule. Under ideal conditions, this process shouldrun without any requirement for external work outside the robotic systemduring the entire procedure.

The selection methods of the present invention can be combined withsecondary selection or screening to identify reaction products capableof modifying target molecule function upon binding. Thus, the methodsdescribed herein can be employed to isolate or produce binding moleculesthat bind to and modify the function of any protein or nucleic acid. Forexample, nucleic acid-templated chemistry can be used to identify,isolate, or produce binding molecules (1) affecting catalytic activityof target enzymes by inhibiting catalysis or modifying substratebinding; (2) affecting the functionality of protein receptors, byinhibiting binding to receptors or by modifying the specificity ofbinding to receptors; (3) affecting the formation of protein multimersby disrupting the quaternary structure of protein subunits; or (4)modifying transport properties of a protein by disrupting transport ofsmall molecules or ions.

Functional assays can be included in the selection process. For example,after selecting for binding activity, selected library members can bedirectly tested for a desired functional effect, such as an effect oncell signaling. This can, for example, be performed via FACSmethodologies.

The binding molecules of the invention can be selected for otherproperties in addition to binding. For example, to select for stabilityof binding interactions in a desired working environment. If stabilityin the presence of a certain protease is desired, that protease can bepart of the buffer medium used during selection. Similarly, theselection can be performed in serum or cell extracts or in any type ofmedium, aqueous or organic. Conditions that disrupt or degrade thetemplate should however be avoided to allow subsequent amplification.

(iv) Other Selections

Selections for other desired properties, such as catalytic or otherfunctional activities, can also be performed. Generally, the selectionshould be designed such that library members with the desired activityare isolatable on that basis from other library members. For example,library members can be screened for the ability to fold or otherwisesignificantly change conformation in the presence of a target molecule,such as a metal ion, or under particular pH or salinity conditions. Thefolded library members can be isolated by performing non-denaturing gelelectrophoresis under the conditions of interest. The folded librarymembers migrate to a different position in the gel and can subsequentlybe extracted from the gel and isolated.

Similarly, reaction products that fluoresce in the presence of specificligands may be selected by FACS based sorting of translated polymerslinked through their DNA templates to beads. Those beads that fluorescein the presence, but not in the absence, of the target ligand areisolated and characterized. Useful beads with a homogenous population ofnucleic acid-templates on any bead can be prepared using the split-poolsynthesis technique on the bead, such that each bead is exposed to onlya single nucleotide sequence. Alternatively, a different anti-template(each complementary to only a single, different template) can bysynthesized on beads using a split-pool technique, and then can annealto capture a solution-phase library.

Biotin-terminated biopolymers can be selected for the actual catalysisof bond-breaking reactions by passing these biopolymers over a resinlinked through a substrate to avidin (FIG. 11A). Those biopolymers thatcatalyze substrate cleavage self-elute from a column charged with thisresin. Similarly, biotin-terminated biopolymers can be selected for thecatalysis of bond-forming reactions (see, FIG. 11B). One substrate islinked to resin and the second substrate is linked to avidin.Biopolymers that catalyze bond formation between the substrates areselected by their ability to react the substrates together, resulting inattachment of the biopolymer to the resin.

Library members can also be selected for their catalytic effects onsynthesis of a polymer to which the template is or becomes attached. Forexample, the library member may influence the selection of monomer unitsto be polymerized as well as how the polymerization reaction takes place(e.g., stereochemistry, tacticity, activity). The synthesized polymerscan be selected for specific properties, such as, molecular weight,density, hydrophobicity, tacticity, stereoselectivity, using standardtechniques, such as, electrophoresis, gel filtration, centrifugalsedimentation, or partitioning into solvents of differenthydrophobicities. The attached template that directed the synthesis ofthe polymer can then be identified.

Library members that catalyze virtually any reaction causing bondformation between two substrate molecules or resulting in bond breakageinto two product molecules can be selected using the schemes proposed inFIGS. 12 and 13. To select for bond forming catalysts (for example,hetero Diels-Alder, Heck coupling, aldol reaction, or olefin metathesiscatalysts), library members are covalently linked to one substratethrough their 5′ amino or thiol termini. The other substrate of thereaction is synthesized as a derivative linked to biotin. When dilutesolutions of library-substrate conjugate are combined with thesubstrate-biotin conjugate, those library members that catalyze bondformation cause the biotin group to become covalently attached tothemselves. Active bond forming catalysts can then be separated frominactive library members by capturing the former with immobilizedstreptavidin and washing away inactive library members (FIG. 12).

In an analogous manner, library members that catalyze bond cleavagereactions such as retro-aldol reactions, amide hydrolysis, eliminationreactions, or olefin dihydroxylation followed by periodate cleavage canbe selected. In this case, library members are covalently linked tobiotinylated substrates such that the bond breakage reaction causes thedisconnection of the biotin moiety from the library members (FIG. 13).Upon incubation under reaction conditions, active catalysts, but notinactive library members, induce the loss of their biotin groups.Streptavidin-linked beads can then be used to capture inactive polymers,while active catalysts are able to be eluted from the beads. Relatedbond formation and bond cleavage selections have been used successfullyin catalytic RNA and DNA evolution (Jäschke et al. (2000) CURR. OPIN.CHEM. BIOL. 4: 257-62) Although these selections do not explicitlyselect for multiple turnover catalysis, RNAs and DNAs selected in thismanner have in general proven to be multiple turnover catalysts whenseparated from their substrate moieties (Jäschke et al. (2000) CURR.OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 4: 257-62; Jaeger et al.(1999) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI.USA 96: 14712-7; Bartel et al.(1993) SCIENCE 261: 1411-8; Sen etal.(I998) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 2: 680-7).

In addition to simply evolving active catalysts, the in vitro selectionsdescribed above are used to evolve non-natural polymer libraries inpowerful directions difficult to achieve using other catalyst discoveryapproaches. Substrate specificity among catalysts can be selected byselecting for active catalysts in the presence of the desired substrateand then selecting for inactive catalysts in the presence of one or moreundesired substrates. If the desired and undesired substrates differ bytheir configuration at one or more stereocenters, enantioselective ordiastereoselective catalysts can emerge from rounds of selection.Similarly, metal selectivity can be evolved by selecting for activecatalysts in the presence of desired metals and selecting for inactivecatalysts in the presence of undesired metals. Conversely, catalystswith broad substrate tolerance can be evolved by varying substratestructures between successive rounds of selection.

(v) Iterative Selection

Iterating a selection by loading eluant from a first selection into asecond selection multiplies the net enrichment. No interveningamplification of template is required. For example, a selection forbinding to carbonic anhydrase beads permitted a 330-fold enrichment of aligand. Application of the eluant directly to fresh carbonic anhydrasebeads (see, Example 11) enriched the template encoding the carbonicanhydrase ligand ≧10,000-fold. Where the selection was repeated a thirdtime, a 5,000,000-fold net enrichment of the ligand was observed. Thisresult indicates that iterating library selections can lead to verylarge enrichments of desired molecules. In certain embodiments, a firstround of selection provides at least a 50-fold increase in the number ofbinding ligands. Preferably, the increase in enrichments is over100-fold, more preferably over 1,000 fold, and even more preferably over100,000-fold. Subsequent rounds of selection may further increase theenrichment 100-fold over the original library, preferably 1,000-fold,more preferably over 100,000-fold, and most preferably over1,000,000-fold.

Alternatively, following PCR amplification of DNA templates encodingselected synthetic molecules, additional rounds of translation,selection, and amplification can be conducted to enrich the library forhigh affinity binders. The stringency of the selection is graduallyincreased by increasing the salt concentration of the binding andwashing buffers, decreasing the duration of binding, elevating thebinding and washing temperatures, and increasing the concentration ofwashing additives such as template DNA or unrelated proteins.

Importantly, in vitro selections can also select for specificity inaddition to binding affinity. Library screening methods for bindingspecificity typically require duplicating the entire screen for eachtarget or non-target of interest. In contrast, selections forspecificity can be performed in a single experiment by selecting fortarget binding as well as for the inability to bind one or morenon-targets. Thus, the library can be pre-depleted by removing librarymembers that bind to a non-target. Alternatively, or in addition,selection for binding to the target molecule can be performed in thepresence of an excess of one or more non-targets, as described inExample 11. To maximize specificity, the non-target can be a homologousmolecule. If the target molecule is a protein, appropriate non-targetproteins include, for example, a generally promiscuous protein such asan albumin. If the binding assay is designed to target only a specificportion of a target molecule, the non-target can be a variation on themolecule in which that portion has been changed or removed.

(vi) Amplification and Sequencing

Once all rounds of selection are complete, the templates which are, orformerly were, associated with the selected reaction product preferablyare amplified using any suitable technique to facilitate sequencing orother subsequent manipulation of the templates. Natural oligonucleotidescan be amplified by any state of the art method. These methods include,for example, polymerase chain reaction (PCR); nucleic acidsequence-based amplification (see, for example, Compton (1991) NATURE350: 91-92), amplified anti-sense RNA (see, for example, van Gelder etal. (1988) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA

5: 77652-77656); self-sustained sequence replication systems (Gnatelliet al. (1990) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA

7: 1874-1878); polymerase-independent amplification (see, for example,Schmidt et al. (1997) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 25: 4797-4802, and in vivoamplification of plasmids carrying cloned DNA fragments. Descriptions ofPCR methods are found, for example, in Saiki et al.(1985) SCIENCE 230:1350-1354; Scharf et al. (1986) SCIENCE 233: 1076-1078; and in U.S. Pat.No. 4,683,202. Ligase-mediated amplification methods such as LigaseChain Reaction (LCR) may also be used. In general, any means allowingfaithful, efficient amplification of selected nucleic acid sequences canbe employed in the method of the present invention. It is preferable,although not necessary, that the proportionate representations of thesequences after amplification reflect the relative proportions ofsequences in the mixture before amplification.

For non-natural nucleotides the choices of efficient amplificationprocedures are fewer. As non-natural nucleotides can be incorporated bycertain enzymes including polymerases it will be possible to performmanual polymerase chain reaction by adding the polymerase during eachextension cycle.

For oligonucleotides containing nucleotide analogs, fewer methods foramplification exist. One may use non-enzyme mediated amplificationschemes (Schmidt et al. (1997) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 25: 4797-4802). Forbackbone-modified oligonucleotides such as PNA and LNA, thisamplification method may be used. Alternatively, standard PCR can beused to amplify a DNA from a PNA or LNA oligonucleotide template. Beforeor during amplification the templates or complementing templates may bemutagenized or recombined in order to create an evolved library for thenext round of selection or screening.

(vii) Sequence Determination

Sequencing can be done by a standard dideoxy chain termination method,or by chemical sequencing, for example, using the Maxam-Gilbertsequencing procedure. Alternatively, the sequence of the template (or,if a long template is used, the variable portion(s) thereof) can bedetermined by hybridization to a chip (see, Example 12). For example, asingle-stranded template molecule associated with a detectable moietysuch as a fluorescent moiety is exposed to a chip bearing a large numberof clonal populations of single-stranded nucleic acids or nucleic acidanalogs of known sequence, each clonal population being present at aparticular addressable location on the chip. The template sequences arepermitted to anneal to the chip sequences. The position of thedetectable moieties on the chip then is determined. Based upon thelocation of the detectable moiety and the immobilized sequence at thatlocation, the sequence of the template can be determined. It iscontemplated that large numbers of such oligonucleotides can beimmobilized in an array on a chip or other solid support.

(viii) Diversification

Inventive libraries can be evolved by introducing mutations at the DNAlevel, for example, using error-prone PCR (Cadwell et al. (1992) PCRMETHODS APPL. 2: 28) or by subjecting the DNA to in vitro homologousrecombination (Stemmer (1994) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA

1: 10747; Stemmer (1994) NATURE 370: 389).

Small molecule evolution using mutation and recombination offers twopotential advantages over simple enrichment. If the total diversity ofthe library is much less than the number of molecules made (typically10¹² to 10¹⁵), every possible library member is present at the start ofthe selection. In this case, diversification is still useful becauseselection conditions can change as rounds of evolution progress. Forexample, later rounds of selection can be conducted under higherstringencies and can involve counterselections against binding tonon-target molecules. Diversification gives library members that havebeen discarded during earlier rounds of selection the chance to reappearin later rounds under altered selection conditions in which theirfitness relative to other members may be greater. In addition, it isquite possible to generate a synthetic library that has a theoreticaldiversity greater than 10¹⁵ molecules. In this case, diversificationallows molecules that never existed in the original library to emerge inlater rounds of selections on the basis of their similarity to selectedmolecules, similar to the way in which protein evolution searches thevastness of protein sequence space one small subset at a time.

(viii)(a) Error-Prone PCR

Random point mutagenesis is performed by conducting the PCRamplification step under error-prone PCR (Cadwell et al. (1992) PCRMETHODS APPLIC. 2: 28-33) conditions. Because the genetic code of thesemolecules are written to assign related codons to related chemicalgroups, similar to the way that the natural protein genetic code isconstructed, random point mutations in the templates encoding selectedmolecules will diversify progeny towards chemically related analogs.Because error-prone PCR is inherently less efficient than normal PCR,error-prone PCR diversification is preferably conducted with onlynatural dATP, dTTP, dCTP, and dGTP and using primers that lack chemicalhandles or biotin groups.

(viii)(b) Recombination

Libraries may be diversified using recombination. For example, templatesto be recombined may have the structure shown in FIG. 14, in whichcodons are separated by five-base non-palindromic restrictionendonuclease cleavage sites such as those cleaved by AvaII (G/GWCC, W=Aor T), Sau96I (G/GNCC, N=A, G, T, or C), DdeI (C/TNAG), or HinFI(G/ANTC). Following selections, templates encoding desired molecules areenzymatically digested with these commercially available restrictionenzymes. The digested fragments then are recombined into intacttemplates with T4 DNA ligase. Because the restriction sites separatingcodons are nonpalindromic, template fragments can only reassemble toform intact recombined templates (FIG. 14). DNA-templated translation ofrecombined templates provides recombined small molecules. In this way,functional groups between synthetic small molecules with desiredactivities are recombined in a manner analogous to the recombination ofamino acid residues between proteins in Nature. It is well appreciatedthat recombination explores the sequence space of a molecule much moreefficiently than point mutagenesis alone (Minshull et al. (1999) CURR.OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 3: 284-90; Bogarad et al.(1999) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI.USA 96: 2591-5; Stemmer NATURE 370: 389-391).

A preferred method of diversifying library members is throughnonhomologous random recombination, as described, for example, in WO02/074978; U.S. patent application Publication No. 2003-0027180-A1; andBittker et al. (2002) NATURE BIOTECH. 20(10): 1024-9.

(iiiv)(c) Random Cassette Mutagenesis

Random cassette mutagenesis is useful to create a diversified libraryfrom a fixed starting sequence. Thus, such a method can be used, forexample, after a library has been subjected to selection and one or morelibrary members have been isolated and sequenced. Generally, a libraryof oligonucleotides with variations on the starting sequence isgenerated by traditional chemical synthesis, error-prone PCR, or othermethods. For example, a library of oligonucleotides can be generated inwhich, for each nucleotide position in a codon, the nucleotide has a 90%probability of being identical to the starting sequence at thatposition, and a 10% probability of being different. The oligonucleotidescan be complete templates when synthesized, or can be fragments that aresubsequently ligated with other oligonucleotides to form a diverselibrary of templates.

V. Uses

The methods and compositions of the present invention represent new waysto generate molecules with desired properties. This approach marriesextremely powerful genetic methods, which molecular biologists havetaken advantage of for decades, with the flexibility and power oforganic chemistry. The ability to prepare, amplify, and evolve unnaturalpolymers by genetic selection may lead to new classes of catalysts thatpossess activity, bioavailability, stability, fluorescence,photolability, or other properties that are difficult or impossible toachieve using the limited set of building blocks found in proteins andnucleic acids. Similarly, developing new systems for preparing,amplifying, and evolving small molecules by iterated cycles of mutationand selection may lead to the isolation of novel ligands or drugs withproperties superior to those isolated by slower traditional drugdiscovery methods.

For example, unnatural biopolymers useful as artificial receptors toselectively bind molecules or as catalysts for chemical reactions can beisolated. Characterization of these molecules would provide importantinsight into the ability of polycarbamates, polyureas, polyesters,polycarbonates, polypeptides with unnatural side chain andstereochemistries, or other unnatural polymers to form secondary ortertiary structures with binding or catalytic properties.

The present invention further allows the discovery of new chemicalreactions. The field of chemistry is continually being transformed bythe discovery of new chemical reactions providing access to previouslyinaccessible molecules, allowing for expedited syntheses, and revealingnew chemical principles. Guided by predictions of reactivity based onliterature precedent, chemists typically search for a new reaction toovercome a particular shortcoming in current synthetic methodology.Until now, it has not been feasible to conduct a broad, non-biasedsearch for chemical reactivity in which a large number of diversereactants are simultaneously evaluated for their ability to react withone another under many different conditions. Both the amount of materialrequired for executing thousands of diverse reactions and the difficultyof analyzing the outcome of such an experiment makes this goalintractable using current reaction discovery approaches. A broad,non-biased search for chemical reactivity is appealing because it is notlimited by conventional wisdom or by our ability to predict functionalgroup reactivity.

The inventive method of discovering new chemical reactions and chemicalreactivity has several advantages over existing methods. For example,several groups have developed high-throughput screens to test theefficiency of a particular reaction under a variety of conditions (Kuntzet al. (1999) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 3: 313-319; Francis et al. (1998)CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 2: 422-428; Pawlas et al. (2002) J. AM. CHEM.SOC. 124: 3669-3679; Lober et al. (2001) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 123:4366-4367; Evans et al. (2002) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 6: 333-338;Taylor et al. (1998) SCIENCE 280: 267-270; and Stambuli et al. (2001) J.AM. C HEM. SOC. 123: 2677-2678); however, the screens are limited to asmall set of reaction types. Reactions have been analyzed in ahigh-throughput manner using fluorescence spectroscopy, colorimetricassay, thermographic analysis, and traditional chromatography (Dahmen etal. (2001) SYNTHESIS-STUTTGART 1431-1449 and Wennemers (2001)COMBINATORIAL CHEMISTRY & HIGH THROUGHPUT SCREENING 4: 273-285). Mosthigh-throughput screens for chemical reactivity are useful for only asmall set of reaction types because the screen depends on a particularproperty of the reaction such as the disappearance of an amine or theproduction of protons. As a result, high throughput screening methodscan be useful for discovering catalysts for a known or anticipatedreason, but are poorly suited to discover novel reactivity differentfrom a reaction of interest. A non-biased search for chemical reactionswould examine a broad range of both reaction conditions and reactants ina highly efficient manner that is practical on the scale of thousands ofdifferent reactions. The inventive method of discovering chemicalreactions offers a much greater chance of discovering unexpected andunprecedented reactivity that may lead to new insights into reactivityand to useful new reactions for chemical synthesis.

Discovering new reactions from very large and diverse collections ofreactants and conditions entails (1) a general assay for reactivity thatdoes not depend on a particular substrate or product, and (2) increasingthe overall efficiency of assaying reactions such that both reactioncondition space and reactant space can be searched extensively. Forexample, researchers evolving catalytic nucleic acids routinely selectfor bond formation catalysts by attaching one reactant to the pool ofevolving nucleic acids and linking another reactant to a handle that canbe easily immobilized such as biotin (Wilson et al. (1999) ANNU. REV.BIOCHEM. 68: 611-647; Jaschke (2001) CURR. OPIN. STRUCT. BIOL. 11:321-326; Jaschke et al. (2000) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 4: 257-262;Jaschke (2001) BIOL. CHEM. 382: 1321-1325). Active nucleic acids becomelinked to the handle and are separated from the inactive sequences.Because this type of selection does not depend on the consumption orgeneration of a specific substrate or product, the scope of reactantsthat can be tested in this type of selection is much larger than thescope of reactants that can be evaluated in current reactivity screens.

Nucleic acid-templated synthesis provides a way to use bond formationselections to discover new chemical reactivity independent of nucleicacid catalysis (Gartner et al. (2002) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 41:1796-1800; Gartner et al. (2001) supra). Nucleic acid templates candirect a wide variety of chemical reactions in a highlysequence-specific manner without any obvious requirements for reactiongeometry. By attaching reactants to appropriately designed nucleic acidsequences, it becomes possible to test thousands of unprecedentedreactions in a single pot with individual sequences encoding eachreaction. Pools of nucleic acid-linked reactants would be truly selected(not simply screened) for covalent bond formation with members of asecond nucleic acid-linked reactant pool. PCR amplification and DNAsequencing would reveal which combinations of reactants successfullyundergo bond formation.

In certain embodiments, the searchable reactions are thosetransformations that can occur in aqueous or substantially aqueousmedium. In other embodiments, the searchable reactions are limited tothose that do not degrade nucleic acids rapidly. The known chemicalrobustness of DNA suggests that a wide range of reaction conditionsspanning different temperatures, pH ranges, and additives such astransition metals are compatible with the proposed approach. ADNA-templated Heck reaction demonstrates that transition metal catalyzedreactions are viable in a DNA-templated format, consistent withextensive evidence (Patolsky et al. (2002) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 124:770-772; Weizman et al. (2002) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 124: 1568-1569; Gartneret al. (2002) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 41: 1796-1800; Czlapinski et al.(2001) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 123: 8618-8619; Homlin et al. (1998) J. AM.CHEM. SOC. 120: 9724-9725; Bashkin et al. (1994) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 116:5981-5982; Magda et al. (1994) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 116: 7439-7440; andDandliker et al. (1997) SCIENCE 275: 1465-1468) that DNA is compatiblewith many transition metal complexes, including those containing Pd, Ni,Mn, Pt, Ru, Os, Cu, Eu, and Rh. Further, the rapid increase in thenumber of known water-compatible organic reactions (Li et al. Organicreaction in aqueous media (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1997) and theinherent benefits of working in aqueous solvents suggests that water isa rich medium for discovering new reactions. Reactions discovered inthis effort may be of general utility when performed in a standardnon-nucleic acid-templated mode, and are also natural candidates for usein generating nucleic acid-templated synthetic libraries.

Nucleic acid-templated chemistry is combined with in vitro selection andPCR amplification in certain embodiments to efficiently search for novelbond-forming reactions independent of reactant structures. The abilityto select directly for covalent bond formation, the minute scalerequired for analysis, and compatibility of nucleic acids with a widevariety of reaction conditions may permit the first search forunprecedented reactivity that can examine thousands of combinations ofreactants and reaction conditions in one or several experiments.

The reaction generality and distance independence of DNA-templatedsynthesis allows for a system for discovering new chemical reactions byselection. DNA-linked reactants (i.e., templates and/or transfer units)suitable for in vitro selection for bond formation exist in one or twoforms designated pool A and pool B in FIG. 9. Each reactant in pool Bcontains a functional group being tested linked to a short segment ofbiotinylated DNA (a coding region) encoding that functional group. Eachreactant in pool A contains a functional group being tested, acorresponding coding region, and an “annealing region” or anti-codonthat complements one of the pool B coding regions. Each functional groupin pool A is linked to one of every possible annealing region. Thisarrangement allows any functional group in pool A to join any functionalgroup in pool B on the same DNA duplex, providing the opportunity forDNA-templated bond formation if the reactants are mutually reactive.Generating these two pools of DNA-linked reactants in a format suitablefor in vitro selection for bond formation requires the development ofmethods to efficiently assemble a small molecule reactant, a codingregion, and in the case of pool A, a library of annealing regions.

The inventive system is particularly useful for the identification ofsmall-molecule/target binding pairs. For instance, inventiveDNA-templated small molecule libraries may be contacted with othersolution or solid-phase libraries of potential target compounds suchthat small molecules within the inventive library that bind or interactwith one or more compounds in the target libraries are identified.Preferably, bound pairs may be identified by selection (e.g., by taggingone of the components, combined with PCR to identify the other). Incertain particularly preferred embodiments of this aspect of theinvention, the target library or libraries comprise polypeptides and/orproteins.

As described herein, the present invention also provides new modes ofnucleic acid-templated synthesis, including simultaneous incompatiblereactions and one pot multi-step ordered synthesis (e.g., incubatingthree DNA-linked amino acids and one template so that only a singletripeptide, of specified sequence, is produced). The invention alsoprovides nucleic acid-templated synthesis in organic solvents (e.g.,methylene chloride, dimethylformamide).

Yet another application of the inventive system is to identify and/orevolve new templates for nucleic acid-templated synthesis. For instance,the present invention allows identification of nucleic acid templatesthat, when contacted with reagents that are sufficient to participate ina reaction to generate a selectable product, most efficiently lead toproduction of that product.

The invention also provides information useful to inform the developmentof chemical reaction pathways. For instance, according to the presentinvention, a researcher can select from within a library of nucleicacid-templated substrates those that permit a complex chemical reactionto take place (e.g., macrocyclization, which can be selected for by, forexample, loss of a biotin leaving group). When successful reactionconditions have been identified, the inventive system allows readyidentification of participating components. Thus, new chemistries can bedeveloped without prior knowledge of the reagents and/or pathways likelyto be useful in the reaction.

VI. Kits

The present invention also provides kits and compositions for use in theinventive methods. The kits may contain any item or composition usefulin practicing the present invention. The kits may include, but are notlimited to, templates, (e.g., end-of-helix, hairpin, omega, and Tarchitectures), anticodons, transfer units, monomer units, buildingblocks, reactants, small molecule scaffolds, buffers, solvents, enzymes(e.g., heat stable polymerase, reverse transcriptase, ligase,restriction endonuclease, exonuclease, Klenow fragment, polymerase,alkaline phosphatase, polynucleotide kinase), linkers, protectinggroups, polynucleotides, nucleosides, nucleotides, salts, acids, bases,solid supports, or any combinations thereof.

A kit for preparing unnatural polymers should contain items needed toprepare unnatural polymers using the methods described herein. Such akit may include templates, anti-codons, transfer units, monomers units,or combinations thereof A kit for synthesizing small molecules mayinclude templates, anti-codons, transfer units, building blocks, smallmolecule scaffolds, or combinations thereof.

The inventive kit can also be equipped with items needed to amplifyand/or evolve a polynucleotide template such as a heat stable polymerasefor PCR, nucleotides, buffer, and primers. In certain other embodiments,the inventive kit includes items commonly used in performing DNAshuffling such as polynucleotides, ligase, and nucleotides.

In addition to the templates and transfer units described herein, thepresent invention also includes compositions comprising complex smallmolecules, scaffolds, or unnatural polymer prepared by any one or moreof the methods of the invention as described herein.

A kit for identifying new chemical reactions or functionality mayinclude template associated with reactive units (reactants), transferunits associated with reactive units (reactants), reagents, acids,bases, catalysts, solvents, biotin, avidin, avidin beads, etc. The kitcan also include reagents for generating the template associated with areactive group (e.g., biotin, polynucleotides, reactive units, Klenowfragment of DNA pol I, nucleotides, avidin beads, etc.). The kit canalso include reagents for PCR (e.g., buffers, heat stable polymerase,nucleotides, primers, etc.).

The following examples contain important additional information,exemplification and guidance that can be adapted to the practice of thisinvention in its various embodiments and equivalents thereof.

EXAMPLES

Examples 1 and 2 describe the preparation of materials for use innucleic acid-templated synthesis and describe specific syntheticreactions. Example 3 discusses multi-step synthesis. Example 4 describesthe compatibility of nucleic acid-templated synthesis with organicsolvents. Example 5 describes specific template architectures useful inthe practice of certain DNA-templated syntheses. Example 6 describesstereoselectivity in nucleic acid-templated synthesis. Example 7describes the use of DNA-templated synthesis to direct otherwiseincompatible reactions in a single solution. Example 8 describesfunctional group transformation reactions that can be carried out bynucleic acid-templated synthesis. Example 9 describes the synthesis ofexemplary compounds and libraries. Example 10 describes the use ofpolymerases to translate DNA into nonnatural polymers. Example 11describes in vitro selection protocols. Example 12 describes theapplication of DNA-templated synthesis toward the discovery of newchemical reactions.

Example 1 The Generality of DNA-Templated Synthesis

Nucleic acid-templated synthesis is extremely versatile and permits thesynthesis of a variety of chemical compounds. This Example demonstratesthat it is possible to perform DNA-templated synthesis using twodifferent DNA template architectures.

As shown in FIG. 15, templates with a hairpin (H) or end-of-helix (E)architecture bearing electrophilic maleimide groups were prepared totest their reactivity with a transfer unit comprising, a complementaryDNA oligonucleotide associated with a thiol reagent. Both the H and Etemplates reacted efficiently with one equivalent of the DNA-linkedthiol reagent to yield the thioether product in minutes at 25° C.DNA-templated reaction rates (k_(app)-˜10⁵ M⁻¹s⁻¹) were similar for Hand E architectures despite significant differences in the relativeorientation of their reactive groups. In contrast, no product wasobserved when using reagents containing sequence mismatches, or whenusing templates pre-quenched with excess β-mercaptoethanol (see FIG.15). Thus, both DNA templates support a sequence-specific DNA-templatedreaction even though the structures of the resulting products differmarkedly from the structure of the natural DNA backbone. Little or nonon-templated intermolecular reaction products were observed under thereaction conditions (pH 7.5, 25° C., 250 mM NaCl, 60 nM templatetransfer unit), demonstrating the specificity of the DNA-templatedreaction.

Indeed, sequence-specific DNA-templated reactions spanning a variety ofreaction types (S_(N) ² substitutions, additions to α,β-unsaturatedcarbonyl systems, and additions to vinyl sulfones), nucleophiles (thiolsand amines), and reactant structures all proceeded with good yields andexcellent sequence selectivity (see, FIG. 16). Matched (M) or mismatched(X) reagents linked to thiols (S) or primary amines (N) were mixed with1 equivalent of template functionalized with the variety ofelectrophiles shown in FIG. 16. Reactions with thiol reagents wereconducted at pH 7.5 under the following conditions: SIAB and SBAP: 37°C., 16 hours; SIA: 25° C., 16 hours, SMCC, GMBS, BMPS, SVSB: 25° C., 10minutes. Reactions with amine reagents were conducted at 25° C., pH 8.5for 75 minutes. Expected product masses were verified by massspectrometry. In each case, matched but not mismatched reagents affordedproduct efficiently despite considerable variations in their transitionstate geometry, steric hindrance, and conformational flexibility.Collectively these findings indicate that nucleic acid-templatedsynthesis is a general phenomenon capable of supporting a range ofreaction types, and is not limited to the creation of structuresresembling nucleic acid backbones.

Sequence discrimination is important for the faithful translation of anucleic acid into a synthetic reaction product. To test the sequencediscrimination of DNA-templated synthesis, hairpin templates linked toan iodoacetamide group were reacted to thiol-bearing transfer unitscontaining 0, 1, or 3 mismatches. At 25° C., the initial rate ofreaction of the thiol-bearing transfer unit with no mismatches was200-fold faster than that of transfer units bearing a single mismatch(k_(app)=2.4×10⁴ M⁻¹s⁻¹ vs. 1.1×10² M⁻¹s⁻¹; FIG. 17A).

In addition, small amounts of products arising from the annealing ofmismatched reagents could be eliminated by elevating the reactiontemperature beyond the melting temperature T_(m) of the mismatchedreagents (FIG. 17B). In FIG. 17B, the reactions in FIG. 17B wererepeated at the indicated temperatures for 16 hours. The calculatedreagent Tm values were found to be 38° C. (matched) and 28° C. (singlemismatch). The inverse relationship between product formation andtemperature indicates that product formation proceeds by a DNA-templatedmechanism rather than by a simple intermolecular mechanism.

In addition to reaction generality and sequence specificity,DNA-templated synthesis, under certain circumstances, also demonstratesremarkable distance independence. Both H and E templates linked tomaleimide or a-iodoacetamide groups promoted sequence-specific reactionwith matched, but not mismatched, thiol reagents annealed anywhere onthe templates examined thus far (up to 30 bases away from the reactivegroup on the template). Reactants annealed one base away reacted withsimilar rates as those annealed 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, or 30 basesaway (FIG. 18). The reaction illustrated in FIG. 18 used a 41-base Etemplate and a 10-base reagent designed to anneal 1-30 bases from the 5′end of the template. The kinetic profiles of FIG. 18 show the average oftwo trials (deviations<10%). The “n=1 mis” reagent contained threemismatches. In all cases, templated reaction rates were severalhundred-fold higher than the rate of untemplated (mismatched) reaction(k_(app)=10⁴-10⁵ M⁻¹s⁻¹ vs. 5×10¹ M⁻¹s⁻¹). At intervening distances of30 bases, products were efficiently formed presumably through transitionstates resembling 200-membered rings.

In order to further characterize the basis of the distance independenceof DNA-templated synthesis, a series of modified E templates were firstsynthesized in which the intervening bases were replaced by a series ofDNA analogs designed to evaluate the possible contribution of (i)interbase interactions, (ii) conformational preferences of the DNAbackbone, (iii) the charged phosphate backbone, and (iv) backbonehydrophilicity. Templates in which the intervening bases were replacedwith any of the analogs in FIG. 19 showed little effect on the rates ofproduct formation.

In the experiment shown in FIG. 19, the n=10 reaction in FIG. 18 wasrepeated using templates in which the nine bases following the 5′-NH₂-dTwere replaced with the backbone analogues shown. Five equivalents of aDNA oligonucleotide complementary to the intervening bases were added tothe “DNA+clamp” reaction. Reagents were either completely matched (0) orcontained three mismatches (3). The gel shows reactions after 25 minutesat 25° C. FIG. 19 shows that the backbone structural elements specificto DNA are not responsible for the observed distance independence ofDNA-templated synthesis. However, the addition of a 10-base DNAoligonucleotide “clamp” complementary to the single-stranded interveningregion significantly reduced product formation (FIG. 19), suggestingthat the flexibility of this region is critical to efficientDNA-templated synthesis.

The distance independent reaction rates may be explained if thebond-forming events in a DNA-templated format are sufficientlyaccelerated relative to their nontemplated counterparts such that DNAannealing, rather than bond formation, is rate-determining. If DNAannealing is at least partially rate limiting, then the rate of productformation should decrease as the concentration of reagents is loweredbecause annealing, unlike templated bond formation, is a bimolecularprocess. FIG. 20 shows the results of experiments in which the n=1,n=10, and n=1 mismatched (mis) reactions described in FIG. 18 wererepeated with template and reagent concentrations of 12.5, 25, 62.5 or125 nM. FIG. 20 shows that decreasing the concentration of reactants inthe case of the E template with one or ten intervening bases betweenreactive groups resulted in a marked decrease in the observed reactionrate. This observation suggests that proximity effects in DNA-templatedsynthesis can enhance bond formation rates to the point that DNAannealing becomes rate-determining.

These findings raise the possibility of using DNA templated synthesis totranslate in one pot libraries of DNA into solution-phase libraries ofsynthetic molecules suitable for PCR amplification and selection. Thesequence specificity described above suggests that mixtures of reagentsmay be able to react predictably with complementary mixtures oftemplates. Finally, the observed distance independence suggests thatdifferent template codons can be used to encode different reactionswithout impairing reactions rates.

As a demonstration of this approach, a library of 1,025 maleimide-linkedtemplates was synthesized, each with a different DNA sequence in aneight-base encoding region (FIGS. 21A-21B). One of these sequences,5′-TGACGGGT-3′, was arbitrarily chosen to code for the attachment of abiotin group to the template. A library of thiol reagents linked to1,025 different oligonucleotides was also generated. The reagent linkedto 3′-ACTGCCCA-5′ contained a biotin group, while the other 1,024reagents (transfer units) contained no biotin. Equimolar ratios of all1,025 templates and 1,025 reagents were mixed in one pot for 10 minutesat 25° C. and the resulting products were selected in vitro for bindingto streptavidin. Molecules surviving the selection were amplified by PCRand analyzed by restriction digestion and DNA sequencing.

Digestion with the restriction endonuclease Tsp45I, which cleaves GTGACand therefore cuts the biotin encoding template but none of the othertemplates, revealed a 1:1 ratio of biotin encoding to non-biotinencoding templates following selection. In the experiments shown in FIG.22A, lanes 1 and 5 represent the PCR-amplified library beforestreptavidin binding selection; lanes 2 and 6 represent thePCR-amplified library after selection; lanes 3 and 7 represent the PCRamplified authentic biotin-encoding template; and lane 4 represents a 20bp ladder. Lanes 5-7 were digested with Tsp45I. DNA sequencing traces ofthe amplified templates before and after selection are also shown,together with the sequences of the non-biotin-encoding andbiotin-encoding templates. The results summarized in FIG. 22A representa 1,000-fold enrichment compared with the unselected library. DNAsequencing of the PCR amplified pool before and after selectionsuggested a similar degree of enrichment and indicated that thebiotin-encoding template is the major product after selection andamplification (FIG. 22A). The ability of DNA-templated synthesis tosupport the simultaneous sequence-specific reaction of 1,025 reagents,each of which faces a 1,024:1 ratio of non-partner to partner templates,demonstrates its potential as a method to create synthetic libraries inone pot.

Taken together, these results show that it is possible to translate,select, and amplify a synthetic library member having a specificproperty (for example, bind avidin) as shown in FIG. 22B. Furthermore,these results indicate that nucleic acid-templated synthesis is asurprisingly general phenomenon capable of directing, rather than simplyencoding, a range of chemical reactions to form products unrelated instructure to nucleic acid backbones. For several reactions examined, theDNA-templated format accelerates the rate of bond formation beyond therate of a 10-base DNA oligonucleotide annealing to its complement,resulting in surprising distance independence. The facile nature oflong-distance DNA-templated reactions may also arise in part from thetendency of water to contract the volume of nonpolar reactants (see,C.-J. Li et al. Organic Reactions in Aqueous Media, Wiley and Sons: NewYork, 1997) and from possible compactness of the interveningsingle-stranded DNA between reactive groups.

Materials and Methods

DNA Synthesis. DNA oligonucleotides were synthesized on a PerSeptiveBiosystems Expedite 8909 DNA synthesizer using standard protocols andpurified by reverse phase HPLC. Oligonucleotides were quantitatedspectrophotometrically and by denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis (PAGE) followed by staining with ethidium bromide orSYBR Green (Molecular Probes) and quantitation using a Stratagene EagleEye II densitometer. Phosphoramidites enabling the synthesis of5′-NH₂-dT, 5′ tetrachlorofluorescein, abasic backbone spacer, C3backbone spacer, 9-bond polyethylene glycol spacer, 12-bond saturatedhydrocarbon spacer, and 5′ biotin groups were purchased from GlenResearch, Sterling, Va., USA. Thiol-linked oligonucleotide reagents weresynthesized on C3 disulfide controlled pore glass from Glen Research,Sterling, Va., USA.

Template Functionalization. Templates bearing 5′-NH₂-dT groups weretransformed into a variety of electrophilic functional groups byreaction with the appropriate electrophile-N-hydroxysuccminiide (NHS)ester (Pierce, Rockford, Ill., USA). Reactions were performed in 200 mMsodium phosphate pH 7.2 with 2 mg/mL electrophile-NHS ester, 10%dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), and up to 100 μg of 5′-amino template at 25°C. for 1 hours. Desired products were purified by reverse-phase HPLC andcharacterized by gel electrophoresis and MALDI mass spectrometry.

DNA-templated synthesis reactions. Reactions were initiated by mixingequimolar quantities of reagent (transfer unit) and template in buffercontaining 50 mM N-[3-morpholinopropane]sulfonic acid (MOPS) pH 7.5 and250 mM NaCl at the desired temperature (25° C. unless stated otherwise).Concentrations of reagents and templates were 60 nM unless otherwiseindicated. At various time points, aliquots were removed, quenched withexcess β-mercaptoethanol, and analyzed by denaturing PAGE. Reactionproducts were quantitated by densitometry using their intrinsicfluorescence or by staining followed by densitometry. Representativeproducts were also verified by MALDI mass spectrometry.

In Vitro Selection for Avidin Binding. Products of the librarytranslation reaction (FIG. 21A-21B) were isolated by ethanolprecipitation and dissolved in binding buffer (10 mM Tris pH 8, 1 MNaCl, 10 mM ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA)). Products wereincubated with 30 μg of streptavidin-linked magnetic beads (RocheBiosciences) for 10 minute at room temperature in 100 μL total volume.The beads were washed 16 times with binding buffer and eluted bytreatment with 1 μmol free biotin in 100 uL binding buffer at 70° C. for10 minutes. The eluted molecules were isolated by ethanol precipitationand amplified by standard PCR protocols (2 MM MgCl₂, 55° C. annealing.20 cycles) using the primers 5′-TGGTGCGGAGCCGCCG [SEQ ID NO: 35] and5′-CCACTGTCCGTGGCGCGACCCCGGCTCC TCGGCTCGG [SEQ ID NO: 36]. Automated DNAsequencing used the primer 5′-CCACTGTCCGTGGCGCGACCC [SEQ ID NO: 37].

DNA Sequences. Sequences not provided in the Figures are as follows:matched reagent in FIG. 16 SIAB and SBAP reactions:5′-CCCGAGTCGAAGTCGTACC—SH [SEQ ID NO: 38]; mismatched reagent in FIG. 16SIAB and SBAP reactions: 5′-GGGCTCAGCTTCCCCATAA-SH [SEQ ID NO: 39];mismatched reagents for other reactions in FIGS. 16, and 17A-17B;5′-FAAATCTTCCC—SH (F=tetrachlorofluorescein) [SEQ ID NO: 40]; reagentsin FIG. 16 containing one mismatch: 5′-FAATTCTTACC—SH [SEQ ID NO: 41]; Etemplates in FIGS. 15 and 16 SMCC, GMBS, BNPS, and SVSB reactions, andFIGS. 17A-17B: 5′-(NH₂dT)-CGCGAGCGTACGCTCGCGATGGTACGAATTCGACTCGGGAATACCACCTTCGACTCGAGG [SEQ ID NO: 42]; H template in FIG. 16 SIAB, SBAP, andSIA reactions: 5′-(NH₂dT)-CGCGAGCGTACGCTCGCGATGGTACGAATTC [SEQ ID NO:43]; clamp oligonucleotide in FIG. 19: 5′-ATTCGTACCA [SEQ ID NO: 44].

Example 2 Exemplary Reactions for Use in DNA-Templated Synthesis

This Example demonstrates that DNA-templated synthesis can direct amodest collection of chemical reactions without requiring the precisealignment of reactive groups into DNA-like conformations. Furthermore,this Example also demonstrates that it is possible to simultaneouslytranslate in one-pot a library of more than 1,000 templates into thecorresponding thioether products, one of which could be enriched by invitro selection for binding to streptavidin and amplification by PCR.

As described in detail herein, a variety of chemical reactions forexample. DNA-templated organometallic couplings and carbon-carbon bondforming reactions other than pyrimidine photodimerization can beutilized to construct small molecules. These reactions represent animportant step towards the in vitro evolution of non-natural syntheticmolecules by permitting the DNA-templated construction of a diverse setof structures.

The ability of DNA-templated synthesis to direct reactions that requirea non-DNA-linked activator, catalyst or other reagent in addition to theprincipal reactants has also been demonstrated herein. To test theability of DNA-templated synthesis to mediate such reactions withoutrequiring structural mimicry of the DNA-templated backbone,DNA-templated reductive aminations between an amine-linked template (1)and benzaldehyde- or glyoxal-linked reagents (3) with millimolarconcentrations of sodium cyanoborohydride (NaBH₃CN) at room temperaturein aqueous solutions can be performed (see, FIG. 23A). Significantly,products formed efficiently when the template and reagent sequences werecomplementary, while control reactions in which the sequence of thereagent did not complement that of the template, or in which NaBH₃CN wasomitted, yielded no significant product (see FIGS. 23A-23D and 24).Although DNA-templated reductive aminations to generate products closelymimicking the structure of double-stranded DNA have been previouslyreported (see, for example, Li et al. (2002) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 124: 746and Gat et al. (1998) BIOPOLYMERS 48: 19), these results demonstratethat reductive amination to generate structures unrelated to thephosphoribose backbone can take place efficiently andsequence-specifically.

Referring to FIGS. 25A-25B, DNA-templated amide bond formations betweenamine-linked templates 4 and 5 and carboxylate-linked reagents 6-9mediated by 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) andN-hydroxylsulfosuccinimide (sulfo-NHS) generated amide products in goodyields at pH 6.0, 25° C. Product formation was (i) sequence-specific,(ii) dependent on the presence of EDC, and (iii) insensitive to thesteric encumbrance of the amine or carboxylate. Efficient DNA-templatedamide formation was also mediated by the water-stable activator4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-trizin-2-yl)-4-methylmorpholinium chloride(DMT-MM) instead of EDC and sulfo-NHS (FIGS. 24 and 25A-25B). Theefficiency and generality of DNA-templated amide bond formation underthese conditions, together with the large number of commerciallyavailable chiral amines and carboxylic acids, make this reaction anattractive candidate in future DNA-templated syntheses of structurallydiverse small molecule libraries.

Carbon-carbon bond forming reactions are also important in both chemicaland biological syntheses and thus several such reactions can be utilizedin a nucleic acid-templated format. Both the reaction ofnitroalkane-linked reagent (10) with aldehyde-linked template (11)(nitro-aldol or Henry reaction) and the conjugate addition of 10 tomaleimide-linked template (12) (nitro-Michael addition) proceededefficiently and with high sequence specificity at pH 7.5-8.5, 25° C.(FIGS. 23A and 24). In addition, the sequence-specific DNA-templatedWittig reaction between stabilized phosphorus ylide reagent 13 andaldehyde-linked templates 14 or 11 provided the corresponding olefinproducts in excellent yields at pH 6.0-8.0, 25° C. (FIGS. 23B and 24).Similarly, the DNA templated 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition betweennitrone-linked reagents 15 and 16 and olefin-linked templates 12, 17 or18 also afforded products sequence specifically at pH 7.5, 25° C. (FIGS.23B, 23C and 24).

In addition to the reactions described above, organometallic couplingreactions can also be utilized in the present invention. For example,DNA-templated Heck reactions were performed in the presence ofwater-soluble Pd precatalysts. In the presence of 170 mM Na₂PdCl4, aryliodide-linked reagent 19 and a variety of olefin-linked templatesincluding maleimide 12, acrylamide 17, vinyl sulfone 18 or cinnamamide20 yielded Heck coupling products in modest yields at pH 5.0, 25° C.(FIGS. 23D and 24). For couplings with olefins 17, 18 and 20, adding twoequivalents of P(p-SO₃C₆H₄)₃ per equivalent of Pd prior to template andreagent addition typically increased overall yields by 2-fold. Controlreactions containing sequence mismatches or lacking Pd precatalystyielded no product.

Example 1 above shows that certain DNA-templated reactions demonstratedistance independence. Distance independence may arise when the rate ofbond formation in the DNA-templated reaction is greater than the rate oftemplate-reagent annealing. Although only a subset of chemistries fallinto this category, any DNA-templated reaction that affords comparableproduct yields when the reagent is annealed at various distances fromthe reactive end of the template is of special interest because it canbe encoded at a variety of template positions. In order to evaluate theability of the DNA-templated reactions developed in this Example to takeplace efficiently when reactants are separated by distances relevant tolibrary encoding, the yields of reductive amination, amide formation,nitro-aldol addition, nitro-Michael addition, Wittig olefination,dipolar cycloaddition, and Heck coupling reactions were compared wheneither zero (n=0) or ten (n=10) bases separated the annealed reactivegroups (FIG. 26A). Among the reactions described here or in Example 1,amide bond formation, nitro-aldol addition, Wittig olefination, Heckcoupling, conjugate addition of thiols to maleimides and S_(N)2 reactionbetween thiols and a-iodo amides demonstrate comparable productformation when reactive groups are separated by zero or ten bases (FIG.26B). FIG. 26B shows the results of denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis of a DNA-templated Wittig olefination betweencomplementary 11 and 13 with either zero bases (lanes 1-3) or ten bases(lanes 4-6) separating the annealed reactants. Although the apparentsecond order rate constants for the n=0 and n=10 reactions differ bythree-fold (kapp (n=0)=9.9×10₃ M⁻¹s⁻¹ while kapp (n=10)=3.5×10³ M⁻¹s⁻¹),product yields after 13 hours at both distances were nearlyquantitative. Control reactions containing sequence mismatches yieldedno detectable product. These findings indicate that these reactions canbe encoded during synthesis by nucleotides that are distal from thereactive end of the template without significantly impairing productformation.

In addition to the DNA-templated S_(N) ² reaction, conjugate addition,vinyl sulfone addition, amide bond formation, reductive amination,nitro-aldol (Henry reaction), nitro Michael, Wittig olefination,1,3-dipolar cycloaddition and Heck coupling reactions described directlyabove, a variety of additional reagents can also be utilized in themethod of the present invention. For example, as depicted in FIG. 27,powerful aqueous DNA-templated synthetic reactions including, but notlimited to, the Lewis acid-catalyzed aldol addition, Mannich reaction,Robinson annulation reactions, additions of allyl indium, zinc and tinto ketones and aldehydes, Pd-assisted allylic substitution, Diels-Aldercycloadditions, and hetero-Diels-Alder reactions can be utilizedefficiently in aqueous solvent and are important complexity-buildingreactions.

Taken together, these results expand considerably the reaction scope ofDNA-templated synthesis. A wide variety of reactions can proceedefficiently and selectively when the corresponding reactants areprogrammed with complementary sequences. By augmenting the repertoire ofknown DNA-templated reactions to include carbon-carbon bond forming andorganometallic reactions (nitro-aldol additions, nitro-Michaeladditions, Wittig olefinations, dipolar cycloadditions, and Heckcouplings) in addition to previously reported amide bond formation (see,Schmidt et al. (1997) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 25: 4792; Bruick et al. (1996)CHEM. BIOL. 3: 49), imine formation (Czlapinski et al. (2001) J. AM.CHEM. SOC. 123: 8618), reductive anination (Li et al. (2002) J. AM.CHEM. SOC. 124: 746; Gat et al. (1998) BIOPOLYMERS 48: 19), S_(N) ²reactions (Gartner et al. (2001) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 123: 6961; Xu et al.(2001) NAT. BIOTECHNOL. 19: 148; Herrlein et al. (1995) J. AM. CHEM.SOC. 117: 10151) conjugate addition of thiols (Gartner et al. (2001) J.AM. CHEM. SOC. 123: 6961), and phosphoester or phosphonamide formation(Orgel et al. (1995) ACC. CHEM. RES. 28 109; Luther et al. (1998) NATURE396: 245), these results may permit the sequence-specific translation oflibraries of DNA into libraries of structurally and functionally diversesynthetic products.

Because minute quantities of templates encoding desired molecules can beamplified by PCR, the yields of DNA-templated reactions arguably areless critical than the yields of traditional synthetic transformations.Nevertheless, many of the reactions discussed in this Example proceedefficiently.

Materials and Methods

Functionalized templates and reagents were typically prepared byreacting 5′-NH₂ terminated oligonucleotides (for template 1),5′-NH₂—(CH₂O)₂ terminated oligonucleotides (for all other templates) or3′-OPO₃—CH₂CH(CH₂OH)(CH₂)₄NH₂ terminated nucleotides (for all reagents)with the appropriate NHS esters (0.1 volumes of a 20 mg/mL solution inDMF) in 0.2 M sodium phosphate buffer, pH 7.2, 25° C., for 1 hour toprovide the template and reagent structures shown in FIGS. 23A-23D and25A-25B. For amino acid linked reagents 6-9,3′-OPO₃CH₂CH(CH₂OH)(CH₂)₄NH₂ terminated oligonucleotides in 0.2 M sodiumphosphate buffer, pH 7.2 were reacted with 0.1 volumes of a 100 mMbis[2-(succinimidyloxycarbonyloxy)ethyl]sulfone (BSOCOES, Pierce,Rockford, Ill., USA) solution in DMF for 10 minutes at 25° C., followedby 0.3 volumes of a 300 mM amino acid in 300 mM sodium hydroxide (NaOH)for 30 minutes at 25° C.

Functionalized templates and reagents were purified by gel filtrationusing Sephadex G-25 followed by reverse-phase HPLC (0.1 triethylammoniumacetate-acetonitrile gradient) and characterized by MALDI massspectrometry.

For the DNA templated reactions described in FIGS. 23A-23D, reactionswere conducted at 25° C. with one equivalent each of template andreagent at 60 nM final concentration unless otherwise specified.Conditions: (a) 3 mM NaBH₃CN, 0.1 M N-[2-morpholinoethane]sulfonic acid(MES) buffer pH 6.0, 0.5 M NaCl, 1.5 hours; b) 0.1 MN-tris[hydroxymethyl]methyl-3-aminopropanesulfonic acid (TAPS) buffer pH8.5, 300 mM NaCl, 12 hours; c) 0.1 M pH 8.0 TAPS buffer, 1 M NaCl, 5°C., 1.5 hours; d) 50 mM MOPS buffer pH 7.5, 2.8 M NaCl, 22 hours; e) 120nM 19, 1.4 mM Na₂PdCl₄, 0.5 M NaOAc buffer pH 5.0, 18 hours; (f) PremixNa₂PdCl4 with two equivalents of P(p-SO₃C₆H₄)₃ in water for 15 minutes,then add to reactants in 0.5 M NaOAc buffer pH 5.0, 75 mM NaCl, 2 hours(final [Pd]=0.3 mM, [19]=120 nM). The olefin geometry of products from13 and the regiochemistries of cycloaddition products from 14 and 16 arepresumed but not verified (FIGS. 23A-23D). Products were characterizedby denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and MALDI massspectrometry. For all reactions under the specified conditions, productyields of reactions with matched template and reagent sequences weregreater than 20-fold higher than that of control reactions withscrambled reagent sequences.

The conditions for the reactions described in FIGS. 25A-25B were: 60 nMtemplate, 120 nM reagent, 50 mM DMT-MM in 0.1 M MOPS buffer pH 7.0, 1 MNaCl, for 16 hours at, 25° C.; or 60 nM template, 120 nM reagent, 20 mMEDC, 15 mM sulfo-NHS, 0.1 M MES buffer pH 6.0, 1 M NaCl, for 16 hours at25° C. In each row of the table in FIGS. 25A-25B, yields ofDMT-MM-mediated reactions between reagents and templates complementaryin sequence were followed by yields of EDC and sulfo-NHS mediatedreactions. In all cases, control reactions with mismatched reagentsequences yielded little or no detectable product and products werecharacterized by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and MALDImass spectrometry.

FIG. 24 depicts the analysis by denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis of representative DNA-templated reactions listed inFIGS. 23A-23D and 25A-25B. The structures of reagents and templatescorrespond to the numbering in FIGS. 23A-23D and 25A-25B. Lanes 1, 3, 5,7, 9, 11: reaction of matched (complementary or “M”) reagents andtemplates under conditions listed in FIGS. 23A-23D and 25A-25B (thereaction between 4 and 6 was mediated by DMT-MM). Lanes 2, 4, 6, 8, 10,12: reaction of mismatched (non-complementary or “X”) reagents andtemplates under conditions identical to those in lanes 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and11, respectively.

The sequences of oligonucleotide templates and reagents are as follows(5′ to 3 ′ direction, n refers to the number of bases between reactivegroups when template and reagent are annealed as shown in FIG. 26A). 1:TGGTACGAATTCGACTCGGG [SEQ ID NO: 45]; 2 and 3 matched: GAGTCGAATTCGTACC[SEQ ID NO: 46]; 2 and 3 mismatched: GGGCTCAGCTTCCCCA [SEQ ID NO: 47]; 4and 5: GGTACGAATTCGACTCGGGAATACCACCTT [SEQ ID NO: 48]; 6-9 matched(n=10): TCCCGAGTCG [SEQ ID NO: 49]; 6 matched (n=0): AATTCGTACC [SEQ IDNO: 50]; 6-9 mismatched: TCACCTAGCA [SEQ ID NO: 51]; 11, 12,14,17,18,20:GGTACGAATTCGACTCGGGA [SEQ ID NO: 52]; 10, 13,16,19 matched:TCCCGAGTCGAATTCGTACC [SEQ ID NO: 53]; 10, 13, 16, 19 mismatched:GGGCTCAGCTTCCCCATAAT [SEQ ID NO: 54]; 15 matched: AATTCGTACC [SEQ ID NO:55]; 15 mismatched: TCGTATTCCA [SEQ ID NO: 56]; template for n=10 vs.n=0 comparison: TAGCGATTACGGTACGAATTCGACTCGGGA [SEQ ID NO: 57].

Reaction yields were quantitated by denaturing PAGE followed by ethidiumbromide staining, UV visualization, and charge-coupled device(CCD)-based densitometry of product and template starting materialbands. Yield calculations assumed that templates and products stainedwith equal intensity per base; for those cases in which products werepartially double-stranded during quantitation, changes in stainingintensity may have resulted in higher apparent yields.

Example 3 Multi-Step Small Molecule Synthesis Programmed by DNATemplates

This Example demonstrates that it is possible to perform multi-stepsmall molecule synthesis via DNA-templated chemistries.

DNA-templated synthesis can direct a wide variety of powerful chemicalreactions with high sequence-specificity and without requiringstructural mimicry of the DNA backbone. The application of this approachto synthetic molecules of useful complexity, however, requires thedevelopment of general methods to permit the product of a DNA-templatedreaction to undergo subsequent DNA-templated transformations.

Multi-step DNA-templated small molecule synthesis faces two majorchallenges beyond those associated with DNA-templated synthesis ingeneral. First, the DNA used to direct reagents to appropriate templatesmust be removed from the product of a DNA-templated reaction prior tosubsequent DNA-templated synthetic steps in order to prevent undesiredhybridization to the template. Second, multi-step synthesis oftenrequires the purification and isolation of intermediate products. Toaddress these challenges, three distinct strategies have been developed(i) to link chemical reagents (reactive units) with their decoding DNAoligonucleotides and (ii) to purify product after any DNA-templatedsynthetic step.

When possible, an ideal reagent-oligonucleotide linker for DNA-templatedsynthesis positions the oligonucleotide as a leaving group of thereagent. Under this “autocleaving” linker strategy, theoligonucleotide-reagent bond is cleaved as a natural chemicalconsequence of the reaction (see, FIG. 28A).

As the first example of this approach applied to DNA-templatedchemistry, a dansylated Wittig phosphorane reagent (1) was synthesizedin which the decoding DNA oligonucleotide was attached to one of thearyl phosphine groups (Hughes (1996) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 37: 7595).DNA-templated Wittig olefination with aldehyde-linked template 2resulted in the efficient transfer of the fluorescent dansyl group fromthe reagent to the template to provide olefin 3 (FIG. 28A). As a secondexample of an autocleaving linker, DNA-linked thioester 4, whenactivated with Ag(I) at pH 7.0 (Zhang et al. (1999) J. AM. CHEM. SOC.121: 3311) acylated amino-terminated template 5 to afford amide product6 (FIG. 28B).

Ribosomal protein biosynthesis uses aminoacylated tRNAs in a similarautocleaving linker format to mediate RNA-templated peptide bondformation. To purify desired products away from unreacted reagents andfrom cleaved oligonucleotides following DNA-templated reactions usingautocleaving linkers, biotinylated reagent oligonucleotides and washingcrude reactions with streptavidin-linked magnetic beads (see, FIG. 30A)were utilized. Although this approach does not separate reactedtemplates from unreacted templates, unreacted templates can be removedin subsequent DNA-templated reaction and purification steps.

Reagents bearing more than one functional group can be linked to theirdecoding DNA oligonucleotides through second and third linkerstrategies. In the “scarless linker” approach (FIG. 28C), one functionalgroup of the reagent is reserved for DNA-templated bond formation, whilethe second functional group is used to attach a linker that can becleaved without introducing additional unwanted chemical functionality.The DNA-templated reaction then is followed by cleavage of the linkerattached through the second functional group to afford desired products(FIG. 28C). For example, a series of aminoacylation reagents such as(D)-Phe derivative 7 were synthesized in which the a-amine is connectedthrough a carbamoylethylsulfone linker (Zarling et al. (1980) J.IMMUNOLOGY 124: 913) to its decoding DNA oligonucleotide. The product(8) of DNA-templated amide bond formation using this reagent and anamine-terminated template (5) was treated with aqueous base to effectthe quantitative elimination and spontaneous decarboxylation of thelinker, affording product 9 containing the cleanly transferred aminoacid group (FIG. 28C). This sulfone linker is stable in pH 7.5 or lowerbuffer at 25° C. for more than 24 hours yet undergoes quantitativecleavage when exposed to pH 11.8 buffer for 2 hours at 37 C.

In some cases it may be advantageous to introduce one or more atoms newchemical groups as a consequence of linker cleavage. Under a thirdlinker strategy, linker cleavage generates a “useful scar” that can befunctionalized in subsequent steps (FIG. 28C). As an example of thisclass of linker, amino acid reagents such as the (L)-Phe derivative 10were generated linked through 1,2-diols (Fruchart et al. (1999)TETRAHEDRON LETT. 40: 6225) to their decoding DNA oligonucleotides.Following DNA-templated amide bond formation with amine terminatedtemplate (5), this linker was quantitatively cleaved by oxidation with50 mM aqueous sodium periodate (NaIO₄) at pH 5.0 to afford product 12containing an aldehyde group appropriate for subsequentfunctionalization (for example, in a DNA-templated Wittig olefination,reductive amination, or nitrolaldol addition).

FIG. 29 shows the results of exemplary DNA-templated synthesisexperiments using autocleaving linkers, scarless linkers, and usefulscar linkers. The depicted reactions were analyzed by denaturing PAGE.Lanes 1-3 were visualized using UV light without DNA staining; lanes4-10 were visualized by staining with ethidium bromide following by UVtransillumination. Conditions for1 to 3 were: one equivalent each ofreagent and template, 0.1 M TAPS buffer pH 8.5, 1 M NaCl, at 25° C. for1.5 hours. Conditions for 4 to 6 were: three equivalents of 4, 0.1 M MESbuffer pH 7.0, 1 M sodium nitrite (NaNO₂) 10 mM silver nitrate (AgNO₃),at 37° C. for 8 hours. Conditions for 8 to 9 were 0.1 M3-(cyclohexylamino)-1-propanesulfonic acid (CAPS) buffer pH 11.8. 60 mMβ-mercaptoethanol (BME), at 37° C. for 2 hours. Finally, conditions for11 to 12 were: 50 mM aqueous NaIO₄, at 25° C. for 2 hours.R₁=NH(CH₂)₂NH-dansyl; R₂=biotin.

Desired products generated from DNA-templated reactions using thescarless or useful scar linkers can be readily purified usingbiotinylated reagent oligonucleotides (FIG. 30B). Reagentoligonucleotides together with desired products are first captured onstreptavidin-linked magnetic beads. Any unreacted template bound toreagent by base pairing is removed by washing the beads with buffercontaining 4 M guanidinium chloride. Biotinylated molecules remain boundto the streptavidin beads under these conditions. Desired product thenis isolated in pure form by eluting the beads with linker cleavagebuffer (in the examples above, either pH 11 or sodium periodate(NaIO₄)-containing buffer), while reacted and unreacted reagents remainbound to the beads.

As one example of a specific library generated as described above, threeiterated cycles of DNA-templated amide formation, traceless linkercleavage, and purification with streptavidin-linked beads were used togenerate a non-natural tripeptide (FIGS. 31A-B). Each amino acid reagentwas linked to a unique biotinylated 10-base DNA oligonucleotide throughthe sulfone linker described above. The 30-base amine-terminatedtemplate programmed to direct the tripeptide synthesis contained threeconsecutive 10-base regions that were complementary to the threereagents, mimicking the strategy that would be used in a multi-stepDNA-templated small molecule library synthesis.

In the first step, two equivalents of 13 were activated by treatmentwith 20 mM EDC, 15 mM sulfo-NHS, 0.1 M MES buffer pH 5.5, and 1 M NaCl,for 10 minutes at 25° C. The template then was added in 0.1 M MOPS pH7.5, and 1M NaCl, at 25° C. and was allowed to react for 1 hour. Thefree amine group in 14 then was elaborated in a second and third roundof DNA-templated amide formation and linker cleavage to afford dipeptide15 and tripeptide 16 using the following conditions: two equivalents ofreagent, 50 mM DMT-MM, 0.1 M MOPS buffer pH 7.0, 1 M NaCl, at 25° C. for6 hours. Desired product after each step was purified by capture onavidin-linked beads and elution with 0.1 M CAPS buffer pH 11.8, 60 mMBME, at 37° C. for 2 hours. The progress of each reaction andpurification was followed by denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis (FIG. 31B, bottom). Lanes 3, 6, and 9 represent controlreactions using reagents containing scrambled oligonucleotide sequences.

The progress of each reaction, purification, and sulfone linker cleavagestep was followed by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis. Thefinal tripeptide linked to template 16 was digested with the restrictionendonuclease EcoRI and the digestion fragment containing the tripeptidewas characterized by MALDI mass spectrometry. Beginning with 2 nmol (˜20μg) of starting material, sufficient tripeptide product was generated toserve as the template for more than 10⁶ in vitro selections and PCRreactions (Kramer et al. (1999) CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOL. BIOL. 3: 15.1)(assuming 1/10,000 molecules survive selection). No significant productwas generated when the starting material template was capped with aceticanhydride, or when control reagents containing sequence mismatches wereused instead of the complementary reagents (FIG. 31B).

A non-peptidic multi-step DNA-templated small molecule synthesis thatuses all three linker strategies developed above was also performed(FIG. 32A-32B). An amine-terminated 30-base template was subjected toDNA-templated amide bond formation using an aminoacyl donor reagent (17)containing the diol linker and a biotinylated 10-base oligonucleotide toafford amide 18 (two equivalents 17 in 20 mM EDC, 15 mM sulfo-NHS, 0.1 MMES buffer pH 5.5, 1 M NaCl, 10 minutes, 25° C., then add to template in0.1 M MOPS pH 7.5, 1M NaCl at 16° C. for 8 hours). The desired productthen was isolated by capturing the crude reaction on streptavidin beadsfollowed by cleaving the linker with NaIO₄ to generate aldehyde 19. TheDNA-templated Wittig reaction of 19 with the biotinylated autocleavingphosphorane reagent 20 afforded fumaramide 21 (three equivalents 20, 0.1M TAPS pH 9.0, 3 M NaCl at 25° C. for 48 hours). The products from thesecond DNA-templated reaction were partially purified by washing withstreptavidin beads to remove reacted and unreacted reagent. In the thirdDNA-templated step, fumaramide 21 was subjected to a DNA-templatedconjugate addition (Gartner et al. (2001) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 123: 6961)using thiol reagent 22 linked through the sulfone linker to abiotinylated oligonucleotide (three equivalents 22, 0.1 M TAPS pH 8.5, 1M NaCl at 25° C. for 21 hours). The desired conjugate addition product(23) was purified by immobilization with streptavidin beads. Linkercleavage with pH 11 buffer afforded final product 24 in 5-10% overallisolated yield for the three bond forming reactions, two linker cleavagesteps, and three purifications (FIGS. 32A-32B).

The final product was digested with EcoRI and the mass of the smallmolecule-linked template fragment was confirmed by MALDI massspectrometry (exact mass: 2568, observed mass: 2566±5). As in thetripeptide example, each of the three reagents used during thismulti-step synthesis annealed at a unique location on the DNA template,and control reactions with sequence mismatches yielded no product (FIG.32B, bottom). In FIG. 32B, bottom lanes 3, 6, and 9 represent controlreactions. As expected, control reactions in which the Wittig reagentwas omitted (step 2) also did not generate product following the thirdstep.

Taken together, the DNA-templated syntheses of compounds 16 and 24demonstrate the ability of DNA to direct the sequence-programmedmulti-step synthesis of both oligomeric and non-oligomeric smallmolecules unrelated in structure to nucleic acids.

Example 4 Exemplary Reactions in Organic Solvents

As demonstrated herein, a variety of DNA-templated reactions can occurin aqueous media. It has also been discovered that DNA-templatedreactions can occur in organic solvents, thus greatly expanding thescope of DNA-templated synthesis. Specifically, DNA templates andreagents have been complexed with long chain tetraalkylammonium cations(see, Jost et al. (1989) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 17: 2143; Mel'nikov et al.(1999) LANGMUIR 15: 1923-1928) to permit quantitative dissolution ofreaction components in anhydrous organic solvents including CH₂Cl₂,CHCl₃, DMF and methanol. Surprisingly, it was found that DNA-templatedsynthesis can indeed occur in anhydrous organic solvents with highsequence selectivity.

FIG. 33 shows DNA-templated amide bond formation reactions where thereagents and templates are complexed with dimethyldidodecylammoniumcations either in separate vessels or after preannealing in water,lyophilized to dryness, dissolved in CH₂Cl₂, and mixed together.Matched, but not mismatched, reactions provided products both whenreactants were preannealed in aqueous solution and when they were mixedfor the first time in CH₂Cl₂ (FIG. 33). DNA-templated amide formationand Pd-mediated Heck coupling in anhydrous DMF also proceededsequence-specifically.

These observations of sequence-specific DNA-templated synthesis inorganic solvents imply the presence of at least some secondary structurewithin tetraalkylammonium-complexed DNA in organic media, and shouldpermit DNA receptors and catalysts to be evolved towards stereoselectivebinding or catalytic properties in organic solvents. Specifically,DNA-templated reactions that are known to occur in aqueous media,including conjugate additions, cycloadditions, displacement reactions,and Pd-mediated couplings can also be performed in organic solvents.

It is contemplated that reactions in organic solvents may be utilizedthat are inefficient or impossible to perform in water. For example,while Ru-catalyzed olefin metathesis in water has been reported (Lynn etal. (1998) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 120: 1627-1628; Lynn et al. (2000) J. AM.CHEM. SOC. 122: 6601-6609; Mohret al. (1996) ORGANOMETALLICS 15:4317-4325), the aqueous metathesis system is extremely sensitive to theidentities of the functional groups. The functional group tolerance ofRu-catalyzed olefin metathesis in organic solvents, however, issignificantly more robust. Some exemplary reactions to utilize inorganic solvents include, but are not limited to 1,3-dipolarcycloaddition between nitrones and olefins which can proceed throughtransition states that are less polar than ground state startingmaterials.

Example 5 New Architectures for Nucleic Acid-Templated Synthesis

This Example discloses two different template architectures that furtherexpand the scope of nucleic acid-templated synthesis.

During a nucleic acid-templated chemical reaction a portion of atemplate anneals to a complementary sequence of anoligonucleotide-linked reagent, holding functional groups on thetemplate and transfer unit in reactive proximity. Template architecturecan have a profound effect on the nature of the resulting reaction,raising the possibility of manipulating reaction conditions byrationally designing template-reagent complexes with different secondarystructures.

During the course of DNA templated synthesis using the end-of-helix(“E”) and hairpin (“H”) templates (see, Example 1), two challengesemerged. First, some DNA-templated reactions do not proceed efficientlywhen the annealed reactive groups on the template and transfer unit(reagent) are separated by even small numbers of bases. Using the E or Harchitectures, “distance-dependent” reactions can only be encoded bytemplate bases at the reactive end of the template. Second, the presenceof double-stranded DNA between annealed reactive groups can greatlyreduce the efficiency of templated reactions because, under certaincircumstances a single-stranded template may need to be flexible. Thismay preclude the possibility of performing two or more reactions in asingle DNA-templated step using the E or H architectures even though thetemplate oligonucleotide may contain enough bases to encode multiplereactions. This Example discuses two new template architectures, whichovercome each of these challenges.

It was hypothesized that the distance dependence of certainDNA-templated reactions such as 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions and reductiveamination could be overcome by designing a new architecture that permitsa reagent to anneal to two distinct and spatially separated regions ofthe template. In the “omega” or “Ω” architecture (see, FIG. 7), thetemplate oligonucleotide contains a small number of constant bases at,for example, the reactive 5′ end of the template in addition to distalcoding regions. The oligonucleotide of the transfer unit for the Ωarchitecture contains at its reactive 3′ end the bases that complementthe constant region of the template followed by bases that complement acoding region anywhere on the template. The constant regions weredesigned to be of insufficient length to anneal in the absence of acomplementary coding region. When the coding region of the template andtransfer unit are complementary and anneal, the elevated effectivemolarity of the constant regions induces their annealing. Constantregion annealing forms a bulge (resembling an Ω) in the otherwisedouble-stranded template-reagent complex and places groups at the endsof the template and reagent in reactive proximity. This design permitsdistance-dependent DNA-templated reactions to be encoded by bases distalfrom the reactive end of the template.

The efficiency of DNA-templated synthesis using theΩ architecture wascompared with that of the standard E and H architectures. The Ωarchitectures studied comprise (i) three to five constant bases at the5′ end of the template followed by (ii) a five- to 17-base loop and(iii) a ten-base coding region. As a basis for comparison, fourdifferent classes of DNA-templated reactions were performed thatcollectively span the range of distance dependence observed to date.

Amine acylation reactions are representative of distance independentreactions that proceed efficiently even when considerable distances(e.g., 30 bases) separate the amine and carboxylate groups. As expected,amine acylation (20 mM DMT-MM, pH 7.0, at 30° C. for 12 hours) proceededefficiently (46-96% yield) in all architectures with both small andlarge distances between reactive groups on the reagent and template(FIG. 34, lanes 1-5; and FIG. 35A). The Ω architecture mediatedefficient amine acylation with three, four, or five constant bases atthe reactive ends of the template and reagent and 10 or 20 bases betweenannealed reactants (n=10 or 20). Importantly, control reactions in whichthe distal coding region contained three sequence mismatches failed togenerate significant product despite the presence of the complementarythree-to five-base constant regions at the ends of the template andreagent (see, FIG. 34, lane 5 for a representative example). The =106architecture, therefore, did not impede the efficiency orsequence-specificity of the distance-independent amine acylationreaction.

DNA-templated Wittig olefination reactions proceed at a significantlylower rate when the aldehyde and phosphorane are separated by largernumbers of template bases, even though product yields typically areexcellent after 12 hours or more of reaction regardless of interveningdistance. After only 2 hours of reaction (pH 7.5, 30° C.) in the E or Harchitectures, however, yields of olefin products were three- tosix-fold lower when reactants were separated by ten or more bases (n=10or 20) than when reactants are separated by only one base (n=1) (FIG.34, lanes 6-7, and FIG. 35B). In contrast, the Q architecture with fouror five constant bases at the reactive end resulted in efficient andsequence-specific Wittig product formation after 2 hours of reactioneven when 10 or 20 bases separated the coding region and reactive end ofthe template (FIG. 34, lanes 8-9, and FIG. 35B). These results suggestthat the constant regions at the reactive ends of the template andtransfer unit in the Ω architecture permit the aldehyde and phosphoranemoieties to react at an effective concentration comparable to thatachieved with the E-architecture when n=1 (FIG. 34).

Among the many DNA-templated reactions studied to date, the 1,3-dipolarcycloaddition and reductive amination reactions demonstrate the mostpronounced distance dependence. Both reactions proceed in low to modestefficiency (7%-44% yield) under standard reaction conditions using the Eor H architectures when 10 or 20 bases separate the annealed reactivegroups (FIG. 34, lanes 10-11 and 14-15, and FIGS. 35C-35D). Thisdistance dependence limits the positions on a DNA template that canencode these or other similarly distant dependent reactions. Incontrast, both 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition and reductive amination proceedefficiently (up to 97% yield) and sequence-specifically when encoded bytemplate bases 15-25 bases away from the functionalized end of thetemplate using the K architecture with four or five constant bases (FIG.34, lanes 12-13 and 16-17, and FIGS. 35C-35D). These results demonstratethat the templates Ω architecture permits distance-dependent reactionsto be efficiently directed by DNA bases far from the reactive end of thetemplate. By overcoming the distance dependence of these reactions whilepreserving the efficiency of distant independent reactions, the Ωarchitecture may permit virtually any contiguous subset of bases in asingle-stranded 30-base template to encode any viable DNA-templatedreaction. Interestingly, the Ω templates with only three constant basesat their reactive ends do not consistently improve the efficiency ofthese reactions compared with the E-architecture (FIGS. 35C-35D),suggesting that four or five constant bases may be required in the Ωarchitecture to fully realize favorable proximity effects.

In order to probe the structural features underlying the observedproperties of the Ω architecture, the thermal denaturation of the Ω-5and E architectures using n=10 and n=20 reagents were characterized. Forall template-reagent combinations, only a single cooperative meltingtransition was observed. Compared to the E architecture reagent lackingthe five-base constant region, the Ω-5 reagent increased thehypochromicity upon annealing by ˜50% but did not significantly affectmelting temperature in either phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) or in 50mM sodium phosphate pH 7.2 with 1 M NaCl (FIG. 36). These results areconsistent with a model in which template-reagent annealing in the Ωarchitecture is dominated by coding region interactions even though theconstant region forms secondary structure once the coding region isannealed. The entropic cost of partially ordering the loop between thecoding and constant regions may, therefore, be offset by the favorableinteractions that arise upon annealing of the constant region.

DNA templates of arbitrary length are easy to synthesize and undesiredcross reactivity between reactants in the same solution can be avoidedusing concentrations that are too low to allow non-complementaryreactants to react intermolecularly. These features of DNA-templatedsynthesis permit more than one DNA-templated reaction to take place on asingle template in one solution, saving the effort associated withadditional DNA-templated steps and product purifications.

Multiple DNA-templated reactions per step can be difficult using the E,H, or Ω architectures, because the reagent oligonucleotide that remainsannealed to the template following the first reaction forms a relativelyrigid double helix that can prevent a second reagent annealed furtheraway along the template from encountering the reactive end of thetemplate. To overcome this, the reactive group on the template was movedfrom the end of the oligonucleotide to the middle, attaching thereactive group to the non-Watson-Crick face of a base. This “T”architecture (see, FIG. 7G) was designed to permit two DNA-templatedreactions, one with a reagent coupled to the 5′ end of theoligonucleotide of a first transfer unit and one with a reagent coupledto the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide of a second transfer unit, to takeplace sequence-specifically in the same solution on a single template.

To testthe viability of the T architecture in DNA -templated reactions,the efficiency of the amine acylation, Wittig olefination, 1,3-dipolarcycloaddition, and reductive amination reactions using the Tarchitecture was studied. The T architecture sequence-specificallydirected these four reactions with efficiencies comparable to or greaterthan those of the E or H architectures (FIG. 37, 69-100% yield whenn=1). The observed degree of distance dependence using the Tarchitecture for each of the four reactions was consistent with theabove findings (compare FIG. 37 and FIG. 35). Together these resultsdemonstrate that the T architecture can mediate sequence-specific andefficient DNA-templated synthesis.

Once the ability of the T architecture to support efficientDNA-templated synthesis was established, the ability of the Tarchitecture to direct two DNA-templated reactions on one template inone solution was studied. Two different two-reaction schemes using the Tarchitecture were performed. In the first scheme, depicted in FIG. 38A,a benzaldehyde-linked T template (1) was combined with aphosphine-linked reagent (2) and an α-iodoamide-linked reagent (3) in asingle solution (pH 8.5, 1 M NaCl, at 25° C. for 1 hour). Thephosphine-linked oligonucleotide complemented ten bases of the template5′ of the aldehyde (n=−4), while the iodide-link-ed oligonucleotidecomplemented ten bases 3′ of the aldehyde (n=0). DNA-templated S_(N)2reaction between the phosphine and α-iodoamide generated thecorresponding phosphorane, which then participated in a DNA-templatedWittig reaction to generate cinnanamide 4 in 52% overall yield after 1hour (FIG. 38B, lanes 9-10). Control reactions containing sequencemismatches in either reagent generated no detectable product. Theadditional control reaction lacking the aldehyde group on the templategenerated only the S_(N)2 reaction product (FIG. 38B, lanes 3-4) whilecontrol reactions lacking either the phosphine group or the α-iodoamidegroup did not generate any detectable products (FIG. 38B, lanes 5-8).

In a second two-reaction scheme mediated by the T architecture, depictedin FIG. 38C, an amine-linked T template (5) was combined with apropargylglycine-linked 5′ reagent (6) at n=−1 and a phenyl azide-linked3′ reagent (7) at n=1. The addition of 20 mM DMT-MM at pH 7.0 to induceamide formation followed by the addition of 500 μM copper(II) sulfateand sodium ascorbate to induce the recently reported Sharpless-modifiedHuisgen 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition provided 1,4-disubstituted triazoylalanine adduct 8 in 32% overall yield.

Taken together, these observations show that the T architecture permitstwo sequence-specific DNA-templated reactions to take place on onetemplate in one solution. Importantly, the T architecture templatesdescribed above were accepted as efficient templates for both a singlecycle of primer extension as well as standard PCR amplification usingTaq DNA polymerase, consistent with the known tolerance of several DNApolymerases for modifications to the non-Watson-Crick face of DNAtemplates. In addition to reducing the number of separate DNA-templatedsteps needed to synthesize a target structure, this architecture mayalso permit three-component reactions commonly used to build structuralcomplexity in synthetic libraries to be performed in a DNA-templatedformat.

In summary, the Ω and T architectures significantly expand the scope ofDNA-templated synthesis. By enabling distance-dependent DNA-templatedreactions to be encoded by bases far away from the reactive end of thetemplate, the omega architecture expands the types of reactions that canbe encoded anywhere on a DNA template. The T architecture permits twoDNA-templated reactions to take place on a single template in one step.

Materials and Methods

Oligonucleotide synthesis. Unless otherwise specified, DNAoligonucleotides were synthesized and functionalized as previouslydescribed using2-[2-(4-monomethoxytrityl)aminoethoxy]ethyl-(2-cyanoethyl)-N,N-diisopropyl-phosphoramidite(Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA) for 5′-functionalizedoligonucleotides, and using(2-dimethoxytrityloxymethyl-6-fluorenylmethoxycarbonylamino-hexane-1-succinoyl)-longchain alkylamino-CPG (Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA) for3′-functionalized oligonucleotides (Calderone et al. (2002) ANGEW. CHEM.INT. ED. ENGL. 41: 4104; (2002) ANGEW. CHEM. 114: 4278). In the case oftemplates for the T architecture, amine groups were added using5′-dimethoxytrityl-5-[N-(trifluoroacetylaminohexyl)-3-acrylimido]-2′-deoxyuridine-3′-[(2-cyanoethyl)-(N,N-diisopropyl)]-phosphoramidite(Glen Research, Sterling, Va. USA and then acylated as reportedpreviously (Calderone et al. (2002) supra).

Amine Acylation. Amine-labeled and carboxylic acid-labeled DNA werecombined in aqueous 100 mM MOPS buffer, 1 M NaCl, pH 7.0 (60 nM intemplate DNA, 120 nM in reagent DNA) in the presence of 20 mM DMT-MM.Reactions proceeded for 12 hours at 25° C.

Wittig Olefination. Aldehyde-labeled and phosphorane-labeled DNA werecombined in aqueous 100 mM MOPS, 1 M NaCl, pH 7.5 (60 nM in templateDNA, 120 nM in reagent DNA). Reactions proceeded for 2 hours at 30° C.

1,3-Dipolar Cycloaddition. Dialdehyde-labeled DNA was incubated in 260mM N-methylhydroxylamine hydrochloride for 1 hour at room temperature(Gartner et al. (2002) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 124: 10304). It wassubsequently combined with succinimide-labeled DNA in aqueous 50 mMMOPS, 2.8 M NaCl, pH 7.5 (final concentrations of N-methylhydroxylaminehydrochloride 0.75 mM, 60 nM in template DNA and 90 nM in reagent DNA).Reactions proceeded for 12 hours at 37° C.

Reductive Amination. Amine-labeled and aldehyde-labeled DNA werecombined in aqueous 100 mM MES buffer, 1 M NaCl, pH 6.0 (60 nM intemplate DNA, 120 nM in reagent DNA). Sodium cyanoborohydride was addedas a 5 M stock in 1 M NaOH to a final concentration of 38 mM, andreactions proceeded for 2 hours at 25° C. Reactions were quenched byethanol precipitation in the presence of 15 mM methylamine.

T Architecture-mediated Conversion of Compound 1 to 4. The5′-phosphine-linked oligonucleotide (2) was generated by couplingN-succinimidyliodoacetate (SIA) to the amine derived from12-(4-monomethoxytritylamino)dodecyl-(2-cyanoethyl)-(N,N-diisopropyl)-phosphoramidite(Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA) using the T (n=−4) oligonucleotidelisted below, followed by treatment with 4-diphenylphosphinobenzoic acidas described previously (Gartner et al. (2002) supra). The3′-Ω-iodoamide-linked reagent (3) was prepared by reacting the T (n=1)oligonucleotide (see below) with SIA as described previously (Gartner etal. (2001) supra). Aldehyde-labeled template (1) was prepared byreacting the “T template” oligonucleotide (see below) with para-formylbenzoic acid N-hydroxysuccinimidyl ester as described previously(Gartner et al. (2002) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 41: 1796; (2002) ANGEW.CHEM. 114: 1874). Template 1 was combined with reagents 2 and 3 inaqueous 200 mM N-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-ethanesulfonic acid)(HEPES) buffer at pH 8.5 with 1 M NaCl, (63 mM template and 125 nM ofeach reagent). Reactions proceeded for up to 1 hour at 25° C.

The results of denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis analysis ofthese reactions is shown in FIG. 38B. The 30-base T architecturetemplate (1) containing an aldehyde group was present in lanes 1-2 andlanes 5-10. A template lacking the aldehyde group but otherwiseidentical to (1) was present in lanes 3 and 4. DNA-linked phosphinereagent (2) was present in lanes 3-6 and lanes 9-10. DNA-linkedα-iodoamide reagent (3) was present in lanes 3-4 and lanes 7-10. Lanes1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 show reactions after 30 minutes. Lanes 2, 4, 6, 8, and10 show reactions after 1 hour.

T Architecture-mediated Conversion of Compound 5 to 8. The5′-propargylglycine linked oligonucleotide (6) was generated bycombining the corresponding T (n=−1) 5′-amine-linked reagentoligonucleotide (see below) with 2 mg/mL bis(sulfosuccinimidyl)suberatein 9:1 200 mM sodium phosphate pH 7.2:DMF for 10 minutes at 25° C.,followed by treatment with 0.3 vol of 300 mM racemic propargylglycine in300 mM NaOH for 2 hours at 25° C. The 3′-azido linked oligonucleotide(7) was generated by combining the T (n=1) amine-linked reagentoligonucleotide (see below) with 2 mg/mL(N-hydroxysuccinimidyl)-4-azidobenzoate in 9:1 200 mM sodium phosphatepH 7.2:DMF for 2 hours at 25° C. Reagents 6 and 7 were purified by gelfiltration and reverse-phase HPLC. Template 5 and reagents 6 and 7 werecombined in aqueous 100 mM MOPS pH 7.0 in the presence of 1 M NaCl and20 mM DMT-MM for 12 hours (60 nM template, 120 nM reagents) at 25° C.Copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate and sodium ascorbate were then added to500 μM each. After 1 hour at 25° C., reactions were quenched by ethanolprecipitation.

DNA Oligonucleotide Sequences Used. E or Ω template: 5′-H₂N-GGT ACG AATTCG ACT CGG GAA TAC CAC CTT [SEΩ ID NO: 58]. H template: 5′-H₂N—CGC GAGCGT ACG CTC GCG GGT ACG AAT TCG ACT CGG GAA TAC CAC CTT [SEQ ID NO: 59].T template: 5′-GGT ACG AAT TCG AC(dT-NH₂) CGG GAA TAC CAC CTT [SEQ IDNO: 60]. E or H reagent (n=1): 5′-AAT TCG TAC C—NH₂ [SEΩ ID NO: 61]. Eor H reagent (n=10): 5′-TCC CGA GTC G-NH₂ [SEΩ ID NO: 62]. E or Hreagent (n=20): 5′-AAG GTG GTA T-NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 63]. Mismatched E or Hreagent: 5′-TCC CTG ATC G-NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 64]. Ω-3 reagent (n=10):5′-TCC CGA GTC GAC C—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 65]. Ω-4 reagent (n=10): 5′-TCC CGAGTC GTA CC—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 66]. Ω-5 reagent (n=10): 5′-TCC CGA GTC GGTACC—NH₂[SEQ ID NO: 67]. Ω-3 reagent (n=20): 5′-AAG GTG GTA TAC C—NH₂[SEQ ID NO: 68]. Ω-4 reagent (n=20): 5′-AAG GTG GTA TTA CC—NH₂ [SEQ IDNO: 69]. Ω-5 reagent (n=20): 5′-AAG GTG GTA TGT ACC—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 70].Mismatched Ω-3 reagent: 5′-TCC CTG ATC GAC C—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 71].Mismatched Ω-4 reagent: 5′-TCC CTG ATC GTA CC—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 72].Mismatched Ω-5 reagent: 5′-TCC CTG ATC GGT ACC—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 73]. Treagent (n=1): 5′-GGT ATT CCC G-NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 74]. T reagent (n=2):5′-TGG TAT TCC C—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 75]. T reagent (n=3): 5′-GTG GTA TTCC—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 76]. T reagent (n=4): 5′-GGT GGT ATT C—NH₂ [SEQ ID NO:77]. T reagent (n=5): 5′-AGG TGG TAT T-NH₂ [SEQ ID NO: 78]. T reagent(n=−1): 5′-NH₂-GTC GAA TTC G [SEQ ID NO: 79]. T reagent (n=−4) for 2:5′-[C₁₂-amine linker]-AAT TCG TAC C [SEQ ID NO: 80].

Reaction yields were quantitated by denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis followed by ethidium bromide staining, UV visualization,and CCD-based densitometry of product and template starting materialbands. Yield calculations assumed that templates and products weredenatured and, therefore, stained with comparable intensity per base;for those cases in which products are partially double-stranded duringquantitation, changes in staining intensity may result in higherapparent yields. Representative reaction products were characterized byMALDI mass spectrometry in addition to denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis.

Melting curves were obtained on a Hewlett-Packard 8453 UV-visiblespectrophotometer using a Hewlett-Packard 89090A Peltierthermocontroller. Absorbances of template-reagent pairs (1.5 μM each) at260 nm were measured every 1° C. from 20° C. to 80° C. holding for 1minute at each temperature in either phosphate-buffered saline (“PBS,”137 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM potassium chloride, 1.4 mM potassium phosphate, 10mM sodium phosphate, pH 7.4) or in high salt phosphate buffer (“HSB,” 50mM sodium phosphate pH 7.2, 1 M NaCl).

Example 6 Stereoselectivity in Nucleic Acid-Templated Synthesis

This Example demonstrates that it is possible to perform stereoselectivenucleic acid-templated syntheses. The chiral nature of DNA raises thepossibility that DNA-templated synthesis can proceed stereoselectivelywithout the assistance of chiral groups beyond those present in DNA,thereby transferring not only sequence but also stereochemicalinformation from the template to the product.

Stereoselectivity was examined in the context of DNA-templatednucleophilic substitution reactions. Hairpin architecture templatesconjugated at their 5′ amino termini directly to (S)- or(R)-2-bromopropionamide were combined with 3′ thiol-linked reagentoligonucleotides at 25° C. (FIG. 39A) (Gartner et al. (2001) supra;Gartner et al. (2003) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 42: 1370). The exactstructure of the hairpin template and its complimentary reagent (FIG.39A) were as follows: Template: 5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TCG CGA GCG TAC [SEQ IDNO: 81] GCT CGC GAG GTA CGA ATT C-3′ Reagent: 5′-GAA TTC GTACC—(CH₂)₃SH-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 82]

The stability of the bromides under the reaction conditions wasconfirmed by several independent methods. Initial rates of thioetherproduct formation were determined by denaturing gel electrophoresis andthe products were additionally characterized by MALDI-TOF massspectrometry. Apparent rates of product formation were 4.0±0.2-foldhigher for (S)-bromide-linked templates than for (R)-bromide-linkedtemplates. Because template-reagent annealing could be partiallyrate-determining, this value is a lower limit of the actual ratio ofk_(S)/k_(R), assuming annealing rates are unaffected by bromidestereochemistry.

Surprisingly, similar preferences favoring the (S)-bromide were alsoobserved using end-of-helix template architectures (FIG. 39B), even when12 nucleotides separated the thiol and bromide in the template-reagentcomplexes. The exact structure of the end-of-helix template and itscomplimentary reagent (FIG. 39B) were as follows: Template:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TAC GCT CGC GAT [SEQ ID NO: 83] GGT ACG AAT TC-3′Reagent: 5′-GAA TTC GTA CC—(CH₂)₃SH-3′

Stereoselectivity appeared to be independent of whether the bromide orthe thiol was conjugated to the template (FIGS. 39B and 39C). The exactstructure of the end-of-helix template conjugated to the thiol and itscomplimentary reagent (FIG. 39C) were as follows: Template: 5′-GAA TTCGTA CAT AGC GCT CGC [SEQ ID NO: 84] AT-(CH₂)₃SH-3′ Reagent:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TGT ACG AAT TC-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 85]

Similar selectivities emerged from pseudo-kinetic resolutions containingboth bromide stereoisomers in which thioether products arising from (S)-and (R)-bromides were distinguished using templates of two distinctlengths (k_(S)/k_(R)=4.2±0.4 to 4.9±0.3). Taken together, these findingsindicate that the chirality of a DNA template can be transferred toproducts of DNA-templated synthesis that do not resemble the DNAbackbone.

In order to probe the origins of the observed stereoselectivity, aseries of template and reagent analogs were synthesized in whichnucleotides near the thiol or bromide were replaced with flexibleachiral linkers. Replacing the 12 template nucleotides separating thebromide and thiol in either of the end-of-helix reactions with anachiral polyethylene glycol linker of similar length (72 bonds) resultedin the loss of stereoselectivity. Stereoselectivity was also abolishedwhen flexible achiral linkers consisting of three or five consecutivemethylene or ether oxygens were inserted between the 5′ end of thetemplate oligonucleotide and the thiol or bromide groups, or between the3′ end of the reagent oligonucleotide and the thiol or bromide. Chirallinkers between reactants, therefore, are required for stereoselectivityin this DNA-templated reaction. These results also suggest that both thethiol and the bromide participate in the rate-determining step of thereaction, consistent with an S_(N) ² mechanism.

The known sensitivity of single- and double-stranded DNA conformationson distal base stacking or base pairing interactions suggests thatgroups distal from the bromide or thiol could play important roles ininducing stereoselectivity. To test these possibilities, 11 of the 12template nucleotides closest to the 5′ bromide were replaced in theend-of-helix reaction with chiral abasic phosphoribose linkers in whichthe aromatic base was replaced with a proton (FIG. 40A). The exactstructure of the end-of-helix template was the same as in FIG. 39,except that bases 2-12 were replaced with abasic phosphoribose units(prepared from the corresponding phosphoramidite from Glen Research,Sterling, Va., USA). Even though the 5′ thymidine nucleotide closest tothe bromide was unchanged, the resulting reactions were notstereoselective, indicating that the nucleotide closest to the bromidewas not sufficient to induce the observed stereoselectivity.

Each of the 11 missing aromatic bases from the 5′ end were then restored(FIG. 40B) and measured rates of (S)-bromide and (R)-bromide reactionfor each resulting template. Surprisingly, no stereoselectivity wasobserved when up to five bases were restored. Stereoselectivityincreased steadily up to k_(S)/k_(R)=4.3 when 6 through 11 bases wererestored (FIG. 40C). Restoration of the missing aromatic bases from the3′ end of the abasic region instead of from the 5′ end also inducedstereoselectivity only after several bases were restored (five to 11bases in this case) (FIG. 40D). Collectively, these findings suggestthat stereoselectivity arises from the conformation of nucleotidesadjacent to either reactant, and that the conformation(s) leading tostereoselectivity require at least 5-6 consecutive aromatic bases.

This model of stereoselectivity predicts that global conformationalchanges in the template-reagent complex may alter stereoselectivity evenif the covalent structure and absolute stereochemistry of all reactantswere preserved. Double-stranded DNA sequences rich in (5-Me-C)G repeatscan adopt a left-handed helix (Z-form) rather than the usualright-handed helix (B-form) at high salt concentrations (Rich et al.(1984) J. ANNU. REV. BIOCHEM. 53: 791-846; Behe et al. (1981) PROC.NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA78: 1619-1623; Mao et al. (1999) NATURE 397:144-146). Bromide-linked (5-Me-C)G-rich hairpin templates andcomplementary thiol-linked reagents protected as unreactive disulfideswere prepared. When combined in equimolar ratios, the circular dichroism(CD) spectra of the resulting template-reagent complexes in low salt(100 mM NaCl) were characteristic of B-form DNA (see, for example, FIG.42D). In the presence of high salt concentrations (5 M NaCl or 2.5 MNa₂SO₄), the same template-reagent complexes exhibited CD spectrarepresentative of Z-form DNA. In contrast, the CD spectra oftemplate-reagent complexes of normal sequence were representative ofB-form DNA under both low salt and high salt conditions (see, forexample, FIG. 42C).

The stereoselectivity of DNA-templated reactions between bromide-linkedtemplates and thiol-linked reagents using either the mixed or(5-Me-C)G-rich sequences was examined in the presence of low or highsalt concentrations. The mixed sequence templates and reagents (B-formDNA) in the presence of low or high salt concentrations favored the(S)-bromide by 4.3- or 3.2-fold, respectively (FIG. 41A). The(5-Me-C)G-rich template and reagent in low salt concentrations (B-formDNA) exhibited a 4.4-fold preference for reaction of the (S)-bromide(FIG. 41A). Remarkably, repeating this reaction in the presence of highsalt concentrations that induce Z-form DNA resulted in a 14-fold changein stereoselectivity now favoring the (R)-bromide by 3.2-fold(k_(S)/k_(R)=0.31) (FIG. 41B). This inversion of stereoselectivity as aresult of changing the handedness of the DNA double helix is consistentwith the theory implicating the conformation of the template and reagentin determining the stereoselectivity of this DNA-templated reaction.

These experiments demonstrate that stereoselectivity can be impartedduring nucleic acid-templated organic synthesis. Conformations of DNAdependent on base stacking together with a partially constrainedpresentation of reactants appear to be responsible for the observedstereoselectivity. These experiments further demonstrate that a singlestructure with one absolute stereochemistry can induce oppositestereoselectivities when its macromolecular conformation is altered.

Oligonucleotides

The exact structures of the templates containing mixed and(5-Me-C)G-rich sequence, and their corresponding reagents used, are asfollows:

Mixed Sequence: Template: 5′-GAA TTC TGG ACA CTT AGC TAT TCA [SEQ ID NO:86] TCG AGC GTA CGC TCG ATG AAT AGC—(CH₂)₃SH-3′ Reagent:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TAA GTG TCC AGA [SEQ ID NO: 87] ATT C-3′ (5-Me-C)G-richsequence: Template: 5′-GAA TTC C*GC* GC*G C*GC* AC*G [SEQ ID NO: 88]C*GC* GC*G C*GG AGC GTA CGC TCC* GC*G C*GC* GC*G-(CH₂)₃SH-3′ Reagent:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TGC* GC*G C*GC* [SEQ ID NO: 89] GGA ATT-3′C* = 5-methyl cytosine. The thiols in both the mixed and (5-Me-C)G-richsequences were protected as disulfides (—(CH₂)₃S—S(CH₂)₃OH) for circulardichroism measurements.DNA Synthesis and Analysis

DNA oligonucleotides were synthesized on a PerSeptive BiosystemsExpedite 8090 DNA synthesizer using standard phosphoramidite protocolsand were purified by reverse phase HPLC with a triethylammonium acetate(TEAA)/CH₃CN gradient. Oligonucleotides were quantitated by WV and bydenaturing PAGE after staining with ethidium bromide. Quantitation ofDNA by denaturing PAGE was performed with a Stratagene Eagle Eye IIdensitometer. Synthetically modified oligonucleotide analogs wereincorporated using the corresponding phosphoramidites or controlled poreglass (CPG) beads purchased from Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA.

DNA Functionalization

2-bromopropionamide-NHS esters. 200 mg N-hydroxysuccinimide (Pierce,Rockford, Ill., USA) was dissolved in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ together with 1.1equivalents of a 2-bromopropionic acid (either racemic, (R)-, or (S)-)and 2 equivalents of 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC)(Aldrich). The 2-bromopropionic acid enantiomers were >95% enantiopureas judged by chiral HPLC (5% isopropanol in hexanes, (R,R) WHELK O1chiral phase, detection at 220 nm). The reaction was maintained at roomtemperature and complete after 1.5 hours as judged by TLC (EtOAc). Thecrude reaction mixture was extracted with 2.5% sodium hydrogen sulfate(NaHSO₄) to remove the excess EDC. The organic phase was washed withbrine, dried over magnesium sulfate (MgSO₄), and concentrated in vacuo.The residue was dried and used directly for DNA functionalization.

5 ′-functionalization of oligonucleotides. An NHS ester prepared asdescribed above was dissolved in DMSO. Up to 150 μg of a 5′-amino DNAoligonucleotide was combined with 3 mg/mL NHS ester (final reaction=10%DMSO) in 200 MM sodium phosphate (pH=7.2) at room temperature for 2hours. The functionalized oligonucleotides were purified by gelfiltration and reverse-phase HPLC, and were characterized by denaturingPAGE and MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry.

3′-thiol modified oligonucleotides. The 3′ thiol group was incorporatedby standard automated DNA synthesis using 3′-disulfide-linked CPG (GlenResearch, Sterling, Va., USA). Following oligonucleotide synthesis, thedisulfide was cleaved with 50 mM DTT, 1M TAPS (pH=8.0) at roomtemperature for I hour and purified by gel filtration before being usedin DNA-templated reactions.

DNA-Templated Reactions

Reactions were performed with 60 nM template and 60 nM reagent in 50 mMMOPS (pH=7.5) and 250 mM NaCl at 25° C. unless otherwise specified.Reaction aliquots were removed at time points from 2 minutes to 120minutes and quenched with excess β-mercaptoethanol. Starting materialsand products were ethanol-precipitated from the quenched reactionmixtures, analyzed by denaturing PAGE, quantified as described above.Relative initial rates of product formation were determined from thefitting the raw yield vs. time data and were used to calculatek_(S)/k_(R). Representative data are shown in FIG. 42.

For the representative data sets shown in FIG. 42, the apparent secondorder rate constants derived from the initial rates are as follows:

FIGS. 39A and 42A:k _(R,app)=1.94×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k _(S,app)=7.07×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k_(rac,app)=4.58×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹

FIGS. 39B and 42B:k _(R,app)=5.83×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k _(S,app)=21.9×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k_(rac,app)=13.6×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹

FIGS. 42C and 44A, low salt:k _(R,app)=4.00×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k _(S,app)=17.6×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k_(rac,app)=9.88×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹

FIGS. 42C and 44A, high salt:k _(R,app)=5.95×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k _(S,app)=18.8×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k_(rac,app)=10.8×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹

FIGS. 42D and 44B, low salt:k _(R,app)=6.11×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k _(S,app)=25.4×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k_(rac,app)=12.1×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹

FIGS. 42D and 44B, high salt:k _(R,app)=24.6×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k _(S,app)=7.66×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹ ; k_(rac,app)=13.6×10³ M⁻¹ s ⁻¹Evaluating Bromide Stability

The structural and configurational stability of the bromides under thereaction conditions was confirmed by several independent methods. Eachbromide-linked template or reagent oligonucleotide was pre-incubated forup to 72 hours at 25° C., and up to 48 hours at 37° C. under thereaction conditions in the absence of thiol. Following thepre-incubation, stereoselectivity was measured as described above andalways found to be unchanged as a result of the pre-incubation. Inaddition, large-scale (250 pmol) quantities of bromide-linked templates((R), (S), and pseudo-racemic) were each incubated under the reactionconditions for 16 hours and analyzed by MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry. Noevidence of bromide displacement (by water or by chloride) was observedas shown in Tables 11 and 12. TABLE 11 End-of-helix template (expectedmass = 7202.1) Isomer Observed Mass (R) bromide: before incubation =7203.3 ± 7 after incubation = 7206.4 ± 7 (S) bromide: before incubation= 7206.0 ± 7 after incubation = 7201.9 ± 7 (±) bromide: mass beforeincubation = 7201.7 ± 7 mass after incubation = 7204.7 ± 7

TABLE 12 Hairpin template (expected mass = 9682.4) Isomer Observed Mass(R) bromide: mass before incubation = 9686.6 ± 10 mass after incubation= 9685.7 ± 10 (S) bromide: mass before incubation = 9683.8 ± 10 massafter incubation = 9680.6 ± 10 (±) bromide: mass before incubation =9680.6 ± 10 mass after incubation = 9684.7 ± 10

Finally, small molecule analogs of the above bromide-linked DNAs (bothenantiomers of N-methyl 2-bromopropionamide) were incubated for 16 hoursunder the reaction conditions and analyzed by chiral HPLC underconditions that resolve the (S)- and (R)-enantiomers. No change inretention time was observed.

Stereoselectivities Using Achiral Flexible Linkers

FIG. 43 shows modified template or reagent structures that result inloss of stereoselectivity during DNA-templated S_(N) ² reactions. In allcases, k_(S,app)/k_(R,app) values fell within the range of 0.95 to 1.09(±0.09), which reflects the mean and standard deviation of at leastthree independent experiments. The exact structures of the templatescontaining achiral linkers and their corresponding reagents were asfollows: FIG. 43A: Template 5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH—[(CH₂)₂O]₂OPO₃— [SEQ ID NO:90] {[(CH₂)₂O]₆OPO₃}₃-GGT ACG AAT TC-3′ Reagent: 5′-GAA TTC GTACC—(CH₂)₃SH-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 91] FIG. 43B: Template: 5′-GAA TTC GTACA-(CH₂)₃OPO₃— [SEQ ID NO: 92] {[(CH₂)₂O]₆OPO₃}₃—(CH₂)₃SH-3′ Reagent:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TGT ACG AAT TC-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 93] FIG. 43C: Template:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH—[(CH₂)₂O]₂OPO₃-AC [SEQ ID NO: 94] GCT CGC GAT GGT ACGAAT TC-3′ Reagent: 5′-GAA TTC GTA CC—(CH₂)₃SH-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 95] FIG.43D: Template: 5′-GAA TTC GTA CAT AGC GCT CGC [SEQ ID NO: 96]A-(CH₂)₃OPO₃—(CH₂)₃SH-3′ Reagent: 5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TGT ACG AAT TC-3′[SEQ ID NO: 97] FIG. 43E: Template: 5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TAC GCT CGC GAT[SEQ ID NO: 98] GGT ACG AAT TC-3′ Reagent: 5′-GAA TTC GTA CC—(CH₂)₃OPO₃—[SEQ ID NO: 99] (CH₂)₃SH-3′ FIG. 43F: Template: 5′-GAA TTC GTA CAT AGCGCT CGC [SEQ ID NO: 100] AT-(CH₂)₃SH-3′ Reagent:5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH—[(CH₂)₂O]₂OPO₃- [SEQ ID NO: 101] TGT ACG AAT TC-3′Circular Dichroism (CD) of B-DNA and Z-DNA

The DNA templates and reagents were prepared as described above.Thiol-linked reagents were not deprotected and remained in theirdisulfide forms during CD analysis. CD samples contained 215 nM templateand 215 nM protected reagent in 50 mM phosphate buffer (pH=7.5) witheither 100 mM or 5 M NaCl. A background sample lacking DNA was alsoprepared for each sample. The CD measurements were performed in a 1 mmpath cuvette at 25° C. scanning from 360 nm to 200 nm at 2 nm/sec on aJASCO polarized spectrometer with a 2.0 nm resolution. The resulting CDspectra of B-form and Z-form template-reagent complexes are shown inFIG. 44. FIG. 44A shows circular dichroism (CD) spectra oftemplate-reagent complexes containing normal (mixed composition)sequences which are characteristic of B-DNA. FIG. 44B shows CD spectraof (5-Me-C)G-rich complexes having a B-DNA conformation at low saltconcentrations, and having a Z-DNA conformation at high saltconcentrations. The exact structures of the templates containing mixedand (5-Me-C)G-rich sequence, and their corresponding reagents used, areas follows:

Mixed sequence: Template: 5′-GAA TTC TGG ACA CTT AGC TAT TCA [SEQ ID NO:102] TCG AGC GTA CGC TCG ATG AAT AGC—(CH₂)₃SH-3′

(The thiol was protected as a disulfide [(CH₂)₃S—S(CH₂)₃OH] for circulardichroism measurements). Reagent: 5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TAA GTG TCC AGA [SEQID NO: 103] ATT C-3′ (5-Me-C)G-rich sequence: Template: 5′-GAA TTC C*GC*GC*G C*GC* AC*G [SEQ ID NO: 104] C*GC* GC*G C*GG AGC GTA CGC TCC* GC*GC*GC* GC*G-(CH₂)₃SH-3′

(The thiol was protected as a disulfide [(CH₂)₃S—S(CH₂)₃OH]for circulardichroism measurements) Reagent: 5′-BrCH(CH₃)CONH-TGC* GC*G C*GC* [SEQID NO: 105] GGA ATT-3′C* = 5-methyl cytosineStereoselectivity Induced by B-Form and Z-Form DNA

FIG. 45 shows a representative denaturing gel electrophoresis analysisof reactions using the CG-rich sequences at 100 mM NaCl (lanes 1-3) orat 5 M NaCl (lanes 4-6) (6 hour time point). Lanes 1 and 4: racemicbromide; lanes 2 and 5: (R)-bromide; lanes 3 and 6: (S)-bromide. Thebromide-linked reagent is not visible. Similar results were observedusing Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl.

DNA-Templated Reactions in the Presence of Na₂SO₄ Instead of NaCl

In order to ascertain that the observed stereoselectivities were notaffected by the presence of chloride, the experiments shown in FIGS. 39and 44 were repeated in the presence of Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl (keepingthe concentration of sodium constant). The results of three independenttrials were very similar to those reported in the presence of NaCl, andare as follows:

-   -   FIG. 39A with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl: k_(S)/k_(R)=5.4±0.5    -   FIG. 39B with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl: k_(S)/k_(R)=3.9±0.3    -   FIG. 39C with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl: k_(S)/k_(R)=4.7±0.7    -   FIG. 44A, low salt with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl:        k_(S)/k_(R)=3.7±0.7    -   FIG. 44A, high salt with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl:        k_(S)/k_(R)=3.1±0.6    -   FIG. 44B, low salt with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl:        k_(S)/k_(R)=3.6±0.5    -   FIG. 44B, high salt with Na₂SO₄ instead of NaCl:        k_(S)/k_(R)=0.25±0.03        MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry of Representative Products

The products from the representative DNA-templated reactions (240 pmolscale) in FIG. 39 were purified by preparative denaturing polyacrylamidegel electrophoresis followed by extraction with 0.1 M triethylammoniumacetate at 37° C. overnight. The lyophilized products were subjected toMALDI-TOF mass spectrometry, the results of which are summarized inTable 13. In all cases the observed mass is consistent with the expectedmass. TABLE 13 Figure Expected Mass Observed Mass 39A 13067.5 13015.6 ±65 39B 10562.0 10587.2 ± 53 39C 10558.1 10600.1 ± 53

Example 7 Directing Otherwise Incompatible Reactions in a SingleSolution

This Example demonstrates that oligonucleotides can simultaneouslydirect several different synthetic reaction types within the samesolution, even though the reactants involved would be cross-reactiveand, therefore, incompatible under traditional synthesis conditions.These findings also demonstrate that it is possible to perform a one-potdiversification of synthetic library precursors into products usingmultiple, simultaneous and not necessarily compatible reaction types.

The ability of DNA templates to mediate diversification using differentreaction types without spatial separation was initially tested bypreparing three oligonucleotide templates of different DNA sequences(1a-3a) functionalized at their 5′ ends with maleimide groups and threeoligonucleotide reagents (4a-6a) functionalized at their 3′ ends with anamine, thiol, or nitroalkane group, respectively (FIG. 46). The DNAsequences of the three reagents each contained a different 10-baseannealing region that was complementary to ten bases near the 5′ end ofeach of the templates. Combining 1a with 4a, 2a with 5a, or 3a with 6ain three separate vessels at pH 8.0 resulted in the expectedDNA-templated amine conjugate addition, thiol conjugate addition, ornitro-Michael addition products 7-9 (FIG. 46, lanes 1-3).

To distinguish the nine possible reaction products that could begenerated upon combining la-6a, the lengths of template oligonucleotideswere varied to include 11, 17, or 23 bases and the lengths of reagentoligonucleotides were varied to include 14, 16, or 18 bases. Differencesin oligonucleotide length were achieved using extensions distal from thereactive groups that did not significantly affect the efficiency ofDNA-templated reactions. This design permitted all nine possiblereaction products (linked to 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, or 41 basesof DNA) to be distinguished by denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis.

A solution containing all three templates (1a-3a) was combined with asolution containing all three reagents (4a-6a) at pH 8.0. The resultingreaction exclusively generated the three desired products 7, 8, and 9 oflengths 25, 33, and 41 bases indicating that only the three reactionscorresponding to the complementary template-reagent pairs took place(FIG. 46, lane 4). Formation of the other six possible reaction productswas not detected by densitometry (<5% reaction). In contrast,individually reacting templates and reagents containing the same, ratherthan different, 10-base annealing regions permitted the formation of allpossible products (FIG. 46, lane 5). This result demonstrates theability of DNA-templated synthesis to direct the selective one-pottransformation of a single functional group into three distinct types ofproducts (in this Example, maleimide into secondary amine, thioether, ora-branched nitroalkane).

To test the ability of this diversification mode to support one-potreactions requiring non-DNA-linked accessory reagents, an analogousexperiment was conducted with two aldehyde-linked reagents either 14 or16 bases in length (4b or 5b, respectively) and a complementary 11-baseamine-linked template (1b) or a 17-base phosphorane-linked template(2b). Combining 1b and 4b at pH 8.0 in the presence of 3 mM NaBH₃CNresulted in the DNA-templated reductive amination product 10, while 2band 5b under the same conditions generated Wittig olefination product 11(FIG. 46). Mixing all four reactants together in one pot resulted in anidentical product distribution as the combined individual Wittigolefination or reductive amination reactions (FIG. 46). No reactionbetween amine 1b and aldehyde 5b or between phosphorane 2b and aldehyde4b was detected (FIG. 46, lane 8 versus lane 9).

The generality of this approach was explored by including multiplereaction types that required different accessory reagents. Threeamine-linked templates (1c-3c) of length 11, 17, or 23 bases werecombined with an aldehyde-, carboxylic acid-, or maleimide-linkedreagent (4c-6c) 14, 16, or 18 bases in length, respectively, at pH 8.0in the presence of 3 mM NaBH₃CN, 10 mM1-(3-dimethyl-aminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC), and 7.5 mMN-hydroxylsulfosuccinimide (sulfo-NHS). The reactions containing all sixreactants afforded the same three reductive amination, amine acylation,or conjugate addition products (12-14) that were generated from theindividual reactions containing one template and one reagent and did notproduce detectable quantities of the six possible undesired productsarising from non-DNA-templated reactions (FIG. 46, lanes 10-14).Collectively, these results indicate that DNA- templated synthesis candirect simultaneous reactions between several mutually cross-reactivegroups in a single pot to yield only the sequence-programmed subset ofmany possible products.

The above three examples each diversified a single functional group(maleimide, aldehyde, or amine) into products of different reactiontypes. A more general format for the one-pot diversification of aDNA-templated synthetic library into products of multiple reaction typeswould involve the simultaneous reaction of different functional groupslinked to both reagents and templates. To examine this possibility, sixDNA-linked nucleophile templates (15-20) and six DNA-linked electrophilereagents (21-25) collectively encompassing all of the functional groupsused in the above three examples (amine, aldehyde, maleimide, carboxylicacid, nitroalkane, phosphorane, and thiol) were prepared (FIG. 47).These twelve DNA-linked reactants could, in theory, undergo simultaneousamine conjugate addition, thiol conjugate addition, nitro-Michaeladdition, reductive amination, amine acylation, and Wittig olefinationin the same pot, although the apparent second order rate constants ofthese six reactions vary by more than 10-fold.

Determining the outcome of combining all twelve reagents and templatesin a single pot by using oligonucleotides of varying lengths isdifficult due the large number (at least 28) of possible products thatcould be generated. Accordingly, the length of the reagents as 15, 20,25, 30, 35, or 40 bases were varied but the length of the templates wasfixed at 11 bases (FIG. 47). Each of the six complementarytemplate-reagent pairs when reacted separately at pH 8.0 in the presenceof 3 mM NaBH₃CN, 10 mM EDC, and 7.5 mM sulfo-NHS generated the expectedamine conjugate addition, thiol conjugate addition, nitro-Michaeladdition, reductive amination, amine acylation, or Wittig olefinationproducts (FIG. 47). Reaction efficiencies were greater than 50% relativeto the corresponding individual reactions despite having to compromisebetween differing optimal reaction conditions. Templates 15-20 were alsoprepared in a 3′-biotinylated form. The biotinylated templatesdemonstrated reactivities indistinguishable from those of theirnon-biotinylated counterparts (FIG. 47).

Six separate reactions each containing twelve reactants then wereperformed at pH 8.0 in the presence of 3 mM NaBH₃CN, 10 mM EDC, and 7.5mM sulfo-NHS (FIG. 48). Each reaction contained a different biotinylatedtemplate (15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20) together with five non-biotinylatedtemplates (from 15-20) and six reagents (21-25). These reactions wereinitiated by combining a solution containing 15-20 with a solutioncontaining 21-25. The products that arose from each biotinylatedtemplate were captured with streptavidin-coated magnetic beads andidentified by denaturing gel electrophoresis. Because the six reagentsin each reaction contained oligonucleotides of unique lengths, theformation of any reaction products involving the biotinylated templatesand any of the reagents could be detected. In all six cases, thebiotinylated template formed only the single product programmed by itsDNA sequence (FIG. 48) despite the possibility of forming up to fiveother products in each reaction. Taken together, these findings indicatethat reactions of significantly different rates requiring a variety ofnon-DNA-linked accessory reagents can be directed by DNA-templatedsynthesis in the same solution, even when both templates and reagentscontain several different cross-reactive functional groups. The abilityof DNA templates to direct multiple reactions at concentrations thatexclude non-templated reactions from proceeding at appreciable ratesmimics, in a single solution, a spatially separated set of reactions.

Compared to the use of traditional synthetic methods, generatinglibraries of small molecules by DNA-templated synthesis is limited byseveral factors including the need to prepare DNA-linked reagents, therestriction of aqueous, DNA-compatible chemistries, and the reliance oncharacterization methods such as mass spectrometry and electrophoresisthat are appropriate for molecular biology-scale (pg to μg) reactions.On the other hand, DNA-templated synthesis (i) allows the direct invitro selection (as opposed to screening) and amplification of syntheticmolecules with desired properties, (ii) permits the preparation ofsynthetic libraries of unprecedented diversity, and (iii) requires onlyminute quantities of material for selection and identification of activelibrary members. In addition, this Example demonstrates that potentiallyuseful modes of reactivity not possible using current synthetic methodscan be achieved in a DNA-templated format. For example, six differenttypes of reactions can be performed simultaneously in one solution,provided that required non-DNA-linked accessory reagents are compatible.This reaction mode permits the diversification of synthetic smallmolecule libraries using different reaction types in a single solution.

Materials and Methods

Synthesis of Templates and Reagents

Oligonucleotides were synthesized using standard automated solid-phasetechniques. Modified phosphoramidites and controlled-pore glass supportswere obtained from Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA. Unless otherwisenoted, functionalized templates and reagents were synthesized byreacting 5′-H₂N(CH₂O)₂ terminated oligonucleotides (for templates) or3′-OPO₃—CH₂CH(CH₂OH)(CH₂)₄NH₂ terminated oligonucleotides (for reagents)in a 9:1 mixture of aqueous 200 mM pH 7.2 sodium phosphate buffer:DMFcontaining 2 mg/mL of the appropriate N-hydroxysuccinimide ester(Pierce, Rockford, Ill., USA) at 25° C.

For the aldehyde and nitroalkane-linked oligonucleotides (4b, 4c, 5b,6a, 17, 24, and 26, FIGS. 46 and 47) the NHS esters were generated bycombining the appropriate carboxylic acid (900 mM in DMF) with equalvolumes of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (900 mM in DMF) and NHS (900 mM inDMF) for 90 minutes. Phosphorane-linked oligonucleotides (2b and 20,FIGS. 46 and 47) were prepared by a 90 minute reaction of theappropriate amino-terminated oligonucleotide with 0.1 volumes of a 20mg/mL DMF solution of the NHS ester of iodoacetic acid (SIA, Pierce,Rockford, Ill., USA) in pH 7.2 buffer as above, followed by addition of0.1 volumes of a 20 mg/mL solution of 4-diphenylphosphinobenzoic acid inDMF. Thiol-linked template 16 was synthesized by reacting ethyleneglycol bis(succinimidylsuccinate) (EGS, Pierce, Rockford, Ill., USA)with the appropriate oligonucleotide for 15 minutes, followed byaddition of 0.1 volumes of 300 mM 2-aminoethanethiol. Reagent 5a wassynthesized using 3′-OPO₃—(CH₂)₃SS(CH₂)₃ODMT functionalizedcontrolled-pore glass (CPG) support and reduced prior to use accordingto the manufacturer's protocol.

The 3′-biotinylated oligonucleotides were prepared using biotin-TEG CPG(Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA). Products arising from biotinylatedtemplates were purified by mixing with 1.05 equivalents ofstreptavidin-linked magnetic beads (Roche), washing twice with 4 Mguanidinium hydrochloride, and eluting with aqueous 10 mM Tris pH 7.6with 1 mM biotin at 80° C.

Synthesis of Linkers

Linkers between DNA oligonucleotides and the functional groups in 1a-6care as follows. 1b and 1c: DNA-5′-NH₂; 1a. 2a-2c. 3a, and 3c:DNA-5-O(CH₂)₂O(CH₂)₂—NH—; 5a: DNA-3′-O—(CH₂)₃SH; 4a-4c, 5b, 5c, 6a, and6c: DNA-3-O—CH₂CH(CH₂OH)(CH₂)₄NH—. Oligonucleotide sequences used togenerate all possible products in FIG. 46 (lanes 5, 9, and 14), withannealing regions underlined: R-TATCTACAGAG-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 106] (1a-1c);R-TATCTACAGAGTAGTCT-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 107] (2a-2c);R-TATCTACAGAGTAGTCTAATGAC-3′ [SEQ ID NO: 108] (3a-3c);5′-CAGCCTCTGTAGAT-R [SEQ ID NO: 109] (4a-4c); 5′-CTCAGCCTCTGTAGAT-R [SEQID NO: 110] (5a-5c); 5′-GGCTCAGCCTCTGTAGAT-R [SEQ ID NO: 111] (6a-6c).Functionalized templates and reagents were purified by gel filtration(Sephadex G-25) followed by reverse-phase HPLC (0.1 M triethylammoniumacetate/acetonitrile gradient). Representative functionalized templatesand reagents were further characterized by MALDI mass spectrometry.

Reaction Conditions

All reactions were performed by dissolving reagents and templates inseparate vessels in pure water before combining them into a solution of50 mM aqueous TAPS buffer, pH 8.0, 250 mM NaCl at 25° C. for 16 hourswith DNA-linked reactants at 60 nM (FIG. 47) or at 12.5 nM (FIGS. 47 and48). NaBH₃CN, EDC, and sulfo-NHS were present when appropriate asdescribed. Products were analyzed by denaturing polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis using ethidium bromide staining and WVtransillumination. Differences in charge states, attached functionalgroups, and partial secondary structure resulted in modest variations ingel mobility for different functionalized oligonucleotides of the samelength (FIGS. 46-48).

Example 8 DNA-Templated Functional Group Transformations

While coupling reactions are useful for building molecular diversity,the development of DNA-templated functional group transformations cansignificantly expand the types of structures that can be generated.DNA-templated synthesis can be used to transform functional groups byunmasking or interconverting functionalities used in coupling reactions.By exposing or creating a reactive group within a sequence-programmedsubset of a library, DNA-templated functional group interconversionspermit library diversity to be generated by sequential unmasking (FIG.49). In FIG. 49, PG1-PG3 represent three different protecting groups,and A-F represent reactants capable of reacting with deprotectedfunctionalities of a scaffold molecule. The sequential unmaskingapproach offers the major advantage of permitting reactants that wouldnormally lack the ability to be linked to DNA (for example. simple alkylhalides) to contribute to library diversity by reacting with asequence-specified subset of templates in an intermolecular,non-templated reaction mode. This advantage significantly increases thetypes of structures that can be generated. On the other hand, sequentialunmasking has the drawback of requiring more manipulations per “step”because previously used small molecule reactants must be removed betweenDNA-templated functional group unmaskings. This removal can be rapidlyperformed on the entire library using a simple gel filtration cartridge.

DNA-Templated Deprotection

The first class of DNA-templated functional group transformationssequence-specifically unmask amine, thiol, alcohol, carboxylate, oraldehyde groups from protected forms. In the Staudinger reaction, azidesreact with phosphines to yield aza-ylides (Staudinger et al. (1919)HELV. CHEM. ACTA. 2: 635-646). When this reaction is performed inaqueous media, the aza-ylides undergo spontaneous hydrolysis to provideamines and phosphine oxides (Scriven et al. (1988) CHEM. REV. 88:297-368). DNA-linked aryl and alkyl phosphine reagents, when combinedwith azide-linked DNA templates, permit sequence-specific aminedeprotection (FIG. 50A). DNA-linked phosphines and DNA-linked azideshave both been used successfully in previous DNA-templated reactions. Asan alternative DNA-templated amine deprotection, the nucleophilicaromatic ipso-substitution of o-nitrobenzenesulfonamides (prepared fromamines and commercially available o-nitrobenzene sulfonylchloride) canyield free amines (FIG. 50B). This reaction is known to proceedefficiently in the presence of deprotonated thiophenols, so at pH>8 theDNA-templated attack of thiophenol-linked reagents ono-nitrobenzenesulfonamide-linked templates can permit sequence-specificamine deprotection (Fukuyama et al. (1999) SYNLETT 8: 1301-1303).

Once optimized, DNA-templated amine deprotection reactions can beextended to include deprotection reactions for alcohols and thiols.Kusumoto and co-workers have reported that 4-aminobutyryl esters undergospontaneous intramolecular lactam formation to afford 2-pyrrolidinoneand the liberated hydroxyl group in excellent yields (Kusumoto et al.(1986) BULL. CHEM. SOC. JPN. 59: 1296-1298). Kahne and co-workers haveused this reaction effectively in aqueous media (Thomson et al. (1999)J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 121: 1237-1244). A t)NA-templated hydroxyl groupdeprotection is shown in FIG. 50C. If lactam formation is slow, thereaction can be heated or Lewis acids can be added since sequencespecificity is not required after amine deprotection. An analogousDNA-templated thiol deprotection that uses 4-azidobutyryl thioesters isshown in FIG. 50C. It is contemplated that these groups will be stableto hydrolysis under a wide range of conditions.

Palladium-mediated deallylation can also be used in DNA-templatedcarboxylate, amine, hydroxyl, or thiol deprotections. Allyloxycarbonyl(Alloc) esters, carbonates, thiocarbonates, and carbamates are treatedwith DNA-linked Pd ligands such as the2,2′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl (BINAP) reagent as shown inFIG. 50D (prepared from the known BINAP-6-butanoic acid) in the presenceof pM to μM concentrations of water-soluble Pd sources such as Na₂PdCl(Bayston et al. (1998) J. ORG. CHEM. 63: 3137-3140). The DNA-linked Pdligands increase the effective molarity of Pd at complementarytemplates, but not at mismatched templates, to permit thesequence-specific deprotection of carboxylate, hydroxyl, thiol, andamine groups from the corresponding Alloc esters, carbonates,thiocarbonates, and carbamates, respectively (FIG. 50D) (Genêt et al.(1994) TETRAHEDRON 50: 497-503). It is particularly encouraging that therates of BINAP ligand dissociation from Pd have been measured duringPd-mediated aryl aminations and found to be much slower than the ratesof association and dissociation of substrate and products (Singh et al.(2002) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 124: 14104-14114). The Pd source and theDNA-linked Pd ligands can be pre-incubated at high concentrations, andthen the resulting complexes added either to complementary or mismatchedtemplates at 60 nM concentrations. This procedure also results insequence-specific Alloc deprotection if ligand-metal dissociation isslow relative to DNA annealing and Pd-catalyzed deallylation.

Finally, transition metal salts including Sc³⁺ and Yb³⁺ are known tocatalyze acetal hydrolysis to yield aldehydes (Fukuzawa et al. (2001)CHEM. LETT. 5: 430-436). Conjugating the crown ether shown in FIG. 50Eto oligonucleotides permits DNA-templated aldehyde deprotections in thepresence of lanthanide triflates. These crown ether-Ln³⁺ complexes havebeen previously reported to catalyze aqueous aldol reactions whilecompletely sequestering one equivalent of Ln³⁺ (Kobayashi et al. (2001)ORG. LETT. 3). Aldehyde deprotection is highly sequence-specific becausethe concentration of free Ln³⁺ should be negligible.

DNA-Templated Functional Group Interconversions

The second class of DNA-templated functional group transformationsinterconverts groups generated from or used by DNA-templated reactions.Two functional group interconversions are shown in FIG. 51.Ruthenium(II) porphyrins in the presence of 2,6-disubstituted pyridineN-oxides catalyze the remarkably efficient epoxidation of a wide varietyof simple and electron-deficient olefins (Higuchi et al. (1989)TETRAHEDRON LETT. 30: 6545-6548; Groves et al. (1985) J. AM. CHEM. SOC.107: 5790-5792; Zhang et al. (2002) ORG. LETT. 4: 1911-1914; Yu et al.(2000) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 122: 5337-5342). Single-stranded DNA is stablein the presence of aqueous tetrakis(4-carboxyphenyl) porphyrin complexedwith Ru(II), and Ru(II)-DNA conjugates have been previously reported(Hartmann et al. (1997) J. BIOL. INORG. CHEM. 2: 427-432; Pascaly et al.(2002) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 124: 9083-9092). DNA-templated olefinepoxidations using DNA-linked Ru(II) porphyrin catalysts are shown inFIG. 51A, which are prepared by coupling commercially availabletetrakis(4-carboxyphenyl) porphyrin to amine-terminated oligonucleotides(Holmlin et al. (1999) BIOCONJUG. CHEM. 10: 1122-1130). The resultingDNA-linked porphyrin is metalated with Ru₃(CO)₁₂ as described previouslyto afford the reagent shown in FIG. 51A. This functional groupinterconversion bridges several versatile reactions by permittingproducts of DNA-templated Wittig olefinations and Heck couplings tobecome substrates for epoxide addition reactions.

As a second functional group interconversion, lanthanidetriflate-catalyzed aqueous Diels-Alder and hetero Diels-Aldercycloadditions proceed efficiently in water, and DNA-linked Lewis acidchelators such as binapthol, bis-trifylamides, or the crown ether shownin FIG. 50E permit the sequence-specific Diels-Alder reaction between atemplate-linked aldehyde and a free diene in solution (FIG. 51B). WhenDanishefsky's diene is used, this functional group transformationprovides α,β unsaturated ketones that serve as substrates for subsequentDNA-templated conjugate addition reactions. Fully coordinated Ln³⁺complexes (such as those that arise from the crown ether) have beenreported to be kinetically stable yet permit efficient catalysis throughfacile ligand exchange (Chappell et al. (1998) INORG. CHEM. 37:3989-3998). Moreover, DNA-linked lanthanide complexes have beenpreviously used as stable luminescent agents in aqueous solutions and,therefore, these complexes are compatible with the functionality presentin DNA (Li et al. (1 997) BIOCONJUG. CEM. 8: 127-132).

Example 9 Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds and Libraries of Compounds

A) Synthesis of a Polycarbamate Library

This Example demonstrates a strategy for producing an amplifiablepolycarbamate library.

Overview

Of the sixteen possible dinucleotide codons used to encode the library,one is assigned a start codon function, and one is assigned to serve asa stop codon. An artificial genetic code then is created assigning eachof the up to 14 remaining dinucleotides to a different monomer. Forgeometric reasons one monomer actually contains a dicarbamate containingtwo side chains. Within each monomer, the dicarbamate is attached to thecorresponding dinucleotide (analogous to a tRNA anticodon) through asilyl enol ether linker which liberates the native DNA and the freecarbamate upon treatment with fluoride.

The dinucleotide moiety exists as the activated 5′-2-methylimidazolephosphate, that has been demonstrated to serve as an excellent leavinggroup for template-directed oligomerization of nucleotides yet isrelatively stable under neutral or basic aqueous conditions (Inoue etal. (1982) J. MOL. BIOL. 162: 201; Rembold et al.(1994) J. MOL. EVOL.38: 205; Chen et al. (1985) J. MOL. BIOL. 181: 271; Acevedo et al.(1987) J. MOL. BIOL. 197: 187; Inoue et al. (1981) J. AM. CHEM. SOC.103: 7666; Schwartz et al.(I985) SCIENCE 228: 585). The dicarbamatemoiety exists in a cyclic form linked through a vinyloxycarbonatelinker. The vinylcarbonate group has been demonstrated to be stable inneutral or basic aqueous conditions and further has been shown toprovide carbamates in very high yields upon the addition of aminesOlofson et al.(1977) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 18: 1563; Olofson et al.(1977)TETRAHEDRON LETT. 18: 1567; Olofson et al. (1977) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 18:1571).

When attacked by an amine from a nascent polycarbamate chain, the vinylcarbonate linker, driven by the aromatization of m-cresol, liberates afree amine. This free amine subsequently serves as the nucleophile toattack the next vinyloxycarbonate, propagating the polymerization of thegrowing carbamate chain. Such a strategy minimizes the potential forcross-reactivity and bi-directional polymerization by ensuring that onlyone nucleophile is present at any time during polymerization.

Using the monomer described above, artificial translation of DNA into apolycarbamate can be viewed as a three-stage process. In the firststage, single stranded DNA templates encoding the library are used toguide the assembly of the dinucleotide moieties of the monomers,terminating with the “stop” monomer which possesses a 3′methyl etherinstead of a 3′hydroxyl group (FIG. 52).

Once the nucleotides have assembled, the “start” monomer ending in ao-nitrobenzylcarbamates is photodeprotected to reveal the primary aminethat initiates carbamate polymerization. Polymerization proceeds in the5′ to 3′ direction along the DNA backbone, with each nucleophilic attackresulting in the subsequent unmasking of a new amine nucleophile. Attackof the “stop” monomer liberates an acetamide rather than an amine,thereby terminating polymerization (FIG. 53). Because the DNA at thisstage exists in a stable double-stranded form, variables such astemperature and pH may be explored to optimize polymerizationefficiency.

Following polymerization, the polycarbamate can be cleaved from thephosphate backbone of the DNA upon treatment with fluoride. Desilylationof the enol ether linker and the elimination of the phosphate driven bythe resulting release of phenol provides the polycarbamate covalentlylinked at its carboxy terminus to its encoding single-stranded DNA (FIG.54).

At this stage, the polycarbamate may be completely liberated from theDNA by base hydrolysis of the ester linkage. The liberated polycarbamatecan be purified by HPLC and retested to verify that its desiredproperties are intact. The free DNA can be amplified using PCR, mutatedwith error-prone PCR (Cadwell et al.(1992) PCR METHODS APPL. 2: 28) orDNA shuffling (Stemmer (1994) PROC. NATL. ACAD. Sci. USA91: 10747;Stemmer (1994) NATURE 370: 389; U.S. Pat. No. 5,811,238), and/orsequenced to reveal the primary structure of the polycarbamate polymer.

Synthesis of Monomer Units

After the monomers are synthesized, the assembly and polymerization ofthe monomers on the DNA scaffold should occur spontaneously. Shikimicacid 1, available commercially, biosynthetically (Davis (1955) ADV.ENZYMOL. 16: 287), or by short syntheses from D-mannose (Fleet et al.(1984) J. CHEM. SOC. 905; Harvey et al.(I991) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 32: 4111), serves as a convenient starting point for the monomer synthesis. Thesyn hydroxyl groups are protected as the p-methoxybenzylidene, andremaining hydroxyl group as the tert-butyldimethylsilyl ether to afford2. The carboxylate moiety of the protected shikimic acid then iscompletely reduced by lithium aluminum hydride (LAH) reduction,tosylation of the resulting alcohol, and further reduction with LAH toprovide 3.

Commercially available and synthetically accessible N-protected aminoacids can serve as the starting materials for the dicarbamate moiety ofeach monomer. Reactive side chains are protected as photolabile ethers,esters, acetals, carbamates, or thioethers. Using chemistry previouslydeveloped (Cho et al. (1993) SCIENCE 261: 1303), a desired amino acid 4is converted to the corresponding amino alcohol 5 by mixed anhydrideformation with isobutylchloroformate followed by reduction with sodiumborohydride. The amino alcohol then is converted to the activatedcarbonate by treatment with p-nitrophenylchloroformate to afford 6,which then is coupled to a second amino alcohol 7 to provide, followinghydroxyl group silylation and FMOC deprotection, carbamate 8.

Coupling of carbamate 8 onto the shikimic acid-derived linker proceedsas follows. The allylic hydroxyl group of 3 is deprotected withtetra-butylammonium fluoride (TBAF), treated with triflic anhydride toform the secondary triflate, then displaced with aminocarbamate 8 toafford 9. Presence of the vinylic methyl group in 3 should assist inminimizing the amount of undesired product resulting from S_(N) ²′addition (Magid (1980) TETRAHEDRON 36: 1901). Michael additions ofdeprotonated carbamates to α,β-unsaturated esters have been welldocumented (Collado et al. (1994) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 35: 8037; Hirama etal. (1985) J. AM. C_(sc HEM). SOC. 107: 1797; Nagasaka et al.(1989)HETEROCYCLES 29: 155; Shishido et al.(1987) J. CHEM. SOC. 993; Hirama etal.(1989) HETEROCYCLES 28: 1229). By analogy, the secondary amine isprotected as the o-nitrobenzyl carbamate (NBOC), and the resultingcompound is deprotonated at the carbamate nitrogen. This deprotonationcan typically be performed with either sodium hydride or potassiumtert-butyloxide (Collado et al. (1994) supra; Hirama et al.(1985) supra;Nagasaka et al. (1989) supra; Shishido et al.(1987) supra; Hirama et al.(1989) supra), although other bases may be utilized to minimizedeprotonation of the nitrobenzylic protons. Additions of thedeprotonated carbamate to α,β-unsaturated ketone 10, followed bytrapping of the resulting enolate with tert-butyldimethyl silyl chloride(TBSCl), should afford silyl enol ether 11. The previously foundstereoselectivity of conjugate additions to 5-substituted enones such as10 (House et al.(1968) J. ORG. CHEM. 33: 949; Still et al. (1981)TETRAHEDRON 37: 3981) suggests that 11 should be formed preferentiallyover its diastereomer. Ketone 10, the precursor to thefluoride-cleavable carbamate-phosphate linker, may be synthesized from 2by one pot decarboxylation (Barton et al.(1985) TETRAHEDRON 41: 3901)followed by treatment with tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF), Swernoxidation of the resulting alcohol to afford 12, deprotection with2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone (DDQ), selective nitrobenzylether formation of the less-hindered alcohol, and reduction of theα-hydroxyl group with samarium iodide (Molander (1994) ORGANIC REACTIONS46: 211).

The p-methoxybenzylidiene group of 11 is transformed into the α-hydroxyp-methoxybenzyl (PMB) ether using sodium cyanoborohydride andtrimethylsilyl chloride (TMSCI) (Johansson et al. (1984) J. CHEM. SOC.2371) and the TES group deprotected with 2% HF (conditions that shouldnot affect the TBS ether (Boschelli et al.(1985) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 26:5239)) to provide 13. The PMB group, following precedent (Johansson etal.(1984) J. CHEM. SOC. 2371; Sutherlin et al.(I993) TETRAHEDRON LETT.34: 4897), should remain on the more hindered secondary alcohol. The twofree hydroxyl groups may be macrocyclized by very slow addition of 13 toa solution of p-nitrophenyl chloroformate (or another phosgene analog),providing 14. The PMB ether is deprotected, and the resulting alcohol isconverted into a triflate and eliminated under kinetic conditions with asterically hindered base to afford vinyloxycarbonate 15.Photodeprotection of the nitrobenzyl either and nitrobenzyl carbamateyields alcohol 16.

The monomer synthesis is completed by the sequential coupling of threecomponents. Chlorodiisopropylaminophosphine 17 is synthesized by thereaction of PCl₃ with diisopropylamine (King et al.(1984) J. ORG. CHEM.49: 1784). Resin-bound (or 3′-o-nitrobenzylether protected) nucleoside18 is coupled to 17 to afford phosphoramidite 19. Subsequent coupling of19 with the nucleoside 20 (Inoue et al. (1981) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 103:7666) provides 21. Alcohol 16 then is reacted with 21 to yield, aftercareful oxidation using m-chloroperbenzioc acid (MCPBA) or 12 followedby cleavage from the resin (or photo-deprotection), the completedmonomer 22. This strategy of sequential coupling of 17 with alcohols hasbeen successfully used to generate phosphates bearing three differentalkoxy substituents in excellent yields (Bannwarth et al.(1987) HELV.CHIM. ACTA 70: 175).

The unique start and stop monomers used to initiate and terminatecarbamate polymerization may be synthesized by simple modification ofthe above scheme.

B) Macrocyclic Fumaramide Library

This Example demonstrates that DNA templated-synthesis can be used tocreate a library of small molecules. In particular, it has been possibleto create a DNA-templated macrocyclic fumaramide library as shown inFIG. 55.

The library synthesis scheme employs robust DNA-templated amineacylation and intramolecular Wittig olefination reactions to generatediverse and partially rigid macrocyclic fumaramides. The fumaramidegroup is stable to neutral solutions but is sufficiently electrophilicto covalently capture nucleophiles when presented at elevated effectivemolarities. Nucleophilic side chains found in target protein activesites may, therefore, be covalently trapped by the fumaramidefunctionality. The key steps in the library synthesis are (i)DNA-templated amine acylation using the sulfone linker, (ii)DNA-templated amine acylation using the diol linker, (iii),DNA-templated amine acylation using a phosphorane linker, and (iv)intramolecular Wittig olefinaton to afford macrocyclic fumaramideslinked to their corresponding DNA templates (FIG. 55).

Macrocyclizaion is potentially the most challenging step of the librarysynthesis. To test this, seven model step 3 substrates were prepared tovalidate the third DNA-templated step and the subsequentmacrocyclization (FIG. 56). Each substrate contained a variety of R₁ andR₂ groups of varying steric hindrances, stereochemistries, and backbonechain lengths. The model substrates were each mixed with one of fourbiotinylated DNA-linked reagents containing both a carboxylic acid and aphosphorane under DNA-templated amine acylation conditions. To evaluateboth amide bond formation and Wittig macrocyclization, a two-stagepurification strategy was implemented. The ten products of theDNA-templated amine acylation (FIG. 56 and step 3 in FIG. 55) werepurified away from unreacted templates by capture withstreptavidin-linked magnetic beads. The captured intermediates then weretreated with pH 8.0 buffer to induce Wittig olefination-mediatedmacrocyclization. Macrocyclization created the fumaramide products(lacking the biotinylated reagent oligonucleotide) to self-elute fromthe magnetic beads. In every case, amine acylation and macrocyclizationproceeded efficiently (FIG. 56) despite the wide range of steric,stereochemical, and backbone diversity in the intermediates. Controlreactions at pH≦6 (too low to form the phosphorane), or at pH 8.0 butlacking the aldehyde group, failed to elute any product. In summary, theDNA-templated amine acylation-Wittig macrocyclization sequence is ahighly efficient route to produce desired macrocyclic fumaramides.

After validating the macrocylization step, a DNA-templated macrocyclicfumaramide library was synthesized. The pilot library was restricted to83 macrocyclic fumaramides containing 4×4×5=80 macrocycles plus threemacrocycles containing either an aryl sulfonamide, a desthiobiotingroup, or both groups as positive controls for binding to carbonicanhydrase or avidin. Reagent oligonucleotides consisted of the six-basecodons flanked by two constant bases on either side conjugated at their3′ ends to aminoacyl donors through the sulfone, diol, or phosphoranelinker as previously reported. Multi-μg quantities of each of the 19DNA-linked amine acylation reagents shown in FIG. 57 were created in asingle day starting from commercially available free amino acids, linkerprecursors, and reagent oligonucleotides as described previously. Thebuilding blocks were chosen to sample structural and functional groupdiversity and include (L) and (D) α-amino acids, α,α′-disubstitutedamino acids, and β-amino acids bearing alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, polar,heterocyclic, negatively charged, and positively charged side chains(FIG. 57). Each of the 19 reagents was successfully tested in singletemplate reactions and generated product with <30% variance inefficiency. All 19 reagents reacted with high sequence-specificity,generating no significant product with mismatched templates even whenfive equivalents of reagent were used.

The macrocyclic fumaramide encoding template library was prepared frommodular coding region cassettes in a single solution (FIG. 58).Oligonucleotides representing all reagent annealing regions werecombined together with T4 DNA ligase in a single solution. Due to thesequence design of the oligonucleotide termini, the desired assembledtemplate library is the only possible product when the ligation iscomplete. Excellent yields of the desired template library resulted froma 4 hour ligation reaction. Following ligation, T7 exonuclease was addedto degrade the non-coding template strand (the desired coding strand isprotected by its non-natural 5′-aminoethylene glycol linker). Thisprocedure provided 20 nmol of the 5′ functionalized single-strandedtemplate library in 6 hours. The constant 10-base primer binding regionsat the ends of each template were sufficient to permit PCR amplificationof as few as 1,000 molecules (10⁻²¹ mol) of template from this assembledmaterial. Three positive control templates were added to produce alibrary containing 83 templates which were then combined with 3.0equivalents of five step I reagents to produce the first librarysynthesis step. Products were purified as described above, thensubjected to the second DNA-templated library synthesis step with fivenew reagents complementing the step 2 coding regions. The efficiency ofboth DNA-templated pilot library steps was judged to exceed 70% bydenaturing gel electrophoresis and densitometry.

As a model for the deprotection prior to step 3, the Pd-mediateddeprotection of DNA-linked Alloc carbamates was executed with excellentefficiency as judged by the liberation of ˜1 equivalent of free aminegroups. The products from each library synthesis step were analyzed bymass spectrometry. In the hope of eliminating the deprotection step, thenecessity of protecting and deprotecting the side chain amine in thestarting material was tested because the lower pK_(a) of the α-amine maypermit selective reaction of the α-amine at a pH that ensuresprotonation of the side chain amine. It was found that the α-amine groupindeed could be selectively and efficiently acylated in a DNA-templatedreaction in the presence of unprotected side-chain amine at pH 6.0. Thismay eliminate the need for a deprotection step following the secondDNA-templated amide formation in step 2.

Several model substrates then were synthesized to validate the thirdDNA-templated step and the subsequent macrocyclization. Each modelsubstrate consisted of a template-linked intermediate containing a freeamine group and a diol linker separated by varying numbers of bonds tosimulate groups of differing sizes during library synthesis. The modelsubstrates were each mixed with one of several biotinylated DNA-linkedreagents containing both a carboxylic acid and a phosphorane underDNA-templated amide formation conditions (pH 6.0, 20 mM EDC, 15 mMsulfo-NHS). DNA-templated amide formation proceeded in >60% yields andproducts were captured with avidin-linked magnetic beads. Bead-boundproduct was treated with 10 mM NaIO₄ at pH 8.5 to effect diol cleavage.The resulting aldehyde group reacted with the phosphorane in aspontaneous Wittig olefination reaction to furnish a cyclic fumaramide,free from the biotin group, that self-elutes from the avidin-linkedbeads (FIG. 59). Importantly, all of the model substrates under wentmacrocyclization in >60% yield, suggesting that this reaction istolerant of a variety of substrate geometries. Control reactionsconfirmed that fumaramide formation was dependent on (i) periodateclevage, (ii) the presence of the phosphorane group, and (iii)successful DNA-templated amide formation (required for capture ontoavidin-linked beads).

C) PNA Polymer Library Formation

Despite significant successes, the generality and sequence-specificityof template-directed polymerization is still largely unexplored. Forexample, the efficient and sequence-specific templated polymerization ofeasily functionalized synthetic monomers lacking a ribose backbone hasnot been reported. Such a system would raise the possibility of evolvingpolymers comprised of these synthetic monomers through iterated cyclesof translation (polymerization), selection, and amplification presentlyavailable only to DNA, RNA, and proteins.

The minimal requirements of a system for synthetic polymer evolutionare: (i) distance-dependent nucleic acid-templated monomer couplingreactions to ensure that oligomerization proceeds exclusively betweenadjacently annealed monomers; (ii) efficient nucleic acid-templatedoligomerization to provide sufficient yields of full-length products forin vitro selections; (iii) stable linkage of each synthetic polymer toits encoding template to ensure the survival of the appropriate templateduring polymer selection; and (iv) a readily functionalized syntheticmonomer backbone to introduce tailor made functionality into thepolymer.

In order to test the feasibility of producing polymers by DNA templatedsynthesis, DNA-templated amine acylation, Wittig olefination, reductiveamination, and olefin metathesis reactions were tested for their abilityto translate DNA sequences into functionalized peptide nucleic acid(PNA) polymers. The proposed PNA monomers are stable and can be easilysynthesized from commercially available α-amino acids containing a widevariety of functional groups (Haaima et al. (1996) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED.ENGL. 35: 1939-1942; Puschl et al. (1998) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 39: 4707).PNAs containing functionalized side chains are known to retain theirability to hybridize to DNA sequence-specifically (Haaima et al. (1996)supra; Puschl et al. (1998) supra).

In the first strategy, PNA serves as the backbone of the functionalpolymer and displays the functional groups of each monomer. In anotherstrategy, the DNA-templated PNA polymerizations organize reactivefunctional groups, enabling a second polymerization reaction betweenthese functional groups (for example, an olefin metathesis or Wittigolefination reaction) to form the synthetic polymer backbone ofinterest.

In both strategies templates consist of 5′-functionalized, singlestranded DNA libraries 50-200 bases long that contain a central regionof variable bases. These templates are made by standard solid-phaseoligonucleotide synthesis combined with enzyme-catalyzed ligation forlonger templates. Monomer structures are chosen to provide chemicalfunctionalities including (i) Brøonsted acidic and basic groups, (ii)nucleophilic and electrophilic groups, (iii) conjugated olefins suitablefor post-PNA polymerization metathesis, and (iv) metal-binding groupscapable of forming complexes with chemically potent transition metals.Representative monomer structures containing these functionalities areshown in FIG. 60. The DNA bases encoding each monomer (the “geneticcode” of these polymers) are chosen from the examples shown in Table 10to preclude the possibility of out-of-frame annealing. These geneticcodes should prevent undesired frameshifted DNA-templated polymertranslation.

Libraries of 5′-functionalized hairpin DNA templates containing up to10¹⁵ different sequences are combined with sets of monomers underconditions that optimize the efficiency and sequence fidelity of eachDNA-templated polymerization. Synthetic polymer strands then arede-annealed from their DNA templates by denaturation, and the 3′ DNAhairpin primer extended using DNA polymerase to generate hairpin DNAtemplates linked to now liberated single-stranded synthetic polymers(FIG. 61). Libraries are characterized by gel electrophoresis and MALDImass spectrometry, and individual representative library members arealso characterized from single template reactions to confirm expectedreaction efficiencies.

Once the libraries of DNA-linked PNAs are characterized, they can besubjected to three types of in vitro selections for: (i) folding, (ii)target binding, or (iii) catalysis. Prior to selection, polymers withanticipated metal binding ability are incubated with one or morewater-compatible metal sources. Selections for folding are performedusing the gel electrophoresis selection described in Example 10.Polymers capable of folding in the presence, but not in the absence, ofmetals serve as especially attractive starting points for the next twotypes of selections.

Selections for target binding can be conducted by incubating thesolution-phase polymer library with either immobilized target or withbiotinylated target followed by streptavidin-linked beads. Non-bindersare removed by washing, and polymers with desired binding properties areeluted by chemical denaturation or by adding excess authentic freeligand. To complete one cycle of functionalized PNA evolution, the DNAtemplates corresponding to the desired PNA library members are amplifiedby PCR using one primer containing the 5′-functionalized hairpin primerand a biotinylated second primer, optionally diversified by error-pronePCR (Caldwell et al. (1992) PCR METHODS APPLIC. 2: 28-33), and thendenatured into single stranded DNA and washed with streptavidin beads toremove the non-coding template strand. The resulting pool of selectedsingle-stranded, 5′-functionalized DNA completes the evolution cycle andenters subsequent rounds of DNA-templated translation, selection,diversification, and amplification.

Selection for synthetic polymers that catalyze bond-forming orbond-cleaving reactions can also be performed. To select forbond-forming catalysts (for example, hetero Diels-Alder, Heck coupling,aldol reaction, or olefin metathesis catalysts), functionalized PNAlibrary members are covalently linked to one substrate through their 5′hairpin termini. The other substrate of the reaction is synthesized as aderivative linked to biotin. When dilute solutions of library-substrateconjugate are reacted with the substrate-biotin conjugate, those librarymembers that catalyze bond formation induce self-biotinylation. Activebond forming catalysts then are separated from inactive library membersby capturing the former with immobilized streptavidin. In an analogousmanner, functionalized PNAs that catalyze bond cleavage reactions suchas retro-aldol reactions, amide hydrolysis, elimination reactions, orolefin dihydroxylation followed by sodium periodate cleavage can also beselected. In this case, library members are linked to biotinylatedsubstrates such that the bond breakage reaction causes the disconnectionof the biotin moiety from the library members. Active catalystsself-elute from streptavidin-linked beads while inactive catalystsremain bound.

Validation of PNA Polymer Library Formation

Peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) are attractive candidates for syntheticpolymer evolution because of their known ability to bind DNAsequence-specifically, and their simple preparation from syntheticallyaccessible amino acids. Previous efforts to oligomerize PNAs on DNA orRNA templates have used amine acylation as the coupling reaction andproceeded with modest efficiency and sequence specificity (Bohler etal.(1995) NATURE 376: 578-581;-Schmidt et al. (1997) NUC. ACIDS RES. 25:4792-4796).

hen five PNA tetramers were combined using a variety of aqueous amineacylation conditions in the presence of DNA templates containingcomplementary 20-base annealing regions, only modest formation (<20%yield) of full-length PNAs, representing five successive couplingreactions, were observed. Even more problematic, however, was theformation of higher molecular weight products independent of theposition of a mismatched 4-base annealing region in the template. Theseobservations indicate that PNAs are able to couple using amine acylationchemistry even when not adjacently annealed, leading to an unpredictablemixture of products.

It was contemplated that the distance independence previously observedin DNA-templated amine acylation reactions was the origin of the poorregiospecificity of amine acylation-mediated PNA couplings. This Exampleshows that it is possible to overcome this problem by replacing thedistance independent amine acylation reaction with a distance dependentDNA-templated reaction, such as a reductive amination reaction.

In order to test this, a thymine-containing PNA monomer amino aldehydewas synthesized and coupled to threonine-linked resin following themethod of Ede and Bray (Ede et al. (1997) TETRAHEDRON LETTERS 38,7119-7122). Standard FMOC peptide synthesis was used to extend thepeptide by three PNA monomers (final sequence: NH₂-gact-CHO), andaqueous acidic cleavage from the resin yielded the desired tetramericpeptide aldehyde 1 (FIG. 62).

A DNA template containing a 5′-amine-terminated hairpin and fivesuccessive repeats of the “codon” complementary to 1 (5′-AGTC-3′) wascombined with 8 μM 1 in aqueous pH 8.5 buffer. The reactants wereannealed (95° C. to 25° C.) and NaCNBH₃ was added to 80 mM. Thereactions were quenched by buffer exchange with a Sephadex column, andsubjected to denaturation (95° C. for 10 minutes in 50% formamide) and15% denaturing PAGE. In FIG. 62, lanes 1 and 2 show that the startingtemplate was almost entirely consumed, and the higher molecular weightproduct was formed in >90% yield. Gel purification of the productfollowing removal of the DNA template with DNase I and MALDI-TOF massspectrometry confirmed full-length pentamer of the gact PNA aldehyde.This result indicates that DNA-templated reductive amination can mediatethe highly efficient oligomerization of PNA aldehydes.

In order to examine the regio- and sequence-specificity of thisreaction, the oligomerization reactions were repeated using a variety oftemplate sequences. When a mismatched DNA template codon (5′-ATGC-3′)was introduced at the second, third, fourth, or fifth 4-base codingregion (i.e., the codon) of the template, highly efficient formation ofproducts corresponding to the coupling of exactly one, two, three, orfour copies of 1, respectively, was observed (see, FIG. 62, lanes 4-14).When the mismatched codon was placed at only the first coding position,or at all five coding positions, no product formation was observed (see,FIG. 62, lanes 3 and 15). The termination of oligomerization at thefirst mismatched codon in every case indicates that the DNA-templatedPNA aldehyde coupling requires functional group adjacency (i.e., ishighly distance dependent), and, therefore, is ideally suited fortemplated polymerization.

The sequence specificity of this system was probed by performingoligomerization experiments using DNA templates containing eightdifferent mismatched codons (ATTC, ATGC, ATCC, AGGC, AGCC, ACTC, ACGC,or ACCC) in the third coding region. Even though four of these codonsdiffer from the matched sequence (ATGC) in only one base, in each caseonly two copies of 1 were coupled to the template (see FIG. 62, lanes5-12). This high degree of sequence specificity raises the possibilitythat libraries of different DNA sequences may be faithfully translatedinto libraries of corresponding polymers using this system, analogous toDNA-templated small molecule synthesis.

It is contemplated that synthetic polymers with desired properties(e.g., binding or catalytic properties) may require lengths beyond thosepreviously achieved efficiently using nucleic acid-templated synthesis.In order to test the ability of the above system to generate longerpolymers in an efficient and sequence-specific manner, DNA templateswere translated with 40-base coding regions encoding ten repeats of theabove matched or mismatched codon into corresponding PNA aldehydepolymers. Polymerizations were carried out as in FIG. 62, except thatthe PNA peptide aldehyde concentration was 16 μM and the reaction timewith NaCNBH₃ was 15 minutes. The results of these experiments are shownin FIG. 63, where the lanes alternate between template (with mismatch atindicated position) and reactions (template plus the gact monomer). AsFIG. 63 illustrates, both denaturing PAGE and MALDI-TOF massspectrometry revealed a single predominant product corresponding to thepolymerization of a full length 40-mer PNA after 15 minutes. Introducinga mismatched codon in the first, third, fifth, seventh, or ninth codingpositions on the template again resulted in truncation (FIG. 63, lanes4, 6, 8, 10, and 12, respectively). This efficient translation of DNAsequences into 40 PNA bases (10 couplings) provides a polymer of lengthsimilar to DNA and RNA oligonucleotides with binding or catalyticproperties, but made entirely of synthetic building blocks.

A challenging requirement of creating libraries of sequence-definedsynthetic polymers in this manner is maintaining sequence specificity inthe presence of multiple monomers of closely related sequence. In orderto study the specificity of DNA-templated polymerization using multiplePNA building blocks in a single solution, nine PNA aldehyde tetramers ofthe sequence NH₂gvvt-CHO (v=g, a, or c) were synthesized. In addition,nine DNA templates containing one of nine codons complementary to gvvtat codon 5, and containing AGTC at the other nine positions wereprepared. Reaction conditions were identical to those from FIG. 63,except that the reaction time with NaCNBH₃ was further shortened to 5minutes and incubation was carried out at 37° C. The first two lanes ofeach panel in FIG. 64 show a positive control polymerization. Eachadditional set of four lanes corresponds to: (i) 20 pmol template, (ii)reaction with 14.4 μM gact, (iii) reaction with 14.4 μM gact plus 1.6 μMPNA aldehyde complementary to the highlighted codon. and (iv) reactionwith 14.4 μM gact plus 0.2 μM of each PNA aldehyde of the sequence gvvtexcept the PNA complementary to the highlighted codon. As expected, eachof the nine templates was translated into a single predominant truncatedproduct corresponding to the incorporation of four copies of 1 when 1was the only PNA building block included in the reaction (37° C., 5 min)(see, FIG. 64). Full-length product was efficiently generated for allnine templates, however, when the PNA aldehyde complementary to thefifth coding sequence was included in addition to 1. When all PNAaldehyde tetramers were included in the reaction except the PNAcomplementary to the fifth coding region, only the truncated product wasefficiently generated (see, FIG. 64).

Taken together, these experiments reveal that DNA-templated PNA aldehydepolymerizations maintain sequence specificity even when a mixture ofdifferent PNA building blocks are present in a single solution.

D) Evolving Plastics

In yet another embodiment, a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA, RNA, derivativethereof) is attached to a polymerization catalyst. Since nucleic acidscan fold into complex structures, the nucleic acid can be used to directand/or affect the polymerization of a growing polymer chain. Forexample, the nucleic acid may influence the selection of monomer unitsto be polymerized as well as how the polymerization reaction takes place(e.g., stereochemistry, tacticity, activity). The synthesized polymersmay be selected for specific properties such molecular, weight, density,hydrophobicity, tacticity, stereoselectivity, etc., and the nucleic acidwhich formed an integral part of the catalyst which directed itssynthesis may be amplified and evolved (FIG. 65A). Iterated cycles ofligand diversification, selection, and amplification allow for the trueevolution of catalysts and polymers towards desired properties.

By way of example, a library of DNA molecules is attached to Grubbs'ruthenium-based ring opening metathesis polymerization (ROMP) catalystthrough a dihydroimidazole ligand (Scholl et al. (1999) OR. LETT. 1(6):953) creating a large, diverse pool of potential catalytic molecules,each unique by nature of the functionalized ligand (see, FIG. 65B).Functionalizing the catalyst with a relatively largeDNA-dehydroimidazole (DNA-DHI) ligand can alter the activity of thecatalyst. Each DNA molecule has the potential to fold into a uniquestereoelectronic shape which potentially has different selectivitiesand/or activities in the polymerization reaction (FIG. 66). Therefore,the library of DNA ligands can be “translated” into a library ofplastics upon the addition of various monomers. In certain embodiments,DNA-DHI ligands capable of covalently inserting themselves into thegrowing polymer, thus creating a polymer tagged with the DNA thatencoded its creation, are used. Using the synthetic scheme shown in FIG.65A, dehydroimidazole (DHI) ligands are produced containing two chemicalhandles, one used to attach the DNA to the ligand, the other used toattach a pedant olefin to the DHI backbone. Rates of metathesis areknown to vary widely based upon olefin substitution as well as theidentity of the catalyst. Through alteration of these variable, the rateof pendant olefin incorporation can be modulated such thatk_(pendant olefin metathesis)<<k_(ROMP), thereby, allowing polymers ofmoderate to high molecular weights to be formed before insertion of theDNA tag and corresponding polymer termination. Vinylic ethers arecommonly used in ROMP to functionalize the polymer termini (Gordon etal.(2000) CHEM. BIOL. 7: 9-16), as well as produce polymers of decreasedmolecular weight.

A polymer from the library is subsequently selected based on a desiredproperty by electrophoresis, gel filtration, centrifugal sedimentation,partitioning into solvents of different hydrophobicities, etc.Amplification and diversification of the coding nucleic acid viatechniques such as error-prone PCR or DNA shuffling followed byattachment to a DHI backbone will allow for production of another poolof potential ROMP catalysts enriched in the selected activity (FIG. 66).This method provides a new approach to generating polymeric materialsand the catalysts that create them.

Example 10 Development of Catalysts by Templated Synthesis

An alternative approach to translating DNA into non-natural, evolvablepolymers takes advantage of the ability of some DNA polymerases toaccept certain modified nucleotide triphosphate substrates (Perrin etal. (2001) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 123: 1556; Perrin et al. (1999) NUCLEOSIDESNUCLEOTIDES 18: 377-91; Gourlain et al. (2001) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 29:1898-1905; Lee et al. (2001) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 29: 1565-73; Sakthievelet al. (1998) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 37: 2872-2875). Severaldeoxyribonucleotides and ribonucleotides bearing modifications to groupsthat do not participate in Watson-Crick hydrogen bonding are known to beinserted with high sequence fidelity opposite natural DNA templates.Importantly, single-stranded DNA containing modified nucleotides canserve as efficient templates for the DNA-polymerase-catalyzedincorporation of natural or modified mononucleotides.

The functionalized nucleotides incorporated by DNA polymerases to dateare shown in FIG. 67. In one of the earliest examples of modifiednucleotide incorporation by DNA polymerase, Toole and co-workersreported the acceptance of 5-(1-pentynyl)-deoxyuridine 1 by Vent DNApolymerase under PCR conditions (Latham et al. (1994) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES.22: 2817-22). Several additional 5-functionalized deoxyuridines (2-7)derivatives were subsequently found to be accepted by thermostable DNApolymerases suitable for PCR (Sakthievel et al. (1998) supra). The firstfunctionalized purine accepted by DNA polymerase, deoxyadenosine analog8, was incorporated into DNA by T7 DNA polymerase together withdeoxyuridine analog 7 (Perrin et al. (1999) NUCLEOSIDES NUCLEOTIDES 18:377-91). DNA libraries containing both 7 and 8 were successfullyselected for metal-independent RNA cleaving activity (Perrin et al.(2001) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 123: 1556-63). Williams and co-workers recentlytested several deoxyuridine derivatives for acceptance by Taq DNApolymerases and concluded that acceptance is greatest when usingC5-modified uridines bearing rigid alkyne or trans-alkene groups such as9 and 10 (Lee et al. (2001) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 29: 1565-73). A similarstudy (Gourlain et al. (2001) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 29: 1898-1905) onC7-functionalized 7-deaza-deoxyadenosines revealed acceptance by Taq DNApolymerase of 7-aminopropyl-(11), cis-7-aminopropenyl-(12), and7-aminopropynyl-7-deazadeoxyadenosine (13).

With simple general acid and general base functionality, chiral metalcenters would expand considerably the chemical scope of nucleic acids.Functionality aimed at binding chemically potent metal centers has yetto been incorporated into nucleic acid polymers. Natural DNA hasdemonstrated the ability to fold in complex three-dimensional structurescapable of stereospecifically binding target molecules (Lin et al.(1997) CHEM. BIOL. 4: 817-32; Lin et al. (1998) CHEM. BIOL. 5: 555-72;Schultze et al. (1994) J. MOL. BIOL. 235: 1532-47) or catalyzingphosphodiester bond manipulation (Santoro et al. (1997) PROC. NATL.ACAD. SCI. USA94: 4262-6; Breaker et al. (1995) CHEM. BIOL. 2: 655-60;Li et al. (2000) BIOCHEMISTRY 39: 3106-14; Li eta l. (1999) PROC. NATL.ACAD. SCI. USA96: 2746 -51), DNA depurination (Sheppard et al. (2000)PROC. NATL. ACAD. Sci. USA 97: 7802-7807) and porphyrin metallation (Liet al. (1997) BIOCHEMISTRY 36: 5589-99; Li et al. (1996) NAT. STRUCT.BIOL. 3: 743-7). Non-natural nucleic acids augmented with the ability tobind chemically potent, water-compatible metals such Cu, La, Ni, Pd, Rh,Ru, or Sc may possess greatly expanded catalytic properties. Forexample, a Pd-binding oligonucleotide folded into a well-definedstructure may possess the ability to catalyze Pd-mediated couplingreactions with a high degree of regiospecificity or stereospecificity.Similarly, non-natural nucleic acids that form chiral Sc binding sitesmay serve as enantioselective cycloaddition or aldol addition catalysts.The ability of DNA polymerases to translate DNA sequences into thesenon-natural polymers coupled with in vitro selections for catalyticactivities would therefore permit the direct evolution of desiredcatalysts from random libraries.

Evolving catalysts in this approach addresses the difficulty ofrationally designing catalytic active sites with specific chemicalproperties that has inspired recent combinatorial approaches (Kuntz etal. (1999) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 3: 313-319; Francis et al. (1998)CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 2: 422-8) to organometallic catalyst discovery.For example, Hoveyda and co-workers identified Ti-based enantioselectiveepoxidation catalysts by serial screening of peptide ligands (Shimizu etal. (1997) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 36). Serial screening was also used byJacobsen and co-workers to identify peptide ligands that formenantioselective epoxidation catalysts when complexed with metal cations(Francis et al. (1999) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. ENGL. 38: 937-941).Recently, a peptide library containing phosphine side chains wasscreened for the ability to catalyze malonate ester addition tocyclopentenyl acetate in the presence of Pd (Gilbertson et al. (2000) J.AM. CHEM. SOC. 122: 6522-6523).

The current approach differs fundamentally from previous combinatorialcatalyst discovery efforts in that it permits catalysts with desiredproperties to spontaneously emerge from one pot, solution-phaselibraries after evolutionary cycles of diversification, amplification,translation, and selection. This strategy allows up to 10¹⁵ differentcatalysts to be generated and selected for desired properties in asingle experiment. The compatibility of this approach with one-pot invitro selections allows the direct selection for reaction catalysisrather than screening for a phenomenon associated with catalysis such asmetal binding or heat generation. In addition, properties difficult toscreen rapidly such as substrate stereospecificity or metal selectivitycan be directly selected using approaches disclosed herein.

Key intermediates for a number of C5-functionalized uridine analogs andC7-functionalized 7-deazaadenosine analogs have been synthesized forincorporation into non-natural DNA polymers. In addition, the synthesisof six C8-functionalized adenosine analogs as deoxyribonucleotidetriphosphates has been completed.

Synthesis of Metal-Binding Nucleotides

A strategy for synthesizing metal-binding uridine and 7-deazaadenosineanalogs is shown in FIG. 68. Both routes end with amide bond formationbetween NHS esters of metal-binding functional groups and amino modifieddeoxyribonucleotide triphosphates (7 and 13). Analogs 7 and 13 as wellas acetylated derivatives of 7 have been previously shown to betolerated by DNA polymerases, including thermostable DNA polymerasessuitable for PCR (Perrin et al. (2001) supra; Perrin et al. (1999)supra; Latham et al. (1994) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 22: 2817-22; Gourlain etal. (2001) Nucleic Acids Res. 29: 1898-1905; Lee et al. (2001) NUCLEICACIDS RES. 29: 1565-73; Sakthivel et al. (1998) ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED.ENGL. 37: 2872-2875). This approach allows a wide variety ofmetal-binding ligands to be rapidly incorporated into either nucleotideanalog. Amino modified deoxy-ribonucleotide triphosphate 7 has beensynthesized using a previously reported route (Sakthivel et al. (1998)supra). As illustrated in FIG. 69, Heck coupling of commerciallyavailable 5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (22) with N-allyltrifluoroacetamideprovided compound 23. The 5′-triphosphate group was incorporated bytreatment of compound 23 with trimethylphosphate, phosphorousoxychloride (POCl₃), and proton sponge(1,8-bis(dimethylamino)-naphthalene) followed by tri-n-butylammoniumpyrophosphate, and the trifluoroacetamide group then removed withaqueous ammonia to afford C5-modified uridine intermediate 7.

C7-modified 7-deazaadenosine intermediate 13, the key intermediate for7-deazaadenosine analogs, has been synthesized. As shown in FIG. 70,diethoxyethylcyanoacetate 24 was synthesized from bromoacetal 25 andethyl cyanoacetate 26 following a known protocol (Davoll (1960) J. AM.CHEM. SOC. 82: 131-138). Condensation of 24 with thiourea providedpyrimidine 27, which was desulfurized with Raney nickel and thencyclized to pyrrolopyrimidine 28 with dilute aqueous HCl. Treatment of28 with POCl₃ afforded 4-chloro-7-deazaadenine 29. The aryl iodide groupwhich can serve as a Sonogashira coupling partner for installation ofthe propargylic amine in 13 was incorporated by reacting 29 withN-iodosuccinimide to generate 4-chloro-7-iodo-7-deazaadenine 30 in 13%overall yield from bromoacetal 25. FIG. 71 shows glycosylation ofcompound 30 with protected deoxyribosyl chloride 38 (generated fromdeoxyribose as shown in FIG. 72), followed by ammonolysis afforded7-iodo-adenosine 39 (Gourlain et al. (2001) NUCLEIC ACIDS RES. 29:1898-1905). Pd-mediated Sonogashira coupling (Seela et al. (1999) HELV.CHEM. ACTA 82: 1878-1898) of 39 with N-propynyltrifluoroacetamideprovides 40, which is then converted to the 5′ nucleotide triphosphateand deprotected with ammonia to yield C7-modified 7-deazaadenosineintermediate 13.

In order to create a library of metal-binding uridine and adenosineanalogs, a variety of metal-binding groups as NHS esters can be coupledto C5-modified uridine intermediate 7 and C7-modified 7-deazaadenosineintermediate 13. Exemplary metal binding groups are shown in FIG. 68 andinclude phosphines, thiopyridyl groups, and hemi-salen moieties.Additional deoxyadenosine derivatives, such as, for example, compounds41 and 42 shown in FIG. 73, can be prepared by coupling alkyl- and vinyltrifluoroacetamides to 8-bromo-deoxyadenosine (31). These intermediatesthen are coupled with the NHS esters shown in FIG. 68 to generate avariety of metal-binding 8-functionalized deoxyadenosine triphosphates.

As alternative functionalized adenine analogs that will both probe thestructural requirements of DNA polymerase acceptance and providepotential metal-binding functionality, six 8-modified deoxyadenosinetriphosphates (FIG. 74) have been synthesized. All functional groupswere installed by addition to 8-bromo-deoxyadenosine (31), which wasprepared by bromination of deoxyadenosine in the presence of scandiumchloride (ScCl₃), which we found to greatly increase product yield.Methyl-(32), ethyl-(33), and vinyladenosine (34) were synthesized byPd-mediated Stille coupling of the corresponding alkyl tin reagent and31 (Mamos et al. (1992) TETRAHEDRON LETT. 33: 2413-2416).Methylamino-(35) (Nandanan et al. (1999) J. MED. CHEM. 42: 1625-1638),ethylamino-(36), and histaminoadenosine (37) were prepared by treatmentof 23 with the corresponding amine in water or ethanol. The5′-nucleotide triphosphates of 32-37 were synthesized as describedabove.

Acceptance of Nucleotides by Polymerase

The ability of the modified nucleotide triphosphates containingmetal-binding functionality shown in FIG. 75 to be accepted by DNApolymerase enzymes was studied. Synthetic nucleotide triphosphates werepurified by ion exchange and reverse-phase HPLC and were added to PCRreactions containing Taq DNA polymerase, three natural deoxynucleotidetriphosphates, pUC19 template DNA, and two DNA primers. The primers werechosen to generate PCR products ranging from 50 to 200 base pairs inlength. Control PCR reactions contained the four natural deoxynucleotidetriphosphates and no non-natural nucleotides. PCR reactions wereanalyzed by gel electrophoresis and the results indicate thatfunctionalized uridine analogs 2, 3, 7, 13, 28, 29, and 30 wereefficiently incorporated by Taq DNA polymerase over 30 PCR cycles, whileuridine analogs 31 and 32 were not efficiently incorporated (see, FIG.75). These results demonstrate that synthetic nucleotides containingmetal binding functionality can both be read as templates andincorporated as building blocks into non-natural nucleic acids using DNApolymerases. The 8-modified adenosine triphosphates 32 and 33 were notaccepted by Taq DNA polymerase, suggesting possible rejection ofmodifications at C8 (see, FIG. 75).

Functionalized nucleotides that are especially interesting yet are notcompatible with Taq, Pfu, or Vent thermostable DNA polymerases can betested for their ability to participate in primer extension using othercommercially available DNA polymerases including the Klenow fragment ofE. coli DNA polymerase I, T7 or T4 DNA polymerase, or M-MuLV reversetranscriptase.

Generation of Polymer Libraries

Non-natural polymer libraries containing synthetianetal-bindingnucleotides that are compatible with DNA polymerases have been created.Libraries of 10¹⁵ different modified nucleic acids consisting of 40random bases flanked by two primer binding regions and containing theimidazole-linked thymine base shown in FIG. 76 have been created. Theselibraries were efficiently generated by three methods: standard PCR,error-prone PCR, and primer extension using large quantities of templateand stoichiometric quantities of only one primer. The resultingdouble-stranded libraries were denatured and the desired strand isolatedusing the avidin-based purification system described hereinabove. Tworounds of in vitro selection on this library for polymers that fold onlyin the presence of Cu²⁺ have been performed using the gelelectrophoresis selection for folded nucleic acids as described herein.

Libraries of nucleic acids containing the most promisingpolymerase-accepted metal-binding nucleotides, including 28-30 (FIG.75), can also be generated. Libraries can be generated by PCRamplification or by primer extension of a synthetic DNA template libraryconsisting of a random region of 20 or 40 nucleotides flanked by two15-base constant priming regions (FIG. 77). The priming regions containrestriction endonuclease cleavage sites to allow DNA sequencing of poolsor individual library members. One primer contains a primary amine groupat its 5′ terminus and will become the coding strand of the library. Theother primer contains a biotinylated 5′ terminus and will become thenon-coding strand. The PCR reaction includes one or two non-naturalmetal-binding deoxyribonucleotide triphosphates, three or two naturaldeoxyribonucleotide triphosphates, and a DNA polymerase compatible withnon-natural nucleotides. Following PCR to generate the double-strandedform of the library, library members then are denatured and thenon-coding strands removed by washing with streptavidin-linked magneticbeads to ensure that no biotinylated strands remain in the library.Libraries of up to 10¹⁵ different members can be generated by thismethod, far exceeding the combined diversity of previously reportedcombinatorial metal-binding catalyst discovery efforts.

Each library then is incubated in aqueous solution with a metal ofinterest from the following non-limiting list of water compatible metalsalts: ScCl₃, CrCl₃, MnCl₂, FeCl₂, FeCl₃, CoCl₂, NiCl₂, CuCl₂, ZnCl₂,GaCl₃, YCl₃, RuCl₃, RhCl₃, Na₂PdC SnCl₂, La(OTf)₃, Ce(OTf)₃, Pr(OTf)₃,Nd(OTf)₃, Sm(OTf)₃, Eu(OTf)₃, Gd(OTf)₃, Tb(OTf)₃, Dy(OTf)₃, Ho(OTf)₃,Er(OTf)₃, Tm(OTf)₃, Yb(OTf)₃, Lu(OTf(₃, IrCl₃, PtCl₂, AuCl, HgCl₂, HgCl,PbCl₂, and BiCl₃ (Kobayashi et al. (1998) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 120:8287-8288; Fringuelli et al. (2001) EUR. J. ORG. CHEM. 2001: 439-455).The metals are chosen in part based on the specific chemical reactionsto be catalyzed. For example, libraries aimed at reactions such as aldolcondensations or hetero Diels-Alder reactions that are known to becatalyzed by Lewis acids are incubated with ScCl₃ or with one of thelanthanide triflates (Fringuelli et al. (2001) supra). In other cases,metals not previously known to catalyze the transformations of interestare also used to evolve polymers with unprecedented activity. Themetal-incubated library is purified away from unbound metal salts usinggel filtration cartridges (available from, for example, PrincetonSeparations) that separate DNA oligonucleotides 25 bases or longer fromunbound smaller reaction components.

The ability of the polymer library (or of individual library members) tobind metals of interest is verified by treating the metalated libraryfree of unbound metals with metal staining reagents, such asdithiooxamide, dimethylglyoxime, or potassium isothiocyanate (KSCN)(Francis et al. (1998) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 2: 422-8) or EDTA(Zaitoun et al. (1997) J. PHYS. CHEM. B 101: 1857-1860), that becomedistinctly colored in the presence of different metals. The approximatelevel of metal binding is measured by spectrophotometric comparison withsolutions of free metals of known concentration and with solutions ofpositive control oligonucleotides containing an EDTA group (which can beintroduced using a commercially available phosphoramidite from GlenResearch, Sterling, Va., USA).

Selecting Nucleic Acid Polymers

Once the libraries of functionalized DNAs are synthesized andcharacterized, they are subjected to three types of in vitro selectionsfor: (i) folding, (ii) target binding, or (iii) catalysis.

(i) Folding. Non-denaturing gel electrophoresis can be used as a simpleselection, to be applied to inventive libraries of modified nucleicacids, to select for nucleic acid folding in the presence of specificmetals of interest. In order to test this selection approach onmolecules similar to future library members, three 60-base DNAoligonucleotides known (Schultze et al. (1994) J. MOL. BIOL. 235:1532-1547) or predicted (SantaLucia (1998) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USA95: 1460-1465) to have very different folded states were synthesized.Each oligonucleotide contained a core 30-base sequence flanked by two15-base primer binding sequences. The unstructured controloligonucleotide contained a poly T core and an EcoR I restriction site.The second core sequence contained a perfect inverted repeat predictedto form a highly stable hairpin, while the third core sequence containeda poly G core known to fold in solution into an intramolecular G-quartet(Cheng et al. (1997) GENE 197: 253-260). The three DNA sequences werecombined in equimolar ratios and the mixture subjected to preparativenon-denaturing gel electrophoresis. The high mobilitv portion of the DNAwas captured and compared by analytic electrophoresis to authentic polyT, hairpin, and poly G oligonucleotides. The results indicate thatfolded DNA sequences can be readily separated from a mixture of foldedand unfolded DNA molecules by non-denaturing gel electrophoresis. Thisselection approach can be applied to the metal-binding polymerlibraries, wherein polymers with anticipated metal binding ability willbe incubated with one or more water-compatible metal sources prior toselection. Polymers capable of folding in the presence, but not in theabsence, of metals will serve as especially attractive starting pointsfor the next two types of selections.

(ii) Target Binding. Selections for target binding can be performed byincubating the solution-phase polymer library with either immobilizedtarget or with biotinylated target followed by streptavidin-linkedbeads. Non-binders are removed by washing, and polymers with desiredbinding properties are eluted by chemical denaturation or by addingexcess authentic free ligand. In order to complete one cycle offunctionalized DNA evolution, the DNA templates are amplified by PCRusing one primer containing the 5′-functionalized hairpin primer and abiotinylated second primer, optionally diversified by error-prone PCR(Caldwell (1 992) PCR METHODS APPLIC. 2: 28-33) or by nonhomologousrandom recombination method, and then denatured into single stranded DNAand washed with streptavidin beads to remove the non- coding templatestrand. The resulting pool of selected single-stranded,5′-functionalized DNA completes the evolution cycle and enterssubsequent rounds of DNA-templated translation, selection,diversification, and amplification.

(iii) Catalysis. Selection for synthetic polymers that catalyzebond-forming or bond-cleaving reactions can also be performed. Librarymembers that catalyze virtually any reaction that causes bond formationbetween two substrate molecules or that results in bond breakage intotwo product molecules can be selected using the schemes proposed inFIGS. 12 and 13. As illustrated in FIG. 12, in order to select for bondforming catalysts (for example, hetero Diels-Alder, Heck coupling, aldolreaction, or olefin metathesis catalysts), library members arecovalently linked to one substrate through their 5′ amino or thioltermini. The other substrate of the reaction is synthesized as aderivative linked to biotin. When dilute solutions of library-substrateconjugate are reacted with the substrate-biotin conjugate, those librarymembers that catalyze bond formation cause the biotin group to becomecovalently attached to themselves. Active bond forming catalysts canthen be separated from inactive library members by capturing the formerwith immobilized streptavidin and washing away inactive polymers. By wayof example, the synthesis and selection of active Heck couplingcatalysts, active hetero diels-alder catalysts and active aldol additioncatalysts may be performed as shown in FIGS. 78A, 78B, and 78C,respectively.

In an analogous manner, library members that catalyze bond cleavagereactions such as retro-aldol reactions, amide hydrolysis, eliminationreactions, or olefin dihydroxylation followed by periodate cleavage canalso be selected, as illustrated in FIG. 13. In this case, metalatedlibrary members are covalently linked to biotinylated substrates suchthat the bond breakage reaction causes the disconnection of the biotinmoiety from the library members. Upon incubation under reactionconditions, active catalysts, but not inactive library members, inducethe loss of their biotin groups. Streptavidin-linked beads can then beused to capture inactive polymers, while active catalysts are able toelute from the beads. Related bond formation and bond cleavageselections have been used successfully in catalytic RNA and DNAevolution (Jäschke et al. (2000) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 4: 257-62).Although these selections do not explicitly select for multiple turnovercatalysis, RNAs and DNAs selected in this manner have in general provento be multiple turnover catalysts when separated from their substratemoieties (Jäschke et al. (2000) CURR. OPIN. CHEM. BIOL. 4: 257-62;Jaeger et al. (1999) PROC. NATL. ACAD. SCI. USD6: 14712 -7; Bartel etal. (1993) SCIENCE 261: 1411-8; Sen et al. (1998) CURR. OPIN. CHEM.BIOL. 2: 680-7).

It is contemplated that catalysts of three important and diversebond-forming reactions (Heck coupling, hetero Diels-Alder cycloaddition,and aldol addition) can be created using the technologies describedherein. All three reactions are water compatible (Kobayashi et al.(1998) J. AM. CHEM. SOC. 120: 8287-8288; Fringuelli et al. (2001) EUR.J. ORG. CHEM. 2001: 439-455; Li et al. (1997) ORGANIC REACTIONS INAQUEOUS MEDIA) and are known to be catalyzed by metals.

Evolving Functionalized DNA Polymers

Following each round of selection, active library members can beamplified directly by PCR with the non-natural nucleotides and subjectedto additional rounds of selection to enrich the library for desiredcatalysts. Libraries may be diversified by random mutagenesis usingerror-prone PCR or by nonhomologous recombination and characterized byDNA sequencing before and after selection. Because error-prone PCR isinherently less efficient than normal PCR, error-prone PCRdiversification is conducted with only natural nucleotides. Themutagenized DNA templates then are translated into non-natural nucleicacid polymers as described above.

In addition to simply evolving active catalysts, the in vitro selectionsdescribed herein may be used to evolve catalysts with propertiesdifficult to achieve using current catalyst discovery approaches. Forexample, substrate specificity among catalysts can be evolved byselecting for active catalysts in the presence of the desired substrateand then selecting for inactive catalysts in the presence of one or moreundesired substrates. Using this strategy, it is contemplated that itwill be possible to evolve libraries of catalysts with unprecedentedregio- and stereoselectivity. By way of example, four types of substratespecificity currently unachievable by known catalysts nor likely to besolvable by current catalyst discovery methods include: (i) Heckcatalysts that operate on para-but not meta-aryl chlorides, (ii) aldolcatalysts that accept ketones but not aldehydes as enolate acceptors,(iii) hetero Diels-Alder catalysts that reject olefin dienophiles, and(iv) hetero Diels-Alder catalysts that accept trans-trans but rejectcis-trans or terminal dienes. Metal-binding polymers containingwell-ordered, three-dimensional dispositions of key steric andelectronic groups may be ideally suited to solving these problems.Similarly, metal selectivity can be evolved by selecting for activecatalysts in the presence of desired metals and selecting againstactivity in the presence of undesired metals. Catalysts with broadsubstrate tolerance may be evolved by varying substrate structuresbetween successive rounds of selection. Characterizing catalysts evolvedby the above methods may provide new insights into developing analogoussmall molecule catalysts with powerful and unprecedented selectivities.

In addition, the observations of sequence-specific DNA-templatedsynthesis in DMF and CH₂Cl₂ suggested that DNA-tetralkylammonium cationcomplexes may form base-paired structures in organic solvents. Thesefindings raise the possibility of evolving non-natural nucleic acidcatalysts in organic solvents using slightly modified versions of theselections described above. The actual bond forming and bond cleavageselection reactions may be conducted in organic solvents, the crudereactions then will be ethanol precipitated to remove thetetraalkylammonium cations, and the immobilized avidin separation ofbiotinylated and non-biotinylated library members in aqueous solutionwill be performed. PCR amplification of selected members will then takeplace as described hereinabove. Successful evolution of reactioncatalysts that function in organic solvents would expand considerablyboth the scope of reactions that can be catalyzed and the utility of theresulting evolved non-natural polymer catalysts.

Example 11 In Vitro Selection for Protein Binding and Affinity

This Example demonstrates that it is possible to perform in vitroselections for nucleic acid-linked synthetic small molecules withprotein binding affinity. These selections (i) offer much greatersensitivities (10⁻²⁰ mol) than previously reported synthetic moleculescreens for protein binding, (ii) can be rapidly iterated to achieve>10⁶-fold net enrichments of active molecules, and (iii) can be adaptedto select for binding specificity.

Because all molecules in a selection are processed simultaneously,selections offer much higher potential throughput than screens.Selections typically do not require sophisticated equipment and can beiterated to multiply the net enrichment of desired molecules. Certainproperties such as binding specificity, although difficult to screen,can be readily selected. Finally, the outcomes of laboratory and naturalselections usually are linked to amplifiable nucleic acids, permittingthe selections to offer far greater sensitivities than screens. Thecovalent linkage of oligonucleotides to corresponding syntheticmolecules, either as a consequence of nucleic acid-templated organicsynthesis or as a result of conjugating a nucleic acid to syntheticmolecules, allows synthetic molecules to be selected and thenidentified. Despite these attractions, selections for syntheticmolecules have been largely unexplored.

At the outset, a variety of synthetic small molecules conjugated to 36-to 42-base DNA oligonucleotides (see, FIG. 79) were synthesized suchthat each small molecule was linked to a unique DNA sequence. The smallmolecules were chosen either for their known binding affinities to sixproteins (see, FIG. 79), or as nonbinding negative controls. Solutionscontaining mixtures of DNA-linked protein ligands and DNA-linkednegative controls were used to simulate DNA-templated synthetic smallmolecule libraries containing small fractions of library members withprotein binding activities.

Selections for protein affinity were performed by incubating mixtures ofDNA-linked synthetic small molecules for 1-2 hours with target proteinscovalently conjugated to beads. The non-binders were removed by washingthe beads with high salt buffer. The bound molecules were then PCRamplified to amplify the DNA oligonucleotides surviving selection.Sequences encoding known protein binding ligands were distinguished fromDNA encoding non-binders by digestion with sequence-specific restrictionendonucleases, permitting their relative ratio to be quantitated by gelelectrophoresis and densitometry. The efficiency of each selection wasassessed by the degree to which DNA-linked protein ligands were enrichedrelative to DNA-linked non-binders (the “enrichment factor”).

Among the protein-small molecule interactions considered, the binding ofglutathione amide to glutathione S-transferase (GST) is among the lowestaffinity (K_(d)=˜10 μM) and, therefore, represents a stringent test ofprotein binding selections for DNA-linked synthetic small molecules. Tomeasure the sensitivity and efficiency of these selections (see, FIG.80), the number of DNA-linked glutathione molecules (1) were varied from10³ to 10⁷ molecules. A 100- to 10⁶-fold molar excess of the negativecontrol N-formyl-Met-Leu-Phe linked DNA (2) was combined with (1) andthe resulting mixture was selected for binding to GST-linked agarosebeads. The selection strongly enriched as few as 10,000 copies of theDNA-linked glutathione by 100- to >10⁴-fold relative to the negativecontrol (FIG. 80). Although the concentrations of DNA-linked moleculesduring selections were much lower than μM, the selections weresuccessful because GST was immobilized at an effective concentrationexceeding ˜10 μl and, therefore, permitted a significant fraction of (1)to remain bound to GST. These results demonstrate that selections formodest protein affinities (for example, K_(d)=˜10 μM) are possible inthis format.

In order to evaluate the generality of this approach, analogousselections were performed for binding to streptavidin, carbonicanhydrase, papain, trypsin, and chymotrypsin in addition to GST (FIG.79). Collectively these six functionally diverse proteins bind theligands shown in FIG. 79 with predicted affinities that span more thaneight orders of magnitude (K_(d)=˜14 μM to ˜40 fM) (D'Silva (1990)BIOCHEM. J. 271: 161-165) (Jain et al. (1994) J. MED. CHEM. 37:2100-2105; Green (1990) METHODS ENZ. 184: 51-67; Otto et al. (1997)CHEM. REV. 97: 133-172). In each of these cases, selectionenriched≦10⁻¹⁶ mol of a known small molecule ligand conjugated to DNA byat least 50-fold over a non-binding negative control (FIG. 79),indicating that DNA conjugation does not impair the ability of theligands in FIG. 79 to bind their cognate protein targets and suggestingthat these selections may be applicable to a wide variety of unrelatedproteins.

Furthermore, selections can be iterated to multiply the net enrichmentof desired molecules. To test this possibility with DNA-linked syntheticmolecules, a 1:1,000 mixture of DNA-linked phenyl sulfonamide(3):DNA-linked N-formyl-Met-Leu-Phe (2) was subjected to a selection forbinding carbonic anhydrase. The molecules surviving the first selectionwere eluted and directly subjected to a second selection using freshimmobilized carbonic anhydrase. PCR amplification and restrictiondigestion revealed that the first round of selection yielded a 1:3 ratioof (3):(2), representing a 330-fold enrichment for the DNA-linked phenylsulfonamide. The second round of selection further enriched 3 by morethan 30-fold, such that the ratio of (3):(2) following two rounds ofselection exceeded 10:1 (>10⁴-fold net enrichment). Similarly, threerounds of iterated selection were used to enrich a 1:10⁶ starting ratioof (3):DNA-linked biotin (4) by a factor of 5×10⁶ into a solutioncontaining predominantly DNA-linked phenyl sulfonamide (3) (see, FIG.81). These findings demonstate that enormous net enrichments forDNA-linked synthetic molecules can be achieved through iteratedselection, and suggest that desired molecules represented as rarely as 1part in 10⁶ (approximately the largest number of different smallmolecules generated in a single library to date) within DNA-templatedsynthetic Libraries may be efficiently isolated in this manner.

In addition to binding affinity, binding specificity is a broadlyimportant property of synthetic molecules. Library screening methods forbinding specificity typically require duplicating the entire screen foreach target or non-target of interest. In contrast, selections forspecificity in principle can be performed in a single experiment byselecting for target binding as well as for the inability to bind one ormore non-targets. In order to validate selections for specificity amongDNA-linked synthetic small molecules, DNA-linked biotin (4), DNA-linkedchymostatin (5), and DNA-linked antipain (6) were combined into a singlesolution in a 24:4:1 ratio, respectively. Because biotin has nosignificant affinity for chymotrypsin or papain, chymostatin binds toboth proteases, and antipain binds only to papain, (see, FIG. 82) thismixture simulates a library containing predominantly nonbindingmolecules with a minor fraction of nonspecific binders and an evensmaller fraction of a target-specific binder.

When this mixture was subjected to two rounds of selection for bindingto papain, both 5 and 6 were enriched at the expense of 4, as expected(FIG. 82). However, when the above mixture was washed withchymotrypsin-linked beads and selected for binding to papain in thepresence of excess free chymotrypsin, only the papain-specific ligand(6) was enriched (FIG. 82). The ability of the selections describedabove to separate target-specific and non-specific DNA-linked syntheticmolecules from a single solution suggests their use to discoversynthetic molecules that exclusively bind a single member of a largefamily of related proteins (e.g., kinases, proteases, orglycotransferases), and that do not bind proteins that commonly reducethe biological efficacy of small molecules (e.g. by sequestering,exporting, or metabolizing them).

In summary, this Example demonstrates the feasibility of performing in *itro selections for DNA-linked synthetic small molecules with proteinbinding activities. The application of methods developed here to nucleicacid-templated (or nucleic acid-conjugated) libraries may play animportant role in the discovery of synthetic molecules with desiredproperties using powerful selection and amplification strategiespreviously available only to biological molecules.

Materials and Methods

DNA Synthesis

DNA oligonucleotides were synthesized on a PerSeptive BiosystemsExpedite 8090 DNA synthesizer using standard phosphoramidite protocols.All reagents were purchased from Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA. Thetemplates for the glutathione S-transferase (GST) selection weresynthesized using a 5 -amino-modifier C12 and all other templates weresynthesized using 5′-amino-modifier C5.

Preparation of Compound (1)

Glutathione was synthesized on the solid phase using standard Bocchemistry at room temperature. 200 mg PAM Resin (Advanced ChemTech) wasswelled in 2 mL DMF for 20 minutes. N-Boc-glycine (Sigma, 640 μmol, 112mg), diisopropylcarbodiimide (570 μmol, 89 μL), and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 57 μmol, 7 mg) were added to the resinand stirred for 4 hours. The resin was washed with DMF and then withDMF/CH₂Cl₂ (1:1). The N-Boc protecting group was removed using two 3minute washes of trifluoroacetic acid (TFA):m-cresol (95:5). The resinthen was washed with DMF:CH₂Cl₂ (1:1) and DMF:pyridine (1:1). A solutionof N-Boc-Cys(Fm)—OH (ChemImpex, 800 μmol, 320 mg),O-(7-Azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluroniumhexafluorophosphate (Aldrich, 720 μmol, 274 mg), 2,6-lutidine (1.2 mmol,131 μl) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA, 750 μmol, 131 μl) in 800μL of 1-methyl-2pyrrolidinone was stirred for 15 minutes and then addedto the resin, stirring for 30 minutes. The resin then was washed withDMF/CH₂Cl₂ (1:1). To remove the N-Boc protecting group on cysteine, asolution of trimethylsilyl triflate (TMS-Otf) (2.8 mmol, 0.5 mL) and2,6-lutidine (4.58 mmol, 0.5 mL) in 1.75 mL CH₂Cl₂ was added to theresin and stirred for 1 hour. The resin then was washed with methanoland then with DMF:CH₂Cl₂ (1:1). Fmoc-Glu-OFm (ChemImpex, 800 μmol, 438mg) was coupled as described above. The fully protected glutathione wascleaved from the resin with a solution of trifluoromethanesulfonicacid:m-cresol:thioanisole:TFA (2:1:1:8), stirring for 1 hours. Themixture was filtered and the filtrate was extracted into hexane. Thecrude extract was purified using preparative thin layer chromatographyin hexane. The silica containing the crude product (R_(f)=0.35) waswashed extensively with hexane:ethyl acetate (4:1). The filtrate wasisolated under vacuum to afford a yellowish solid. Yields for thissynthesis were not optimized.

A solution of protected glutathione (1.1 μmol, 4 mg) in 90 μDMF withN-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS, 11 μmol, 1.3 mg), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide(DCC, 11 μmol, 2.3 mg), and DMAP (5.7 μmol, 0.7 mg) was agitated for 1hour. The mixture was spun down and the supernatant was added to5′-amino-terminated protected DNA on CPG beads. This mixture wasagitated for 2 hours and then the beads were washed with DHF, withCH₃CN, and dried with nitrogen.

Preparation of Compound (2a)

N-formyl-Met-Leu-Phe (MLF) was purchased from Sigma and coupled to5′-amino-terminated protected DNA on CPG beads using the conditionsdescribed for compound (1).

Preparation of Compound (2b)

MLF (10-100 μmol, 0.17 M) was dissolved in dry DMF with 1 equiv.1-hydroxybenzotriazole (Novabiochem), 0.9 equiv.O-Benzotriazol-1-yl-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate(Aldrich), and 2.3 equivalents of DIPEA. The solution was agitated atroom temperature for 1 hour and then added to a unique sequence of5′-amino-terminated protected DNA on CPG beads. The mixture was agitatedfor 1 hour at room temperature. The beads then were washed with DMF,then with CH₃CN, and dried under nitrogen.

Preparation of Compound (3)

Fmoc-Lys(Mmt)-OH (Novabiochem) was attached to amino-terminatedprotected DNA on CPG beads using the method described for compound (2b).The Fmoc group was removed with three 2 minute washes with 20%piperidine in DMF. The mixture then was washed with DNF and then withCH₃CN. The α-amine then was capped with a solution of 5%1-methylimidazole in acetic anhydride/pyridine/tetrahydrofuran(1:1.1:18)for 10 minutes at room temperature. The beads then were washed with DMFand CH₃CN, and then treated with 3% trichloroacetic acid, 1% thioanisolein CH₂Cl₂ for 5 minutes at room temperature to remove the Mmt protectinggroup. The mixture was washed with CH₃CN and dried with nitrogen.Fmoc-Phg-OH (Novabiochem) was attached to the ε-amine of the Lys-linkedDNA using the method described for compound (2b). After removal of theFmoc protecting group, 4-carboxybenzenesulfonamide (Aldrich) wasattached to the beads using the method described for compound (2b). Thebeads were washed with DMF, then with CH₃CN, and dried with nitrogen.

Preparation of Compounds (4a, 4b)

A 5′-biotin modified phosphoramidite (Glen Research, Sterling, Va., USA)was used as the final monomer in the DNA synthesis.

Preparation of Compound (5)

Chymostatin (Sigma) was attached to amino-terminated protected DNA onCPG beads using the conditions described for compound (2b).

Preparation of Compound (6)

Antipain (Sigma, 1.5 μmol, 0.9 mg) was added to a 30 μL solution of 300mM DCC and 300 mM NHS in DMF. After agitating for 1 hour at roomtemperature, this solution was added to 45 μL of 5′-amino terminated DNA(˜200-300 μM) in 0.1 M MES buffer pH 6.0. This DNA had previously beencleaved from the CPG beads and purified by HPLC as described in the nextsection. After 2 hours, this solution was purified by gel filtrationusing Sephadex G-25 followed by reverse-phase HPLC.

The complete structures of synthetic groups 1-6 linked to DNA are shownin FIG. 83.

Characterization of DNA-linked Synthetic Molecules

Small molecule DNA conjugates were cleaved from the CPG beads with asolution of methylamine:ammonium hydroxide (1:1) at 55° C. for 1 hour.The solution was dried under vacuum and then purified by reverse phaseHPLC using TEAA/CH₃CN gradient and analyzed by MALDI-TOF massspectrometry. Stock solution concentrations were determined using TV-Visspectroscopy and serial dilutions were prepared for the selectionexperiments. Samples were stored in water at −20° C.

Preparation of Immobilized Target Proteins

NHS activated Sepharose 4 Fast Flow (Amersham Pharmacia) was prepared inaccordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Equine GST, bovinecarbonic anhydrase (CA), papain, Nα-p-tosyl-L-lysine chloromethyl ketone(TLCK)-treated bovine chymotrypsin, and N-p-tosyl-L-phenylalaninechloromethyl ketone (TPCK)-treated bovine trypsin were purchased fromSigma. Typically, proteins were dissolved in phosphate buffered saline(PBS) buffer pH 7.4-7.6 at concentrations of 20-100 μM. Proteinconcentrations were determined using UV-Vis spectrometry. Proteins wereincubated with beads for 16 hours at 4° C. The beads were capped for twohours with Tris buffer, then washed extensively with the appropriateselection buffer containing 1 M NaCl and then exchanged into theappropriate selection buffer (see, Table 14). Beads were stored for upto 1 month at 4° C. in a volume of selection buffer equal to the initialvolume of beads used. Before use, papain beads were activated using asolution of 5.5 mM cysteine HCl, 1.1 mM EDTA, and 0.067 mMβ-mercaptoethanol for 30 minutes at 4° C. Streptavidin magneticparticles (Roche) were washed 3× with selection buffer before use. TABLE14 Selection and Wash Buffers Composition of Composition of ProteinSelection Buffer Wash Buffers GST PBS pH 7.4 Carbonic 10 mM Tris pH 7.4,10 mM Tris pH 7.4, Anhydrase 0.1 M NaCl 0.25-0.5 M NaCl Papain 50 mMTris pH 7.4, 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 0.1 M NaCl, 1 0.5 M NaCl, 1 mM mM EDTAEDTA Trypsin 50 mM Tris pH 8.0, 50 mM Tris pH 8.0, 0.1 M NaCl, 10 0.5 MNaCl, 10 mM mM CaCl₂ CaCl₂ Chymotrypsin 50 MM Tris pH 8.0, 50 mM Tris pH8.0, 0.1 M NaCl, 10 0.5 M NaCl, 10 mM mM CaCl₂ CaCl, Streptavidin 10 mMTris pH 7.4, 10 mM Tris pH 7.4, 0.1 M NaCl, 1 1.0 M NaCl, 1 mM mM EDTAEDTA

GST Selection

The amount of compound (1), the binding ligand, was varied between 10³and 10⁷ molecules and compound (2a), the non-binding ligand, was used in10²-10⁶ molar excess. (1) and (2a) were added to 40 μL of GST beads andagitated at 4° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was transferred to a 5.0 μmlow-binding Durapore membrane spin filter (Millipore), washed with 2×150μL PBS pH 7.4, 1×100 μL 0.1 M Tris pH 8.0, 0.5 M NaCl, and 1×150 μl PBS.The bound ligands were eluted by agitating the beads with 100 μL 0.1 Mglutathione (Sigma) at room temperature. The eluant was ethanolprecipitated with 3 M sodium acetate and 1 μL glycogen. The precipitatewas used directly for PCR.

Carbonic Anhydrase Selection

Compound (2b), the non-binding ligand, and compound (3), the bindingligand, were added to 40 μL of resuspended beads and were diluted to 400μL with selection buffer. Ratios were similar to those for the GSTselection. The mixture was agitated at 4° C. for 1-2 hours. Selectionsthen were carried out at room temperature. Each mixture was transferredto a spin filter and washed 3× with 400 μL of wash buffer and 1×400 μLwith selection buffer. The resin was removed from the spin filter with60 μL of selection buffer and the resulting beads were subjected to PCR.

Papain Selection

Compound (4a), the non-binding ligand, and compounds (5) or (6), thebinding ligands, were incubated with papain beads and selected asdescribed for the carbonic anhydrase selection.

Chymotrypsin Selection

Compound (4a), the non-binding ligand, and compound (5), the bindingligand, were incubated with chymotrypsin beads and selected as describedfor the carbonic anhydrase selection.

Trypsin Selection

Compound (4a), the non-binding ligand, and compound (6), the bindingligand, were incubated with trypsin beads and selected as described forcarbonic anhydrase.

Streptavidin Selection

Compound (3), the non-binding ligand, and compound (4b), the bindingligand, were incubated with 15 μL streptavidin magnetic particles andagitated at room temperature for 20 minutes. Using a MPC-S magnet(Dynal), the beads were washed 2× with 0.1 M NaOH, 1 mM EDTA (100-200μL), 4× with wash buffer (100-200 μL), and 1× with selection buffer. Thebeads then were resuspended in 15 μL double distilled H₂O.

Iterated Carbonic Anhydrase Selection

10⁸ molecules of compound (3) and 10¹¹ molecules of compound (2b) wereincubated with 40 μL carbonic anhydrase beads for I hours and thenselected as described. After the first round of selection, 5 μL ofresuspended agarose beads were removed for PCR. 6 M guanidinium HCl, 10mM EDTA (40 μL) was added to the beads and the mixture was heated to 90°C. for 15 minutes. The beads were filtered away using a WizardMinicolumn (Promega). The filtrate was buffer exchanged into selectionbuffer using a Centrisep Spin Column (Princeton Separations). A newaliquot of carbonic anhydrase beads was added to the eluted templates.After a second round of selection, the agarose beads were suspended in30 μL of H₂O and 15 μL were used for PCR. The PCR products were digestedwith Hind III, generating the results in FIG. 84.

The triple iteration selection was carried out essentially as describedabove with a few minor changes. The prepared carbonic anhydrase beadswere incubated with ZnSO₄ (1 mM) for 1 hour and then washed extensivelywith selection buffer containing 2 M NaCl. The beads were exchanged backinto selection buffer and used directly for the iterated selection. 10⁹molecules of compound (3) and 10¹⁵ molecules of compound (4b) were addedto the beads and selected as described above. After the first round ofselection, 3 μL aliquot was removed for PCR. A second round of selectionwas carried out as described above and 8 μL aliquot of beads was removedfor PCR. After a third round of selection, the resulting beads wereremoved from the spin filter using 30 μL of double distilled H₂O and 15μL of resuspended beads were used for PCR.

Papain Affinity And Papain Specificity Selections

Affinity selection: 6×10⁹molecules of compound (6), 2.3×10¹⁰ moleculescompound (5), and 1.4×10¹¹ molecules of compound (4a) were added to 40μL papain beads for 1 hour. The beads were washed with papain washbuffer (3×100 μL) and once with 100 μL papain selection buffer. Thebeads were removed from the spin filter with 30 μL of double distilledH₂O. A 3 μL aliquot of resuspended beads were removed for PCR. The DNAconjugates were eluted from the beads by adding 70 μL 6 M guanidiniumHCl and heating the mixture to 90° C. for 15 minutes. The elutedmaterial was buffer exchanged as described in the iterated carbonicanhydrase selection. After a second round of selection, the agarosebeads were removed from the spin filter using 30 μL H₂O and 15 μL ofresuspended beads were used for PCR.

Specificity selection: The same amounts of antipain, chymostatin, andbiotin were added to 40 μL chymotrypsin agarose beads in chymotrypsinselection buffer and incubated for I hour. The beads were spun down andthe flow through was added to 40 μL fresh chymotrypsin beads andincubated for 1 hour. The beads were spun down and 15 μL of 100 μMchymotrypsin in papain selection buffer was added to the flow throughand then incubated for I hour. This solution was added to 40 μL ofpapain beads and selected as described above. The small molecule-DNAconjugates were eluted and buffer exchanged as described, incubated with15 μL 100 μM chymotrypsin for 1 hour and then subjected to a secondround of selection. The beads were removed from the spin filter with 30μL of H₂O and 15 μL were used for PCR.

Contamination Controls

Due to the high sensitivity of these experiments, two importantcontamination controls were used throughout these studies. First, eachselection was carried out as described above except no ligand-DNAconjugates were added to the protein-linked beads, which permittingtesting for buffer contamination and any cross-contamination amongsamples. Secondly, a PCR reaction in which no material from theselection was added was used to test for contamination in primers,dNTPs, and PCR buffers.

PCR Conditions and Gel Electrophoresis Analysis

Templates surviving the selection were amplified using PCR. Allreactions contained 1 μM of each primer and 250 μM of each dNTP(Promega). For the GST selection, the precipitated DNA was used in thePCR reaction and amplified with Platinum Taq (Invitrogen). PCRconditions were step 1: 94° C. 2′; step 2: 94° C., 30 s; step 3: 55° C.,1′; step 4:72° C., 30 s; step 5: go to step 2, x29; step 6: 72° C., 5′;step 7: hold at 4° C. For all other selections, the agarose beads (3-15μL) were used directly in the PCR reaction with Taq polymerase(Promega). PCR conditions were step 1: 94° C., 2′ step 2: 94° C., 30 s;step 3: 55° C., 1′; step 4: 72° C., 30 s; step 5: go to step 2, x24;step 6: 4° C.

The PCR products then were digested for 1-2 hours with the restrictionenzymes (New England Biolabs, 5-10 units) that digest theligand-encoding DNA. Digestion products were analyzed by electrophoresison 3% agarose gels and quantitiated by ethidium bromide staining anddensitometry on a Strategene Eagle Eye II system.

Enrichment Calculations

Enrichment ratios are calculated as the ratio of the fraction of bindingligand surviving the selection as determined by restriction digestion tothe fraction of binding ligand entering the selection as determined bythe known concentrations of the stock solutions.

DNA Sequences of Templates and Primers

Restriction endonuclease cleavage sites are underlined.

DNA Sequences for Glutathione S Transferase Selections: GSH template(1): 5′-GCC TCT GCG ACC GTT CGG AAG CTT [SEQ ID NO: 112] CGC GAG TTG CCCAGC GCG (Hind III) MLF-template (2a): 5′-GCC TCT GCG ACC GTT CGG GAA TTC[SEQ ID NO: 113] CGC GAG TTG CCC AGC GCG (Eco RI) Primer 1: 5′-GCC TCTGCG ACC GTT CGG [SEQ ID NO: 114] Primer 2: 5′-CGC GCT GGG CAA CTC GCG[SEQ ID NO: 115]

DNA Sequences for Carbonic Anhydrase Selections: Phenylsulfonamide-template (3): 5′-CGA TGC TAG CGA AGG AAG CTT CCA [SEQ ID NO:116] CTG CAC GTC TGC (Hind III) MLF-template (2b): 5′-CGA TGC TAG CGAAGG GAA TTC CCA [SEQ ID NO: 117] CTG CAC GTC TGC (Eco RI)Biotin-template (4b): 5′-CGA TGC TAG CGA AGG GAA TTC CCA [SEQ ID NO:118] CTG CAC GTC TGC (Eco RI) Primer 1: 5′CGA TGC TAG CGA AGG [SEQ IDNO: 119] Primer 2: 5′-GCA GAC GTG CAG TGG [SEQ ID NO: 120]

DNA Sequences for Protease Selections: Chymostatin-template (5): 5′-GCAGTC GAC TCG ACC GGA TCC GGC [SEQ ID NO: 121] TAC GAC GTG CAC (BaM HI)Antipain template (6): 5′-GCA GTC GAC TCG ACC CAG CTG GGC [SEQ ID NO:122] TAC GAC GTG CAC (Pvu II) Biotin-template (4a): 5′-GCA GTC GAC TCGACC AAG CTT GGC [SEQ ID NO: 123] TAC GAC GTG CAC (Hind III) Primer 1:5′-GCA GTC GAC TCG ACC [SEQ ID NO: 124] Primer 2: 5′-GTG CAC GTC GTAGCC. [SEQ ID NO: 125]

Example 12 Identification of New Chemical Reactions

This Example demonstrates that it is possible to identify the existenceof new chemical reactions via nucleic acid-templated synthesis. Newchemical reactions have been identified as a result of experiments toselect for, and characterize, bond forming reactions.

A one-pot selection scheme to identify new bond forming reactions issummarized in FIG. 85. Briefly, when n pool A reactants and combinedwith m pool B biotinylated reactants, n×m possible reaction combinationsare available. When the templated reaction is performed under aparticular set of reaction conditions certain combinations of thetemplate (e.g., reactant A27) reacts with certain combinations of thetransfer unit (e.g., the reactant biotinylated B11). The reactionproducts are captured by avidin linked beads. Unreacted templates arenot captured by the avidin and can be removed by washing. The avidincaptured reaction product can then be amplified, for example, by PCR,and the template sequenced to determine its codon sequence. As shown,the amplified template included a sequence tag (coding region) forreactant A27 and a codon sequence (annealing region) for reactant B11.

FIG. 86 provides a schematic overview of a scheme for producing alibrary of compounds, members of which were created by new identifiedchemical reactions. In order to select for bond-forming reactions, fourpool A reactants presenting either a phenyl group (A1B1 and A1B2) or aprimary amine (A2B1 and A2B2) and two biotinylated pool B reactantspresenting either a carboxylic acid (B1) or a methyl ester (B2) wereprepared. The two coding and two annealing regions contained differentrestriction digestion sites to permit the relative quantitiation of eachof the four pool A members from within a mixture. All six reactants (250mol of each pool A reactant and 500 fmol of each of B1 and B2) werecombined in a single pot either in the presence or absence of DMT-MM,which is known to mediate amide formation between amines and carboxylicacids (Gartner et al. (2002) AGNEW. CHEM. INT. ED. 41: 1796-1800;Kunishima et al. (2002) TETRAEDRON 57: 1551-1558). The crude reactionswere passed over streptavidin-linked magnetic beads to select fortemplates encoding bond-forming reactions and washed with denaturant toremove pool A members that did not undergo bond formation with a pool Bmember. The selected molecules were eluted with free biotin andformamide. A fraction of the eluant corresponding to 5 fmol of initialtotal reactants was amplified by PCR and subjected to DNA sequencing andrestriction digestion to determine the ratio of the four possiblereaction-encoding sequences (i.e., reaction of the phenyl group with thecarboxylic acid, reaction of the phenyl group with the ester, reactionof the amine group with the carboxylic acid, and reaction of the aminegroup with the ester) (FIG. 86).

Combining the reactants in the absence of DMT-MM resulted in very littlePCR product formation following selection. In contrast, strong PCRproduct was observed when the reactants were combined in the presence ofDMT-MM (FIG. 86), consistent with the effectiveness of capturing reactedpool A members and the thoroughness of the washing steps. This resultsuggests that the yield of PCR product following selection forbond-forming reactions can serve as a simple screen for the presence ofbond formation within a pool of reactants. To determine the identity ofthe bond-forming reactants, the PCR products were digested with Mse 1,which cleaves the coding region for A2 but not A1, and Tsp45 I, whichcleaves the annealing region for B2 but not B1. An analysis of thedigestion fragments revealed that reaction in the absence of DMT-MMfollowed by selection resulted in a mixture of all four possiblereaction- encoding pool A members (FIG. 86). In contrast, reaction inthe presence of DMT-MM followed by selection generated the A2B1 sequenceand no significant amount of the other three sequences (FIG. 86),indicating strong enrichment for the DNA encoding bond formation betweenthe amine and the carboxylic acid. DNA sequencing of the selected PCRproducts was consistent with the restriction digestion analysis. Theseresults validate the basic principle of the proposed method and systemfor discovering new reactions.

In order to test the ability of the proposed reaction discovery systemto select a single reactive combination out of an even larger excess ofunreactive combinations, the system was programmed with three reactionpossibilities (amine+carboxylic acid, amide+ester, and amine+ester) andcombined the corresponding DNA-linked reactants in proportions thatfavor the unreactive combinations (amide+ester and amine+ester) by100-fold. In the presence of amide coupling reagent DMT-MM, in vitroselection of the resulting mixture for bond-forming reactions resultedin a >1,000-fold enrichment of the template encoding bond formationbetween the amine and carboxylic acid. No enrichment was observed whenDMT-MM was omitted. This result further supports the possibility ofselecting and decoding a single reactive bond-forming combination fromthe planned 30 by 30 matrix of 900 reaction possibilities.

Validation of New Reaction Discovery (Example A)

This Example shows that it is indeed possible to discover new chemicalreactions using DNA-templated synthesis. A 25-reaction matrix containingthe DNA-linked functional groups shown in FIG. 87 was generatedessentially as described in FIG. 9 using the omega architecture, theone-pot assembly method for pool A reactants, and an optimized codonset. Among the 25 possible reactions in this set is the Huisgen1,3-dipolar cycloaddition (Huisgen et al. (1989) PURE APPL. CHEM. 61:613) between an azide and an alkyne. Sharpless and co-workers recentlyreported (Rostoutseu et al.(2002) ANGEW CHEM. INT. ED. ENGL. 41: 2596)that catalytic CuSO₄ and sodium ascorbate dramatically improve theregioselectivity and efficiency of this process, permitting a robustreaction at room temperature. A reaction discovery selection wasperformed on a 1 pmol scale using this 25-reaction matrix either in thepresence or the absence of CuSO₄ and sodium ascorbate.

In the presence of copper and ascorbate, selection for bond-formingreactions followed by PCR amplification and sequence analysis byrestriction digestion highly enriched the pool A template encoding thealkyne- and azide-encoding reactants (see, Lane 2 in FIG. 87B). Incontrast, omitting copper and ascorbate resulted in no enrichment forthe alkyne- and azide-encoding template (see, Lane 3 in FIG. 87B Thereaction discovery selection system therefore successfully“rediscovered” the Cu(I)-mediated coupling of an alkyne and azide.

Validation of New Reaction Discovery (Example B)

This Example shows that the reaction identified in Example A can also beidentified in a 96-reaction matrix. Briefly, a 96-reaction matrixcontaining the DNA-linked functional groups shown in FIG. 88 wasgenerated. Pool A contained 12 reactants (A1-A12) and pool B contained 8biotinylated reactants (B1-B8). When combined, 96 different reactionswere possible.

The reactants (10 fmol each) were combined in the presence of 500 μM Cu(I) at pH 6.0. Following reaction selection and amplification, oneoligonucleotide sequence was enriched. In particular, there was a27-fold enrichment for the template encoding the reaction betweenreactant A2 and reactant B5. The reaction product, like Example appearsto have resulted from a Huisgen cycloaddition reaction. In contrast,when no Cu (I) was present, there was very little PCR product with noenrichment for any combination of the reactants.

Validation of New Reaction Discovery (Example C)

This Example shows another example that it is possible to discover newchemical reactions using nucleic acid-templated synthesis. Inparticular, this Example demonstrates the discovery of a novelPd-mediated coupling reaction.

A library of reactants were created and combined to test for the abilityof nucleic acid-templated Pd-mediated coupling reactions. Two pools ofreactants (see, FIG. 89) were synthesized to give 12 pool A reactants(A1-A12) and 8 biotinylated pool B reactants (B1-B8). When combined, 96different reactions were possible. The reactants (10 fmol each) werecombined in the presence of 1 mM Pd(II) at pH 7.0. Following reactionselection and amplification, five oligonucleotide sequences wereenriched between 10-fold and 22-fold. Analysis of the fiveoligonucleotide sequences revealed that reactions occurred between (i)reactant A2 and reactant B1 (ii) reactant A2 and reactant B4, (iii)reactant A2 and reactant B8 (iv) reactant A9 and reactant B1, and (v)reactant A10 and reactant B4.

As an alternative to sequencing the enriched oligonucleotides, theidentity of the oligonucleotide sequences attached to the reactionproducts were determined by microarray analysis (see, FIG. 90). Alibrary of anti-sense oligonucleotides complementary to each of thetemplates to be included in the reaction matrix are synthesized. Then,individual antisense oligonucleotides (1′-9′ in FIG. 90) complementaryto each template are immobilized at separate addressable locations of amicroarray. The sequence of each anti-sense oligonucleotide immobilizedin the microarray is known. After nucleic acid-templated synthesis, theoligonucleotides attached to the resulting reaction products (forexample, P1 attached to template 1 and product P8 attached to template 8in FIG. 90) are amplified under conditions to permit incorporation of adetectable moiety, for example, a fluorphore, into the amplifiedtemplate. The amplified oligonucleotides then are denatured and combinedwith the microarray under conditions to permit the templateoligonucleotide (for example, oligonucleotide 1 and oligonucleotide 8 inFIG. 90) to hybridize to its immobilized, complementary oligonucleotide.After washing to remove unbound material, the microarray may then bescanned to detect a specific binding event via detection of thedetectable moiety at a particular location. Based on the location of thedetectable moiety and the known sequence of the complementaryoligonucleotide immobilized at that location, it is possible todetermine the sequence of the bound template and thus the reactants thatproduced the reaction product.

This type of microarray analysis approach was used following reactionssimilar to those described in Example B (96-reaction matrix with Cu (I))and in Example C hereinabove (96-reaction matrix with Pd (II)). Themicroarray analysis was found to agree with the DNA sequencing results.Furthermore, the microarray analysis was found to be more direct, moresensitive, and significantly faster (at least 5-fold faster) thanstandard sequencing methodologies.

By way of example, various products of the Pd (II) mediated reactionswere detected via the microarray system, the results of which aresummarized in FIG. 91. FIG. 91 summarizes which reactants in pool Areacted with which biotinylated reactants in pool B to create a product.FIG. 91 also summarizes the level of signal over background andDNA-templated reaction yield for each product. Of particular interest isthe discovery using both sequence analysis approaches of a bond-formingreaction between DNA-linked terminal alkyne A2 and DNA-linked acrylamideB8 in the presence of 1 mM Pd(II) at pH 7 (see. FIGS. 89 and 91). Thisreaction is comparable in efficiency a DNA-templated Heck couplingreactions of aryl iodides and olefins and does not proceed in theabsence of a Pd source. Although Pd-mediated couplings between terminalalkynes and aryl iodides are known (Amatore et al.(1995) J. ORG. CHEM.60: 6829), the Pd-mediated coupling of terminal alkynes with simple orelectron deficient olefins appears to be a new type of reaction scheme.This newly discovered reaction scheme may now be characterized ingreater detail using more conventional larger scale reactions.

Incorporation by Reference

The entire contents of each of the publications, patents and patentapplications cited herein are incorporated by reference into thisapplication for all purposes.

Equivalents

The invention may be embodied in other specific forms without departingform the spirit or essential characteristics thereof. The foregoingembodiments are therefore to be considered in all respects illustrativerather than limiting on the invention described herein. Scope of theinvention is thus indicated by the appended claims rather than by theforegoing description, and all changes that come within the meaning andrange of equivalency of the claims are intended to be embraced therein.

1. a method of inducing reaction between first and second reactive unitsduring a nucleic acid-templated chemical reaction, the method comprisingthe steps of: (a) providing (i) a template comprising a first reactiveunit associated with a first oligonucleotide comprising a codon and (ii)a transfer unit comprising a second reactive unit associated with asecond oligonucleotide comprising an anti-codon capable of annealing tosaid codon, wherein said codon or said anti-codon comprise first andsecond spaced apart regions; (b) annealing said oligonucleotidestogether thereby to bring said first reactive unit and said secondreaction unit into reactive proximity, wherein said codon or saidanti-codon having said first and second spaced apart regions produce aloop of oligonucleotides not annealed to the corresponding anti-codon orcodon; and (c) inducing a covalent bond-forming reaction between saidreactive units to produce a reaction product.
 2. The method of claim 1,wherein at least one of said reactive units is attached adjacent aterminal region of its corresponding oligonucleotide.
 3. The method ofclaim 2, wherein each of said reactive units is attached adjacent aterminal portion of its corresponding oligonucleotide.
 4. The method ofclaim 1, 2, or 3, wherein said codon or said anti-codon is disposed atleast 10 bases away from its corresponding reactive unit.
 5. The methodof claim 1, 2, or 3, wherein said codon or said anti-codon is disposedat least 20 bases away from its corresponding reactive unit.
 6. Themethod of claim 1, 2, or 3, wherein said codon or said anti-codon isdisposed directly adjacent its corresponding reactive unit.
 7. Themethod of claim 1, wherein in said codon or said anti-codon comprisingsaid first and second spaced apart regions, said first region isdisposed directly adjacent a terminus of its correspondingoligonucleotide.
 8. The method of claim 1 or 7, wherein said firstregion of said codon or said anti-codon comprises three, four or fiveadjacent nucleotides.
 9. The method of claim 1 or 7, wherein said firstregion of said codon or said anti-codon comprises five adjacentnucleotides.
 10. The method of claim 1 or 7, wherein said second regionis disposed at least 20 bases away from said reactive unit.
 11. Themethod of claim 1 or 7, wherein said second region is disposed at least30 bases away from said reactive unit.
 12. The method of claim 1,wherein said first reactive unit is covalently attached to said firstoligonucleotide.
 13. The method of claim 1 or 12, wherein said secondreactive unit is covalently attached to said second oligonucleotide. 14.A method of inducing reaction between first and second reactive unitsduring a nucleic acid-templated chemical reaction, the method comprisingthe steps of: (a) providing (i) a template comprising a first reactiveunit associated with a first oligonucleotide having a proximal end and adistal end and comprising a codon and (ii) a transfer unit comprising asecond reactive unit associated with a second oligonucleotide comprisingan anti-codon capable of annealing with said codon, wherein said firstreactive unit is attached to an attachment site intermediate saidproximal end and said distal end of said first oligonucleotide; (b)annealing said oligonucleotides together thereby to bring said firstreactive unit and said second reactive unit into reactive proximity; and(c) inducing a covalent bond-forming reaction between said reactiveunits to produce a reaction product.
 15. The method of claim 14, whereinsaid template comprises a second, different codon capable of annealingto a second, different anti-codon sequence.
 16. The method of claim 15,wherein said first codon is located proximal to, and said second codonis located distal to, said attachment site of said first reactive unit.17. The method of claim 15 or 16, further comprising providing a secondtransfer unit comprising a third reactive unit associated with a thirdoligonucleotide comprising a second, different anti-codon sequencecapable of annealing with said second codon.
 18. The method of claim 17,wherein said first anti-codon of said first transfer unit anneals tosaid first codon of said template and said second anti-codon of saidsecond transfer unit anneals to said second codon of said template. 19.The method of claim 18, wherein said first transfer unit anneals withsaid template concurrently with said second transfer unit, so that saidsecond reactive unit and said third reactive unit react with said firstreactive unit.
 20. The method of claim 14, wherein said first reactiveunit is covalently attached to said first oligonucleotide.
 21. Themethod of claim 14 or 20, wherein said second reactive unit iscovalently attached to said second oligonucleotide.
 22. The method ofclaim 17, wherein said third reactive unit is covalently attached tosaid third oligonucleotide.
 23. The method of claim 14, wherein saidfirst reactive unit is a scaffold molecule.
 24. A method of increasingreaction selectivity among a plurality of reactants in a nucleicacid-templated synthesis, the method comprising the steps of: (a)providing (i) a template comprising a first reactive unit associatedwith a first oligonucleotide comprising a predetermined codon sequence,(ii) a first transfer unit comprising a second reactive unit associatedwith a second oligonucleotide comprising an anti-codon sequence capableof annealing to said codon sequence, and (iii) a second transfer unitcomprising a third reactive unit different from said second reactiveunit associated with a third oligonucleotide without an anti-codonsequence capable of annealing to said codon sequence; and (b) mixingsaid template, said first transfer unit and said second transfer unitunder conditions to permit annealing of said second oligonucleotide ofsaid first transfer unit to said first oligonucleotide of said templatethereby to enhance covalent bond formation between said second reactiveunit and said first reactive unit relative to covalent bond formationbetween said third reactive unit and said first reactive unit. 25-36.(canceled)
 37. A method of increasing reaction selectivity among aplurality of reactants in a nucleic acid-templated synthesis, the methodcomprising the steps of: (a) providing (i) a template comprising a firstoligonucleotide comprising first and second codon sequences, (ii) afirst transfer unit comprising a first reactive unit associated with asecond oligonucleotide comprising a first anti-codon sequence capable ofannealing to said first codon sequence, (iii) a second transfer unitcomprising a second reactive unit associated with a thirdoligonucleotide comprising a second anti-codon sequence capable ofannealing to said second codon sequence, and (iv) a third transfer unitcomprising a third reactive unit associated with a fourtholigonucleotide sequence without an anti-codon sequence capable ofannealing to said first codon sequence or said second codon sequence;and (b) mixing said template, said first transfer unit, said secondtransfer unit and said third transfer unit under conditions to permitannealing of said first anti-codon sequence to said first codon sequenceand said second anti-codon sequence to said second codon sequencethereby to enhance covalent bond formation between said first reactiveunit and said second reactive unit relative to covalent bond formationbetween said third reactive unit and said first reactive unit or betweensaid third reactive unit and said second reactive unit. 38-48.(canceled)
 49. A method of performing stereoselective nucleicacid-templated synthesis, the method comprising the steps of: (a)providing (i) a template comprising a first oligonucleotide optionallyassociated with a reactive unit and (ii) one or more transfer units eachcomprising a second oligonucleotide associated with a reactive unit; (b)annealing said first and second oligonucleotides, thereby bringing atleast two said reactive units into reactive proximity and inducingformation of a covalent bond between said reactive units to form areaction product, wherein said reaction product comprises a chiralcenter and is of at least 60% stereochemical purity at said chiralcenter. 50-53. (canceled)
 54. A method of performing stereoselectivenucleic acid-templated synthesis, the method comprising the steps of:(a) providing (i) at least two templates, one template comprising afirst oligonucleotide associated with a first reactive unit having afirst stereochemical configuration and the other template comprising asaid first oligonucleotide associated with a said first reactive unithaving a second, different stereochemical configuration and (ii) atleast one transfer unit comprising a second reactive unit associatedwith a second oligonucleotide, wherein a sequence of said secondoligonucleotide is complementary to a sequence of said firstoligonucleotide; and (b) annealing said first and secondoligonucleotides together under conditions to permit said secondreactive unit of said transfer unit to react preferentially with eithersaid first reactive unit having said first stereochemical configurationor said first reactive unit having said second stereochemicalconfiguration to produce a reaction product.
 55. A method of performingstereoselective nucleic acid-templated synthesis, the method comprisingthe steps of: (a) providing (i) template comprising a firstoligonucleotide associated with a first reactive unit and (ii) at leasttwo transfer units, one transfer unit comprising a secondoligonucleotide associated with a second reactive unit having a firststereochemical configuration and the other transfer unit comprising asaid second oligonucleotide associated with a said second reactive unithaving a second, different stereochemical configuration, wherein asequence of said second oligonucleotide is complementary to a sequenceof said first oligonucleotide; and (b) annealing said first and secondoligonucleotides together under conditions to permit said first reactiveunit of said template to react preferentially with either said secondreactive unit having said first stereochemical configuration or saidsecond reactive unit having said second stereochemical configuration toproduce a reaction product. 56-59. (canceled)
 60. A method of performingstereoselective nucleic acid-templated synthesis, the method comprisingthe steps of: (a) providing (i) a template comprising a firstoligonucleotide comprising a first codon sequence and a second codonsequence, (ii) a first pair of transfer units, wherein one transfer unitof said first pair comprises a second oligonucleotide with a firstanti-codon sequence associated with a first reactive unit having a firststereochemical configuration and the other transfer unit of said firstpair comprises a said second oligonucleotide associated with a saidfirst reactive unit having a second stereochemical configuration, and(iii) a second pair of transfer units, wherein one transfer unit of thesecond pair comprises a third oligonucleotide with a second anti-codonsequence associated with a second reactive unit having a firststereochemical configuration and the other transfer unit of said secondpair comprises a said third oligonucleotide associated with a secondreactive unit having a second stereochemical configuration; and (b)annealing said template, said first pair of transfer units, and saidsecond pair of transfer units under conditions to permit a member ofsaid first pair of transfer units to react preferentially with a memberof said second pair of transfer units to produce a reaction product.61-64. (canceled)
 65. A method of enriching a product of a nucleicacid-templated synthesis, the method comprising the steps of: (a)providing a first library of molecules comprising a plurality ofreaction products associated with a corresponding plurality ofoligonucleotides, wherein each oligonucleotide comprises a nucleotidesequence indicative of the reaction product associated therewith, andwherein a portion of said reaction products are capable of binding to apreselected binding moiety; (b) exposing said first library of moleculesto said binding moiety under conditions to permit reaction productcapable of binding said binding moiety to bind thereto; (c) removingunbound reaction products; and (d) eluting bound reaction product fromsaid binding moiety to produce a second library of molecules enriched atleast 50-fold for reaction product that binds said binding moietyrelative to said first library. 66-83. (canceled)
 84. A method ofidentifying a new chemical reaction, the method comprising the steps of:(a) providing a library of molecules comprising a plurality of reactionproducts associated with a corresponding plurality of oligonucleotides,wherein each oligonucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence indicativeof the reaction product associated therewith; (b) selecting a particularreaction product associated with its corresponding oligonucleotide; (c)characterizing the reaction product; and (d) identifying a new chemicalreaction that made the reaction product using information encoded bysaid corresponding oligonucleotide. 85-87. (canceled)
 88. A method ofidentifying a new chemical reaction, the method comprising the steps of:(a) providing (i) a template comprising a first reactive unit associatedwith a first oligonucleotide comprising a codon and (ii) a transfer unitcomprising a second reactive unit associated with a secondoligonucleotide comprising an anti-codon, wherein said codon and saidanti-codon are capable of annealing together; (b) annealing theoligonucleotides together thereby to bring said first reactive unit andsaid second reactive unit into reactive proximity; (c) inducing acovalent bond-forming reaction between said reactive units to produce areaction product; (d) characterizing the reaction product; and (e)identifying a new chemical reaction to make the reaction product usinginformation encoded by the template to identify the first reactive unitand the second reactive unit that reacted to produce the reactionproduct. 89-95. (canceled)
 96. A method of identifying a new chemicalreaction, the method comprising: (a) providing (i) a first transfer unitcomprising a first reactive unit associated with a firstoligonucleotide, (ii) a second transfer unit comprising a secondreactive unit associated with a second oligonucleotide, and (iii) atemplate comprising sequences capable of annealing to said firstoligonucleotide and to said second oligonucleotide; (b) annealing saidoligonucleotides to said template thereby to bring said first and secondreactive units into reactive proximity; (c) inducing a covalentbond-forming reaction between said reactive units to produce a reactionproduct; (d) characterizing said reaction product; and (e) identifying anew chemical reaction to make said reaction product using informationencoded by said template to identify said first reactive unit and saidsecond reactive unit that reacted to produce the reaction product.97-103. (canceled)
 104. A reagent of the general formula

capable of transferring a reactive unit to a recipient reactive unit,wherein the oligonucleotide identifies the reactive unit of the reagent.105. The reagent of claim 104, wherein the oligonucleotide is covalentlybonded to the reactive unit.
 106. The reagent of claim 105, wherein theoligonucleotide is covalently bonded to the reactive unit via anautocleaving linker that is cleaved when the reactive unit of thereagent is transferred to the recipient reactive unit.
 107. The reagentof claim 104, wherein oligonucleotide comprises an anti-codon sequence.108. (canceled)
 109. The reagent of claim 104, wherein the reagent is atransfer unit.
 110. A method of transferring a reactive unit to arecipient reactive group, the method comprising the steps: (a) providingone or more reagents of claim 104 or 107; (b) contacting the one or morereagents with a template comprising a recipient reactive unit associatedwith an oligonucleotide comprising a codon sequence under conditionssuch that the oligonucleotide of the reagent hybridizes with theoligonucleotide of the template and the reactive unit of the one or morereagents is transferred to the recipient reactive unit of the template.111. The method of claim 110, wherein the oligonucleotide of thetemplate comprises one or more codons comprising 2 to 50 nucleotides.112. A method of performing nucleic acid templated synthesis, the methodcomprising the steps of: (a) providing (i) a template comprising a firstreactive unit associated with a first oligonucleotide comprising apredetermined codon sequence, (ii) a first transfer unit comprising asecond reactive unit associated with a second oligonucleotide comprisingan anti-codon sequence capable of annealing to said codon sequence, and(iii) a second transfer unit comprising a third reactive unit differentfrom said second reactive unit associated with a third oligonucleotidewithout an anti-codon sequence capable of annealing to said codonsequence; and (b) mixing said template, said first transfer unit andsaid second transfer unit under conditions to permit annealing of saidsecond oligonucleotide of said first transfer unit to said firstoligonucleotide of said template thereby to enhance covalent bondformation between said second reactive unit and said first reactive unitrelative to covalent bond formation between said third reactive unit andsaid first reactive unit wherein the covalent bond between said secondreactive unit and said first reactive unit occurs via a chemicalreaction selected from the group consisting of a substitution reaction,a carbon-carbon bond forming reaction, an elimination reaction, anacylation reaction, an addition reaction, a rearrangement reaction, anoxidative reaction and a reductive reaction.
 113. A method of inducing achemical reaction without the assistance of a ribosome, the methodcomprising the steps of: (a) providing a reactive unit, a firstoligonucleotide comprising a sequence indicative of the identity of thereactive unit, and a second oligonucleotide covalently attached to asmall molecule scaffold comprising sites for functionalization; (b)forming a complex comprising the first and second oligonucleotides; and(c) inducing, without the assistance of a ribosome, a reaction selectedfrom the group consisting of a substitution reaction, a carbon-carbonbond forming reaction, an elimination reaction, an acylation reaction,an addition reaction, a rearrangement reaction, an oxidative reactionand a reductive reaction between the reactive unit and the scaffold atone of the sites for functionalization, such that the complex comprisesa sequence identifying the reactive unit that reacted with the scaffold.114-117. (canceled)
 118. A reagent of the general formulaoligonucleotide−linker−reactive unit, wherein the oligonucleotideidentifies the reactive unit, and wherein the reactive unit has theformula —R₁—R₂(O)—R₃ wherein R₁ is an aryl group or an alkyl chain; R₂is C or S(O); R₃ is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an alkenyl group,and wherein the linker is a chemical moiety that covalently connects theoligonucleotide and the reactive unit.
 119. The reagent of claim 118,wherein the reactive unit has the formula —(CH₂)₄C(O)CH₃
 120. Amicroarray comprising a plurality of single stranded oligonucleotideseach of which is immobilized at a separate addressable location of asolid support, the immobilized oligonucleotides being hybridized to aplurality of products of nucleic acid templated synthesis, wherein eachproduct is associated with a template comprising a plurality of codonsthat encode reactive groups that reacted to form at least part of theproduct of nucleic acid templated synthesis.
 121. A method ofidentifying a product of nucleic acid templated synthesis, the methodcomprising the steps of: (a) providing the microarray of claim 120;washing away unbound material; and (c) detecting any material bound to aparticular location of the microarray.
 122. A method for synthesizing atemplated reaction product, comprising the steps of: (a) providing oneor more transfer units, each comprising an anti-codon, a first reactiveunit, and a linker connecting the anti-codon and the first reactiveunit; (b) providing a second reactive unit attached to a first region ofa codon and capable of a covalent bond-forming reaction with the firstreactive unit, the first region of the codon being complementary to afirst portion of the anti-codon; (c) providing a second region of acodon, the second region of the codon being complementary to a secondportion of the anti-codon; (d) annealing the first and second portionsof the anti-codon to the first and second regions of the codon underconditions allowing sequence-specific nucleic acid hybridization; and(e) allowing the first and second reactive units to form a covalentbond, thereby synthesizing the reaction product.
 123. The method ofclaim 122, further comprising cleaving one or more linkers.
 124. Themethod of claim 123, wherein, after cleavage, at least one linkerremains to connect the reaction product with the codon.
 125. The methodof claim 122, wherein the reaction product is attached to the codon thatdirected its synthesis.
 126. The method of claim 122, wherein the secondregion of the codon is covalently attached to the first region of thecodon.
 127. The method of claim 122, wherein the first region of thecodon is adjacent the reactive unit.
 128. The method of claim 122,wherein the first portion of the anti-codon is adjacent the secondportion of the anti-codon.
 129. The method of claim 122, wherein thefirst region of the codon is three to five nucleotides in length. 130.The method of claim 122, wherein the first region of the codon is morethan five nucleotides in length.
 131. A method for synthesizing acomplex comprising a reaction product and a template for the synthesisthereof, the method comprising the steps of: (a) providing a templatecomprising two or more codons and a first reactive group, wherein atleast one codon comprises first and second spaced apart regions, whereinthe first spaced apart region of the codon is in close proximity withthe first reactive group and the second spaced apart region of the codonis in a distal portion of the template, (b) providing two or moretransfer units, each transfer unit comprising (i) an anti-codon capableof recognizing a codon of the template, (ii) a second reactive unit, and(iii) a linker connecting the anti-codon and the second reactive unit,wherein the anti-codon of one of the transfer units recognizes the firstand second spaced apart regions, (c) contacting the template with atransfer unit under conditions allowing sequence-specific nucleic acidhybridization, (d) allowing the first and second reactive units to forma covalent bond, (e) cleaving a linker, and (f) repeating, for atransfer unit having an anti-codon capable of hybridizing to a newcodon, steps (c) to (f) one or more times.